Current Affairs

Home , DRDO Lakshya, DRDO Nishant, DRDO Rustom, DRDO Ulka, Hans Raj Khanna, Megachile pluto

FEB-2019 CURRENT AFFAIRS

DR. LAKSHMAIAH IAS STUDY CIRCLE

ASHOK NAGAR, HYDERABAD

040-27671427, 8500218036 |[email protected] |drpvlakshmaiah.com

 Separating KEY POINTS OF NEWS from excess information  Gist of DISCUSSION POINTS from Prelims and Mains Perspective

 RELIABLE & CONCISE NOTES for preparation, discussion and revision DLSC

CURRENT AFFAIRS   

Table of Contents

S.No Topic Page No.

POLITY & GOVERNANCE 1-56

1 Goyal unveils Vision 2030,highlighting 10 dimensions in Interim Budget, 2019- 1-3 20 2 Not really bullish on native cow breeds 3-8 3 Legitimacy of the basic structure – On Basic Structure of India’s Constitution 8-11 4 Wrong on the Rohingya 12-15 5 100% use of VVPAT for Lok Sabha polls: EC 15-16 6 India set to overtake Pakistan in number of Haj pilgrims: Naqvi 16-18 7 Pension scheme for workers in informal sector to kick-start from February 15, 18-19 2019 8 The solution is universal – On MGNREGA and PM-KISAN 19-22 9 Time to raise the bar 22-24 10 AMU issue referred to Constitution Bench 24-31 11 SC sends Delhi power tussle case to larger Bench 31-32 12 Auditor’s account 32-35 13 Why only bureaucrats on information panels, asks SC 36-37 14 How the 16th Lok Sabha fared 38-41 15 Discord in Puducherry 41-43 16 7 islands in Andamans, Lakshadweep identified for seaplane operations 43-46 17 Without land or recourse 47-51 18 EVM is ‘information’ under RTI, says CIC 51-52 19 De-odourising sewage 52-54 20 ‘What action can you take against political parties?’ 54-56

INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS 57-99

1 U.S. to pull out of nuclear Treaty 58-59 2 11 EU nations back Guaido as President 60-65 3 Visa crackdown (Indian Diaspora) 66-67 4 No zero-sum games 67-69 5 India, Maldives reverse visa stand-off 69-71 6 Ageing revolution (Iran’s 1979 Revolution) 71-75 7 India revokes Pak.’s MFN status day after terrorist strike in J&K 75-79 8 Trump declares emergency to build border wall 79-83 9 Heralding a new dawn 83-89 10 SushmaDLSC to address OIC meet 89-91 11 Beyond oil 91-99

CURRENT AFFAIRS   

SOCIETY/SOCIAL WELFARE 100-113

1 Centre launches panic button on mobiles. 101-103 2 Assam to cut pay of staff who neglects parents. 103-105 3 Niyamgiri’s Dongria Kondh gird for ‘resistance’ after SC order 106-110 4 Caught between two extremisms. 110-113

HEALTH & EDUCATION 114-125

1 Medical journals publisher under fire 115-118 2 NGOs call for funds to eliminate TB 118-123 3 A fungus that cripples immune system 124-125

ECONOMY 126-166

1 The Pradhan Mantri Kisan Samman Nidhi (PM-KISAN) scheme 127-133 2 Pension for informal sector workers 133-136 3 Ayushman Bharat 136-138 4 Surveying India’s unemployment numbers 138-141 5 Bill shock for power producers 141-144 6 A ‘pink revolution’ quietly takes shape in Maharashtra 144-146 7 RBI cuts rates to spur growth 146-149 8 Angel Tax 149-150 9 The state of the States 150-152 10 Everyone is afraid of data 152-155 11 The shape of the jobs crisis 155-157 12 Is the unemployment crisis for real? 157-161 13 Cabinet approves new National Electronics Policy 161-162 14 Labour Bureau files MUDRA job report 162-164 15 Safety nets – On Unregulated Deposit Schemes Ordinance 164-166

INTERNAL SECURITY 167-177

1 Centre bans Kashmir outfit 168-169 2 Push for generous rehab scheme for Naga cadres 169-172 3 Terror monitor keeps Pak. on grey list, seeks action 172-173 4 Pulwama attack and the subsequent India’s Non-military, Preemptive Strikes 173-177 on terrorist training camps in Pakistan

SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY 178-196

1 India’s 40thDLSC Communication Satellite, GSAT-31, Launched 179-183 2 In a first, Air Force commissions aerial surveillance 183-184 3 The Table that defines chemistry turns 150 185-188

CURRENT AFFAIRS   

4 Antibiotic-resistant NDM-1 gene found in pristine Arctic 188-192 5 India to have own DNS for safe browsing 192-196

ENVIRONMENT 197-230

1 Fundraiser to secure 96 elephant corridors. 198-201 2 Human-elephant conflict kills 1,713 people, 373 pachyderms in 3 years. 201-203 3 Caught down the wire: Punjab’s blackbuck fight for existence. 203-207 4 Vet institute, ambulances mooted in ₹98 crore lion conservation plan. 207-212 5 ‘Flying bulldog’: world’s largest bee spotted again 212-214 6 Removal of sand from Thottappally opposed 214-216 7 Travel on a jet plane, using a little cooking oil 216-220 8 A case for Commons sense 220-222 9 DNA forensics a vital tool in cracking wildlife crimes 223-226 10 Wasted effort: half of India’s waste-to-energy plants defunct 226-230

DLSC

POLITY & GOVERNANCE

DLSC

1. Goyal unveils Vision 2030, highlighting 10 dimensions in Interim Budget, 2019-20

News:  Presenting the Interim Budget 2019-20, Finance Minister Piyush Goyal has laid out the government’s vision for India in 2030, highlighting “10 most important dimensions”.

Analysis:

Most important dimensions of the Vision 2030: 1. To build physical as well as social infrastructure and to provide ease of living. 2. To create a Digital India, digitize government processes with leaders from youth. 3. Making India pollution-free by leading transport revolution with Electric Vehicles and focus on Renewables. 4. Expanding rural industrialization using modern digital technologies to generate massive employment. 5. Clean up rivers, provide safe drinking water to all Indians and ensure efficient use of water through micro-irrigation. 6. Scale up Sagarmala, develop other inland waterways faster, harness India’s long coastline and oceans to power India’s development and growth. 7. Aim at our space programme – Gaganyaan, India becoming the launch-pad of satellites for the world and placing an Indian astronaut into space by 2022. 8. Making India self-sufficient in food, exporting to the world to meet global food needs and producing food in the most organic way. 9. A healthy India via Ayushman Bharat with women having equal rights, ensuring their safety and promoting their empowerment. 10. Transforming India into a ‘Minimum Government, Maximum Governance’ nation with pro-active and responsible bureaucracy.

Summary: The aim of this comprehensive 10-dimensional Vision is to create an India where poverty, malnutrition, littering and illiteracy would be a matter of the past. India would be a modern, technology driven, high growth, equitable and transparent society.

PRELIMS CARDINAL : Highlights of Interim Budget 2019-20: DLSC

Govt. Schemes at a glance:

2. Not really bullish on native cow breeds

News: DLSC  Farmers who rear the best indigenous breeds of cattle win prizes from the government. The Finance Minister Piyush Goyal announced the allotment of ₹750 crore to the Rashtriya Gokul Mission (RGM).

Analysis: Rashtriya Gokul Mission:  Potential to enhance the productivity of the indigenous breeds of India through professional farm management & superior nutrition is immense. For this it is essential to promote conservation and development of indigenous breeds.  The “Rashtriya Gokul Mission” aims to conserve and develop indigenous breeds in a focused and scientific manner.  The objective is to get native breeds to produce more milk, be more fecund, and to raise the quality of Indian cows and bulls. The mission draws inspiration from Article 48 of the Constitution (Organisation of agriculture and animal husbandry), which states as below- “The State shall endeavour to organise agriculture and animal husbandry on modern and scientific lines and shall, in particular, take steps for preserving and improving the breeds, and prohibiting the slaughter, of cows and calves and other milch and draught cattle.”

Objectives:  To undertake breed improvement program for indigenous cattle breeds so as to improve genetic makeup and increase the stock.  To upgrade nondescript cattle using elite indigenous breeds like Gir, Sahiwal, Rathi, Tharparkar, Red Sindhi.  To enhance milk production and productivity of indigenous bovines to eventually outdo Jerseys and Holsteins.  To distribute disease free high genetic merit bulls of indigenous breeds for natural service.

Components:  Establishment of Village level Integrated Indigenous Cattle Centres viz Gokul Gram  Strengthening of bull mother farms to conserve high genetic merit Indigenous Breeds  Establishment of Field Performance Recording (FPR) in the breeding tract.  Assistance to Institutions/lnstitutes which are repositories of best germplasm  Implementation of Pedigree Selection Programme for the Indigenous Breeds with large population  Establishing Gopalan Sangh - Breeder’s Societies  Distribution of disease free high genetic merit bulls for natural service.  Incentive to farmers maintaining elite animals of indigenous breeds  Award to Farmers (Gopal Ratna) and Breeders” Societies (Kamadhenu)  Organization of Milk Yield Competitions for indigenous breeds  Organization of Training Programme for technical and non technical

Criticism: Though the minister talked of “cow welfare” and “farmer distress”, the RGM doesn’t look at ageing and unproductive cattle, which pose a problem to the farmers.

Advantages of Indigenous breeds: IndigenousDLSC cattle (categorized as Zebu) are well known for their quality of heat tolerance and ability to withstand extreme climatic conditions. They also provide cow dung (organic manure), cow urine (medicinal value) and are suited for draught power because of the presence of a hump.

Studies indicate that temperature rise due to global warming will negatively impact milk production. The annual loss in milk production of cattle and buffaloes due to thermal stress in 2020 will be about 3.2 million tonnes of milk costing more than Rs 5000 Crore at current price rate.

The decline in milk production and reproductive efficiency will be highest in crossbred cattle followed by buffaloes. Indigenous Breeds will be least affected by climate change as they are more hardy and robust; Some of them have enormous potential to become high yielding commercial milch animals under optimal farm management.

The pre-requisites for the development of a breed are - a) the presence of a minimum base population and b) a wide selection differential for economic traits

The indigenous dairy breeds with potential for development as commercially viable milch cattle in a shorter time frame are - Sahiwal in Punjab; Rathi and Tharparkar in Rajasthan; and Gir and Kankrej in Gujarat. If these breeds are selectively crossed with bulls selected through sibling and progeny testing, the offsprings would be commercially viable. In this manner the entire population of the breed can be upgraded in a few generations

Summary: Dairy farming has been a traditional source of livelihood and it has a deep connection with the agricultural economy. It is essential to increase productivity of Indigenous breeds in the country through commercial farm management and balanced nutrition.

PRELIMS CARDINAL :

April 25, 2000: Postal department honoured the “Indigenous Breeds of Cattle” by releasing the stamps for Kangayam, Kankrej, Gir & Hallikar

DLSC

MILCH / DAIRY BREED: Gir - also called Bhadawari, Desan, Gujarati, Kathiawari, Sorthi, and Surati. Originated in Gir forests of South Kathiawar (Gujarat); also found in Maharashtra and Rajasthan. Basic colours are white with dark red or chocolate-brown patches or sometimes black or purely red. Horns are peculiarly curved (‘half moon’ appearance). It is known for its hardiness and disease resistance.

Red Sindhi - otherwise called as Red Karachi and Sindhi and Mahi. Colour is red with shades varying from dark red to light, strips of white. Milk yield ranges from 1250 to 1800 kgs per lactation. Bullocks despite lethargic and slow can be used for road and fieldwork.

DRAUGHT BREED:

Hallikar - Originated from the former princely state of Vijayanagar, presently part of Karnataka. The colour is grey or dark grey. Compact, muscular and medium size animal with prominent forehead, longhorns and strong legs. The breed is best known for its draught capacity and for its trotting ability. DLSC

Khillari closely resembles Hallikar breed. Grey-white in colour. Longhorns turn forwards in a peculiar fashion. The horns are generally black, sometimes pinkish. Bullocks are fast and powerful.

Kangayam - also known as kongu & konganad. Originated in Erode and Coimbatore district. Bulls are grey with a dark colour in the hump, fore and hindquarters. Cows are grey or white. The eyes are dark and prominent with black rings around them. Moderate size with compact bodies.

Found around Bargur hills in Erode district, Tamilnadu. Developed for work in uneven hilly terrains. Generally brown colour with white markings. Animals are well built, compact and medium in size. Known for their speed and endurance in trotting.

Pulikulam - commonly seen in cumbum valley of Madurai district, Tamil Nadu. Also known DLSCas Jallikattu madu, kidai madu, sentharai. Small in size, usually grey or dark grey in colour. Well- developed hump. Useful for ploughing. Breeds are active, useful draught animals but not fast trotter.

Alambadi - Originated from Alambadi of Dharmapuri district, Tamilnadu. Grey or dark grey in colour. White markings will be seen in forehead, limb and tail. Horns are backward curving like Mysore cattle. Resembles Hallikar and also known as Betas.

Umblachery - otherwise called as Jathi madu, Mottai madu, Molai madu, Therkathi madu.

Dual Purpose Breeds:  Thaparkar  Hariana  Kankrej  Ongole  Krishna Valley  Deoni

Dwarf Breeds:  Vechur  Punganur

3. Legitimacy of the basic structure – On Basic Structure of India’s Constitution

News: There have been protests over the rule’s legitimacy in certain quarters in response to challenges made to the recently introduced 103rd Constitutional Amendment Act, which provides for reservations based on economic criteria in government jobs and education. The Act amends Articles 15 and 16 of the Constitution, by adding a clause which allows states to make “special provision for the advancement of any economicallyDLSC weaker sections of citizens”.

Context:

Basic Structure of the Constitution:  The word “Basic Structure” is not mentioned in the constitution of India. The doctrine is an Indian judicial principle that the Constitution of India has certain basic features that cannot be altered or destroyed through amendments by the parliament.  In 1967, the Supreme in Golaknath v. State of Punjab held that Fundamental Rights included in Part III of the Constitution are given a “transcendental position” and are beyond the reach of Parliament. It also pronounced any amendment that abridges a Fundamental Right as unconstitutional.  By 1973, the basic structure doctrine triumphed in Justice Hans Raj Khanna’s judgment in the landmark decision of Kesavananda Bharati v. State of Kerala. Previously, the apex court had held that the power of Parliament to amend the Constitution was unfettered. However, in this landmark ruling, the Court adjudicated that while Parliament has “wide” powers, it did not have the power to destroy or emasculate the basic elements or fundamental features of the constitution.  The basic structure doctrine has since gained widespread acceptance and legitimacy due to subsequent cases and judgments.  Some of the features of the Constitution termed as “basic” are listed below: 1. Supremacy of the Constitution 2. Rule of law 3. The principle of Separation of Powers 4. The objectives specified in the Preamble to the Constitution 5. Judicial Review 6. Independence of Judiciary 7. The “essence” of Fundamental Rights in Part III etc..

Analysis: It has now been more than 45 years since the Supreme Court ruled in Kesavananda Bharati v. State of Kerala that Parliament’s power to amend the Constitution was not unlimited, that the Constitution’s basic structure was inviolable. But as entrenched as this doctrine might now be, it remains, to some, a source of endless aversion.  The common criticism is that the doctrine has no basis in the Constitution’s language.  The phrase “basic structure”, it’s argued, finds no mention anywhere in the Constitution.  What’s more, beyond its textual illegitimacy, its detractors also believe the doctrine accords the judiciary a power to impose its philosophy over a democratically formed government, resulting in something akin to what Union Minister Arun Jaitley once termed as a “tyranny of the unelected”.

Unquestionably,DLSC some of this censure is a result of the Supreme Court’s occasionally muddled interpretation of what the Constitution’s basic structure might be.

But to reject the doctrine altogether because the judiciary sometimes botches is not the right approach. For not only is the basic structure canon legally legitimate, in that it is deeply rooted in the Constitution’s text and history, but it also possesses substantial moral value, in that it strengthens democracy by limiting the power of a majoritarian government to undermine the Constitution’s central ideals.

Ever since the Constitution was first amended in 1951, the true extent of Parliament’s power to amend the document has been acutely contested.

Interpreting ‘amendment’:  If Parliament’s powers are considered infinite, the parliamentary executive can be removed, fundamental rights can be abrogated, and, in effect, what is a sovereign democratic republic can be converted into a totalitarian regime.  In Kesavananda Bharati, it was this formulation that shaped Justice H.R. Khanna’s legendary, controlling opinion. The judge said: “Any amending body organized within the statutory scheme, howsoever verbally unlimited its power, cannot by its very structure change the fundamental pillars supporting its Constitutional authority.”  According to him, what could emerge out of an amendment was only an altered form of the existing Constitution and not an altogether new and radical Constitution.  This interpretation, as Sudhir Krishnaswamy has shown, in some depth, in his book, Democracy and Constitutionalism in India, is compelling for at least two reasons.  it represents a careful reading of the text of Article 368  it delivers an attractive understanding of the moral principles that anchor the Constitution  Article 368 grants Parliament the power to amend the Constitution, making it clear that on the exercise of that power “the Constitution shall stand amended”. Therefore, if what has to remain after an amendment is “the Constitution”, naturally a change made under Article 368 cannot create a new constitution.  Such an interpretation is also supported by the literal meaning of the word “amendment”, which is defined as “a minor change or addition designed to improve a text”. Hence, for an amendment to be valid, the constitution that remains standing after such a change must be the Constitution of India; it must continue to possess, in its essence, those features that were foundational to it even at its conception.

Questions to ponder: Were an amendment to be introduced relinquishing control over India to a foreign power, would it not result in the creation of a constitution that is no longer the Constitution of India? Would not such an amendment strike at the root of the Constitution’s Preamble, which, in its original form, established India as a sovereign democratic republic? On any reasonable analysis it ought to, therefore, be clear that the basic structure doctrine is not onlyDLSC grounded in the Constitution’s text and history, but that it also performs an important democratic role in ensuring that majoritarian governments do not destroy the Constitution’s essential character.

 It must be remembered that constitutions are not like ordinary laws. Interpreting one is always likely to be an exercise fraught with controversy.  But such is the nature of our political design that the court, as an independent body, is tasked with the role of acting as the Constitution’s final interpreter, with a view to translating abstract principles into “concrete constitutional commands” as Justice Robert H. Jackson of the U.S. Supreme Court once wrote.  It may well be the case that the basic structure doctrine is derived from the abstract. But that scarcely means it doesn’t exist within the Constitution.

Summary: The basic structure doctrine has been applied by the judges every now and then. It has till date proved to be a very effective tool in deciding the validity of the constitutional amendments. The doctrine, however, had not yet been defined in any of the judgements adequately and sufficiently. There are many things which are basic to the constitution and they cannot be decided beforehand. While the idea that there is such a thing as a basic structure to the Constitution is well established its contents cannot be completely determined with any measure of finality until a judgement of the Supreme Court spells it out. Nevertheless the sovereign, democratic and secular character of the polity, rule of law, independence of the judiciary, fundamental rights of citizens etc. are some of the essential features of the Constitution that have appeared time and again in the apex court’s pronouncements.

PRELIMS CARDINAL :

Elements of the Basic Structure (as declared by Supreme Court): 1. Supremacy of the Constitution 2. Sovereign, democratic and republican nature of the Indian polity 3. Secular character of the Constitution 4. Separation of powers between the legislature, the executive and the judiciary 5. Federal character of the Constitution 6. Unity and integrity of the nation 7. Welfare state (socio-economic justice) 8. Judicial review 9. Freedom and dignity of the individual 10. Parliamentary system 11. Rule of law 12. Harmony and balance between Fundamental Rights and Directive Principles 13. Principle of equality 14. Free and fair elections 15. Independence of Judiciary 16. Limited power of Parliament to amend the Constitution 17. Effective DLSCaccess to justice 18. Principles (or essence) underlying fundamental rights. 19. Powers of the Supreme Court under Articles 32, 136, 141 and 142 20. Powers of the High Courts under Articles 226 and 227

4. Wrong on the Rohingya

News:  Recently, the UN High Commissioner for Refugees (UNHCR) called for a report from India on the deportation of a group of Rohingya refugees to Myanmar in October 2018.  Some experts point out that India’s repatriation of the refugees contravenes international principles on refugee law as well as domestic constitutional rights.

Context: Who is a refugee? (UN Definition)

 someone who has been forced to flee his or her country because of persecution, war or violence.  has a well-founded fear of persecution for reasons of race, religion, nationality, political opinion or membership in a particular social group. Most likely, they cannot return home or are afraid to do so.  War and ethnic, tribal and religious violence are leading causes of refugees fleeing their countries.

Who is an internally displaced person (IDP) ?  Someone who has been forced to flee their home but never cross an international border. These individuals seek safety anywhere they can find it—in nearby towns, schools, settlements, internal camps, even forests and fields. IDPs, which include people displaced by internal strife and natural disasters, are the largest group that UNHCR assists. Unlike refugees, IDPs are not protected by international law or eligible to receive many types of aid, because they are legally under the protection of their own government.  Countries with some the largest internally displaced populations are Colombia, Syria, Democratic Republic of the Congo and Somalia.

Who is a stateless person? Someone who is not a citizen of any country. Citizenship is the legal bond between a government and an individual, and allows for certain political, economic, social and other rights of the individual, as well as the responsibilities of both government and citizen.

A person can become stateless due to a variety of reasons, including sovereign, legal, technical or administrative decisions or oversights. The Universal Declaration of Human Rights underlines that “Everyone has the right to a nationality.”

Who is an asylum seeker?  When people flee their own country and seek sanctuary in another country, they apply for asylum – theDLSC right to be recognized as a “refugee” and receive “legal protection” and “material assistance”.  An asylum seeker must demonstrate that his or her fear of persecution in his or her home country is well-founded.

What is the 1951 Refugee Convention?  The 1951 Geneva Convention is the main international instrument of refugee law. The Convention clearly spells out who a refugee is and the kind of legal protection, other assistance and social rights he or she should receive from the countries who have signed the document.  The Convention also defines a “refugee’s obligations” to “host governments” and certain categories or people, such as war criminals, who do not qualify for refugee status.  The Convention was limited to protecting mainly European refugees in the aftermath of World War II, but another document, the “1967 Protocol”, expanded the scope of the Convention as the problem of displacement spread around the world.

Analysis: A Look at the Global framework:  Refugee law is a part of international human rights law.  In order to address the problem of mass inter-state influx of refugees, a Conference of Plenipotentiaries of the UN adopted the Convention Relating to the Status of Refugees in 1951.  This was followed by the Protocol Relating to the Status of Refugees in 1967.  One of the most significant features of the Convention is the “principle of non- refoulement”. The norm requires that “no contracting State shall expel or return a refugee in any manner whatsoever to the frontiers of territories where his life or freedom would be threatened on account of his race, religion, nationality, membership of a particular social group or political opinion.”  This idea of “prohibition of expulsion” lies at the heart of refugee protection in international law.  It is often argued that the principle does not bind India since it is a party to neither the 1951 Convention nor the 1967 Protocol.  However, the prohibition of non-refoulement of refugees constitutes a norm of customary international law, which binds even non-parties to the Convention. According to the Advisory Opinion on the Extraterritorial Application of Non-Refoulement Obligations, UNHCR, 2007, the principle “is binding on all States, including those which have not yet become party to the 1951 Convention and/or its 1967 Protocol.”  “Article 14” of the “Universal Declaration of Human Rights” provides that everyone has the right to seek and enjoy in other countries ‘asylum from persecution’.

What does the Constitution of India say?  Article 51 imposes an obligation on the state to endeavour to promote international peace and security.  Article 51(c) talks about promotion of respect for international law and treaty obligations.  Therefore, the Constitution conceives of incorporation of international law into the domestic realm. ThusDLSC the argument that the nation has not violated international obligations during the deportation is a mistaken one.

Domestic obligations:  The chapter on fundamental rights in the Constitution differentiates citizens from persons.  All rights are available to citizens, persons including foreign citizens are entitled to the right to equality(Article 14) and the right to life(Article 21), among others.  Some experts opine that the Rohingya refugees, while under the jurisdiction of the national government, cannot be deprived of the right to life and personal liberty (Article 21).  The Rohingya are “among the world’s least wanted and most persecuted people,” according to a BBC report. In Myanmar, they are denied citizenship, the right to own land and travel, or to even marry without permission, says the report.  According to the UN, the Rohingya issue is one of systematic and widespread ethnic cleansing by Myanmar.  Therefore, the discrimination that the Rohingya face is unparalleled in contemporary world politics.

Summary: The Indian Perspective:

 In National Human Rights Commission vs State of Arunachal Pradesh (1996), the Supreme Court held: “Our Constitution confers… rights on every human being and certain other rights on citizens. Every person is entitled to equality before the law and equal protection of the laws. So also, no person can be deprived of his life or personal liberty except according to procedure established by law. Thus the State is bound to protect the life and liberty of every human-being, be he a citizen or otherwise…”  Some experts have opined that India lacks a specific legislation to address the problem of refugees, in spite of their increasing inflow.  The Foreigners Act, 1946, fails to address the peculiar problems faced by refugees as a class. It also gives unbridled power to the Central government to deport any foreign citizen.  Further, the Citizenship (Amendment) Bill of 2019 strikingly excludes Muslims from its purview and seeks to provide citizenship only to Hindu, Christian, Jain, Parsi, Sikh and Buddhist immigrants persecuted in Bangladesh, Pakistan and Afghanistan.  It is important to note that the majority of the Rohingya are Muslims.  Some experts point out that this limitation on the basis of religion fails to stand the test of equality under Article 14 of the Constitution and offends secularism, a basic feature of the Constitution.

DLSC

PRELIMS CARDINAL : Fundamental Rights of Foreigners:

5. 100% use of VVPAT for Lok Sabha polls: EC

News:  The Election Commission informed the Madras High Court that it had made it clear way back in 2017 that there shall be 100% use of the Voter Verifiable Paper Audit Trail (VVPAT) system during the Lok Sabha election this year to gain voter confidence.  The submission was made during the hearing of a PIL petition seeking 100% use of the VVPAT during every election.  The judges dismissed the petition after recording the submissions of the EC that it had already decided to use VVPAT in all booths in accordance with a 2013 Supreme Court directive.

Analysis: VVPAT:  is a method that provides feedback to voters. It is an independent verification printer machine and is attached to electronic voting machines.  It allows voters to verify if their vote has gone to the intended candidate.  When a voter presses a button in the EVM, a paper slip is printed through the VVPAT. The slip contains the name, serial number and poll symbol of the chosen candidate. It allows the voter to verify his/her choice. After being visible to the voter from a glass case in the VVPAT for 7 seconds, the ballot slip will be cut and dropped into the drop box in the VVPAT machine and a beep will be heard.  VVPAT machines can be accessed by polling officers only.

Advantages inDLSC VVPATs:  Enables to verify vote - Instant feedback to voter that vote polled has been allocated to the intended candidate.

 Enables authorities to count the votes manually if there is a dispute in the electronically polled votes.  Operates under a Direct Recording Election system (DRE) which detects fraud and existent malfunctions.  Will ensure greater transparency in voting process.  Gives both the voters and political parties an assurance.

In 2013, the SC had asked the Commission to introduce paper trails in EVMs in a phased manner for the 2014 Lok Sabha Elections. EVMs with VVPAT system ensure the accuracy of the voting system.

Summary: With an intent to have fullest transparency in the system and to restore the confidence of the voters, it is necessary to set up EVMs with VVPAT system because vote is nothing but an act of expression which has immense importance in democratic system. PRELIMS CARDINAL: VVPAT Info:

6. India set to overtake Pakistan in number of Haj pilgrims: Naqvi

News:  Union Minister of Minority Affairs (Mukhtar Abbas Naqvi) said that India is likely to overtake Pakistan in terms of the number of pilgrims sent for Haj pilgrimage this year.

Analysis:  From our DLSC country, Muslims participate in Haj in huge numbers. There are 2 Islamic countries – Indonesia, from where around 2 lakh people participate and then there is Pakistan from where 1,84,000 people participate. As of today, India already has over 1,75,000 participants and we are aiming to supersede Pakistan this year.

 The total number of applications received by the Haj Committee of India (HCoI), around 50% were from women. He also said that there was a gradual rise in the number of women willing to participate in the pilgrimage without a mehram (male companion).

Haj Pilgrimage through Haj Group Organisers:  Ministry of Minority Affairs is the nodal ministry to conduct Haj pilgrimage in India. Haj pilgrimage for the Indian Pilgrims is conducted either through HCoI, which is a statutory organization under the administrative control of Ministry of Minority Affairs or through the Private Tour Operators (PTOs).  The quota of pilgrims is divided between HCOI and PTOs.  The Hajj 2002, the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia made it mandatory for the PTOs to come through their respective Governments. Therefore, from the year 2002, the Government of India evolved a system under which private operators/ travel agents were registered as PTOs and following the registration were allocated quotas from the overall number of seats specified for PTOs.  Till the year 2012, the PTO Policy was formulated annually. However, in the year 2013, a five year PTO Policy for Haj 2013-17 was approved by Hon`ble Supreme Court of India. This Policy remained valid till Haj 2017.  Based on the recommendations of Haj Policy Committee and the evidence based study conducted by IIT Delhi, Ministry framed the PTO Policies for Haj 2018 and subsequently for the next five years i.e. Haj 2019-23.

PRELIMS CARDINAL : About Hajj: The Hajj is an annual Islamic pilgrimage to Mecca that is considered a mandatory religious duty (5th pillar of Islam) by practicing Muslims.

Difference between Hajj and Umrah: Umrah is a pilgrimage similar to Hajj except that it is only recommendatory in nature and not obligatory for all Muslims. In addition, the rituals involving Umrah at Mecca are lesser in number than in Hajj. Umrah is considered of lesser importance and is thus called small pilgrimage.  Umrah is not compulsory while Hajj is obligatory in nature provided a Muslim has financial and physical means to undertake the journey to Kaaba, the house of God.  Hajj is undertakenDLSC during a specific period of the year, while Umrah can be undertaken any time of the year.  Hajj is one of the 5 pillars of Islam while Umrah is not a pillar of Islam.  Umrah can be performed alongside Hajj if an individual so desires.

 The rituals of Tawaf and sa’i are performed in Umrah, while hajj is more complicated, involving staying in Mina, stone pelting and even performing sacrifice.

7. Pension scheme for workers in informal sector to kick-start from February 15, 2019

News:  All unorganised sector workers up to 40 years of age can subscribe to the Pradhan Mantri Shram Yogi Mandhan (PMSYM) scheme, which entails a minimum monthly pension of ₹3,000, from February 15, a Labour Ministry notification said.

Analysis:

PMSYM scheme:  It is a scheme for the unorganised sector workers with monthly income upto Rs 15,000. A sum of Rs 500 crore has been allocated for the Scheme.  This scheme shall provide an assured monthly pension of Rs 3,000 from the age of 60 years on a monthly contribution of a small affordable amount during their working age. It is expected to benefit around 10 crore workers.  The monthly contribution by the worker joining the scheme would be ₹55, with matching contributions from the government. The contributions would rise at higher age. The worker joining the scheme at the age of 40 years would contribute ₹200, while workers at the age of 29 years would pay ₹  The Government will deposit equal matching share in the pension account of the worker every month.  The scheme would cover unorganised workers who are working or engaged as home- based workers, street vendors, mid-day meal workers, head loaders, brick kiln workers, cobblers, rag pickers, domestic workers, washer men, rickshaw pullers, landless labourers, agricultural workers amd construction workers, among others.  The informal workers will not be eligible for the scheme if they are covered under the National Pension Scheme, the Employees’ State Insurance Corporation Scheme or Employees’ Provident Fund Scheme. Workers who are income-tax assesses are also not eligible to join the scheme.  The scheme will be implemented by Labour Ministry (EPFO) and LIC of india This new pension scheme will run alongside the existing Atal Pension Yojana, which guarantees returns post-retirement.

Summary:

Differences between Atal Pension Yojana and PM Shram Yogi Mandhan: This new government scheme is like APY, rather a parallel scheme. The only difference being is that it is only a Rs 3,000 pension scheme. In the new scheme, the govt co-contributes up to 50% of DLSCthe total corpus which is not the case with APY. APY, mainly targeting the unorganised sector employees, offers five slabs of pension from Rs 1,000-5,000 per month upon retirement. Employees in the age bracket of 18-40 years can sign up for an APY account.

PRELIMS CARDINAL : Unorganized Sector Statistics:  Unorganised sector contributes around 50% of the country’s Gross Domestic Product (GDP).

Atal Pension Yojana:

8. The solution is universal – On MGNREGA and PM-KISAN News:  Rural distress has hit unprecedented levels. According to news reports, unemployment is the highest in 45 years.  To decrease some misgivings of the distress, PM-KISAN was one of the announcements in the Budget speech 2019.

Context:  While ₹75,000 crore has been earmarked for this scheme, the MGNREGA continues to be pushed to a severe crisis.  The MGNREGA allocation for 2019-20 is ₹60,000 crore, lower than the revised budget of ₹61,084 crore in 2018-19.  In the last four years, on an average, around 20% of the Budget allocation has been unpaid pending payments from previous years.  While the country stares at an impending drought, workers languish in unemployment.

Pradhan Mantri Kisan Samman Nidhi (PM-KISAN):  It is a farm income support scheme.  Under the scheme vulnerable landholding farmer families, having cultivable land up to 2 hectares, will be provided direct income support at the rate of ₹ 6,000 per year (3 installments of ₹ 2,000 each, in an year).  The schemeDLSC aims to address unrest among cultivators who have suffered due to adverse weather and weak prices.  The Ministry of Agriculture has written to State governments to prepare a database of all eligible beneficiaries along with their Aadhaar numbers, and update land records

“expeditiously”. The letter further states that changes in land records after February 1, 2019 shall not be considered for this scheme.

MGNREGA:  The Mahatma Gandhi National Rural Employment Guarantee Act (MGNREGA) is an act passed by the Parliament that guarantees the right to work by augmenting livelihood security in rural regions by giving a minimum of 100 days of work (per household) in 1 year. The wage employment is offered to all households from which an adult member volunteers for unskilled manual labour.  The MGNREGA is a demand-driven programme, i.e., work must be provided within 15 days of demanding work failing which the Centre must pay an unemployment allowance (UA).  The MGNREGA is neither an income support programme nor just an asset creation programme.  It is a labour programme meant to strengthen participatory democracy through community works.  It is a legislative mechanism to strengthen the constitutional principle of the right to life (Article 21).

Analysis: A comparison: Undoubtedly, farmers’ distress needs urgent attention but let’s see if the PM-KISAN is a reasonable solution. 1. A month of MGNREGA earnings for a household is more than a year’s income support through PM-KISAN anywhere in the country:  For example, if two members of a household in Jharkhand work under MGNREGA for 30 days, they would earn ₹10,080 and a household of two in Haryana would earn ₹16,860 in 30 days. Jharkhand has the lowest daily MGNREGA wage rate, and Haryana the highest. 2. The landless can earn through the MGNREGA(universal programme) but are not eligible for the PM-KISAN scheme(targeted cash transfer programme). Any rural household willing to do manual work is eligible under the Act. According to the 2011 Socio- Economic and Caste Census, around 40% of rural households are landless & depend on manual labour. Notwithstanding the meagre amount, the PM-KISAN might be pitting the landless against a small farmer.  There is substantial evidence to demonstrate that universal schemes are less prone to corruption than targeted schemes.  In targeted programmes, it is very common to have errors of exclusion, i.e., genuine beneficiaries get left out. Such errors go unrecorded and people continue to be left out. 3. No clarity under PM-KISAN with respect to beneficiaries:  It is unclear how tenant farmers, those without titles, and women farmers would be within theDLSC ambit of the scheme.  It is in some of these contexts that strengthening an existing universal programme such as the MGNREGA would have been a prudent move instead of introducing a hasty targeted cash transfer programme.

Field realities:  The Agriculture Ministry’s letter states that “funds will be electronically transferred to the beneficiary’s bank account by [Government of India] through State Notional Account on a pattern similar to MGNREGS”.  There are important lessons to be learned from the MGNREGA implementation.  The Centre has frequently tinkered with the wage payments system in the MGNREGA.  It’s creditable that timely generation of pay-orders have improved, but contrary to the Centre’s claims, less than a third of the payments were made on time.  And in contempt of the Supreme Court orders, the Centre alone has been causing a delay of more than 50 days in disbursing wages.  Repeated changes in processes result in a hurried bureaucratic reorientation on the ground, and much chaos among workers and field functionaries alike.  Field functionaries are pushed to meet stiff targets.  Being short-staffed and inadequately trained, this results in many technical and unforeseen errors.  A rushed manner in which Aadhaar has been implemented for the MGNREGA has created chaos.  Several MGNREGA payments have been rejected, diverted, or frozen as a consequence.  In the last four years alone, more than ₹1,300 crore of the MGNREGS wage payments have been rejected due to technical errors such as incorrect account numbers or faulty Aadhaar mapping. There have been no clear national guidelines to rectify these.  There are numerous cases of MGNREGS payments getting diverted to Airtel wallets and ICICI bank accounts.  In a recently concluded survey on common service centres in Jharkhand for Aadhaar- based payments, it was found that 42% of the biometric authentications failed in the first attempt, compelling them to come later.  The success of the PM-KISAN is contingent on there being reliable digital land records and reliable rural banking infrastructure — both are questionable at best.

Why is strengthening the MGNREGA more prudent than a targeted cash transfer plan like PM-KISAN?  The MGNREGA works have demonstrably strong multiplier effects is a reason good enough to improve its implementation.  The MGNREGA wage rates in 18 States have been kept lower than the States’ minimum agricultural wage rates. This acts as a deterrent for the landless. Yet, work demand has been 33% more than the employment provided this year — underscoring the desperation to work. By routinely under-funding this Act, the government continues to undermine the constitutional guarantee.  In an employment programme, adequacy of fund allocation and respectable wages are crucial. DLSC Summary: At a time of such acute distress, the Central government must improve the existing universal infrastructure of the MGNREGA before plunging into a programme pretending to

augment farmers’ income. The continued harassment faced by people due to the problems in effective implementation of MGNREGA is a more humane question to address rather than brushing them aside as “teething problems” and build a new scheme on similar shaky platforms. PRELIMS CARDINAL : About NREGA:

9. Time to raise the bar

News:  Justice A.K. Sikri, who is a well-regarded judge of the Supreme Court of India, found himself in the eye of a storm arising from accepting a post offered by the government, last year, while being a judge of the court.  By later turning down the offer after the controversy erupted, he substantially redeemed the judiciary’s and his own honour.  However, this is an issue that recurs frequently. Even titans in the legal field have had to face stinging rebuke from respected members of the fraternity for similar lapses.

Analysis:

The case of M.C. Chagla:  When we take the case of the late Justice M.C. Chagla, we realize that both he and the former Attorney General of India, M.C. Setalvad, were members of the First Law Commission.DLSC  Speaking as members of the Law Commission they had categorically denounced the proclivity of judges accepting post-retirement jobs sponsored by governments and called for an end to it.

 Unfortunately, in his post-retirement assignments, Justice Chagla violated the very same principle he had supported.  After retirement, he accepted a government appointment to serve as Indian Ambassador to the U.S. (1958-61) and later as Indian High Commissioner to the U.K (1962- 1963).  Soon after this he was asked to be minister for education in Nehru’s cabinet, which he again accepted. He served as Education Minister (1963-66) and then as Minister for External Affairs (1966-67).  All this incensed his good friend M.C. Setalvad no end. In his book, My Life: Law and Other Things, he did not mince words in commenting on this serious lapse. He observed: “The Law Commission had, after careful consideration, expressed the unanimous view that the practice of a judge looking forward to accepting employment under the government after retirement was undesirable as it could affect the independence of the judiciary… He was so keen to get into politics that soon after the report was signed by him he resigned his office to become India’s Ambassador to the United States. His action was characteristic of the self-seeking attitude of many of our leading men.”  These harsh words are possibly unfair to a person of the calibre of Justice Chagla. As a matter of fact, in none of the posts he held could he be accused of having acted as a sidekick to the government.  On the other hand, by declaring in 1965 that the Aligarh Muslim University could not claim minority status conferred under Article 30(1) of the Constitution, he even earned the collective ire of his cabinet members.  Having said this, the shrill denunciations of the Law Commission on judges accepting post-retirement posts and Setalvad’s repeated calls to honour the “principle merit acceptance” even today.  In a study, the Vidhi Centre for Legal Policy pointed out that as many as 70 out of 100 Supreme Court retired judges have taken up assignments in the  National Human Rights Commission,  National Consumer Disputes Redressal Commission,  Armed Forces Tribunal, and  the Law Commission of India, etc  In Rojer Mathew vs South Indian Bank Ltd. — which is currently going into the issue of tribunalisation of the judiciary and its challenges to the independence of the judiciary — it has been observed that: “The Tribunals should not be a haven for retired persons and appointment process should not result in decisions being influenced if the Government itself is a litigant and appointment authority at the same time.”

Striking a balance:  At the same time, it is also true that the valuable experience and insights that competent and honest judges acquire during their period of service cannot be wasted after retirement.  It is importantDLSC to note that unlike abroad, a judge of the higher judiciary in India retires at a comparatively young age and is capable of many more years of productive work.  Having said this, government-sponsored post-retirement appointments will continue to raise a ‘cloud of suspicion’ over the judgments the best judges delivered while in

service. Though cliched, it is true that in law, justice must not only be done, but also be seen to be done.  Therefore, the viable option is to expeditiously establish, through a properly enacted statute, a commission made up of a majority, if not exclusively, of retired judges to make appointments of competent retired judges to tribunals and judicial bodies.

Summary:

The Way Forward:  It is true that judges cannot legislate. However, where a void is found in the legal framework that requires immediate attention, and legislative intervention is not likely to emerge immediately, the Supreme Court is empowered to provide an interim solution till legislation is passed to address the hiatus.  This process the top court has followed, to cite an instance (there are others), in the Vishaka case, where it laid down guidelines in 1997 to deal with sexual harassment in workplaces, till a law was passed by Parliament.  It is desirable the Supreme Court invokes that methodology now and puts in place a process to regulate post-retirement appointments for judges. Such a process must sufficiently insulate the judiciary from the charge of being a recipient of government largesse.  In these times, the attacks on the fabric of independence of the judiciary will not be through engulfing flames but through small corrosive doses. Therefore, it is in the judiciary’s own interests to resolve this issue as expeditiously as it can.

PRELIMS CARDINAL : Third Schedule - Forms of Oaths or Affirmations

10. AMU issue referred to Constitution Bench

News: DLSC  The Supreme Court had referred the contentious issue of minority status for Aligarh Muslim University to a seven-judge Constitution Bench.

 A Bench of Chief Justice Ranjan Gogoi and Justices L. Nageswara Rao and Sanjiv Khanna agreed that the issue of the varsity seeking minority status needed to be referred to a larger Bench.

Context:  AMU was founded as the “Madrasatul Uloom” in 1875 in Aligarh, and evolved into the “Mohammedan Anglo Oriental College”.  In 1920, the Indian Legislative Council set up the university, and all assets of Mohammedan Anglo Oriental College were transferred to it. Those arguing for minority character say that this was done by an Act as that was the only way a university could be set up at the time.  In Azeez Basha vs UoI 1967, the SC ruled that AMU was not a minority educational institution as it was set up by British legislature, and not by Muslims.  In 1981, Parliament passed an AMU Amendment Act, which accepted that AMU was set up by Muslims.  The Allahabad High Court in 1981, ruled that the 1981 Act was ultra vires of the Constitution, and that AMU was not a minority educational institution. But, this HC decision was stalled by SC.  Recently, the Central government has filed a fresh affidavit in SC reversing the earlier position that the AMU, a Central University, cannot be granted minority status on the ground that the university was established by an Act of Parliament and not set up by religious minorities.

Constitutional Provisions regarding Minority Educational Institutions (MEI):  Article 30(1) - recognizes linguistic and religious minorities only, but not those based on race, ethnicity.  It recognizes the right of religious and linguistic minorities to establish and administer educational institutions, in effect recognizing the role educational institutions play in preserving distinct culture.  Article 26 - A majority community can also establish and administer educational institution but they will not enjoy special rights.

Special rights of Religious Minority Educational Institutions (MEI):  Art 30(1A) - MEIs enjoy right to education as a Fundamental Right. In case the property is taken over by state, due compensation to be provided to establish institutions elsewhere.  Under Article 15(5), MEIs are not considered for reservation.  Under Right to Education Act (2009), MEI is not required to provide admission to children in the age group of 6-14 years upto 25% of enrolment reserved for economically backward section of society.  In St Stephens vs Delhi University case, 1992, SC ruled that MEIs can have 50% seats reserved forDLSC minorities.  In TMA Pai & others vs State of Karnataka & others, 2002 case, SC ruled that MEIs can have separate admission process which is fair, transparent and merit based. They can also separate fee structure, but should not charge capitation fee.

Analysis: Why the debate?  While a number of minority educational institutions exist, there are issues with regard to minority universities. This is because for incorporating any university, a statute is needed and that is done by state.  Those who oppose the tag of MEI being accorded to AMU argue that since the universities was established through an Act of Parliament, they are not MEIs.  Those who support the tag of MEI (argue against the current government’s stand) hold that there is a difference between ‘incorporation’ and ‘establishment’. The statutes incorporate these institutions as universities but they are still established by minorities and hence are liable to enjoy the special rights accorded to MEI mentioned above. Supreme Court’s Judgement in Azeez Basha Case, 1967:  SC held that the term “educational institution” does include a “university”.  It also observed that the minority have the choice to choose a ‘central university’ with some governmental supervision, and whose degrees are recognized at par with degrees of other universities.  The Court in the 1967 case has also not ruled out possibility of a central university being a minority institution. It merely said that from the provisions of the AMU Act, 1920, it is not clear that it is a minority institution. This is the heart of this case.  Analysis of reasoning of the SC in Azeez Basha case simply means that a religious or linguistic minority is debarred from establishing a university inasmuch as a university can only be established either by an act of the Central or state legislature. This contradicts Azeez Basha’s own position that an educational institution, for the purpose of Article 30(1), includes a university as well.  Confusion emanates from the blurring of the distinction between the words “establish” and “incorporate”. Founding a university afresh with all its buildings and other infrastructure is altogether different from merely incorporating or upgrading an existing functional institution. We should not overstate the role of the Central legislature and underplay the role of those who really founded the AMU. A sum of Rs 30 lakh was collected by Muslims in 1920 to constitute a permanent endowment to meet the recurring expenses of the proposed university.

Whether a secular state should establish a minority educational institution? Arguments in favour:  Constitutional Provisions:  Article 30(1) confers the rights on religious and linguistic minorities to establish educational institutions. The SC in its judgement in Azeez Basha vs UoI, 1967 accepted that universities come under the definition of “educational institution” in Article 30(1). A university can only be recognized so by an Act of Parliament. Thus the spirit of Art 30(1) dictates that it is obligatory on central govt to recognize minority universities.DLSC  Article 25(2)(a) states that the state can make laws to regulate or restrict any economic, financial, political or other secular activity associated with religious practice.

 Article 30 cannot be viewed in isolation and needs to be read with Article 26(a) which states that religious denominations can establish institutions for religious and charitable purposes as determined by SC in TMA Pai Foundation Case. AMU has been involved with commendable work in Social sciences and imparting education to Muslim youth which can be considered as charitable work.  State is duty-bound under Article 38 to implement all policies which minimize inequalities among different sections of the society. In such a scenario, setting up universities may be helpful as they adhere to highest standards of imparting education and are allowed to award degrees. Besides, revoking minority status from such institutions is also against SC adjudication in Kerala Education Bill Case which limits State regulation from depriving minority from managing the institution.  International Law:  Article 13(1) of the Council of Europe’s Framework Convention for the Protection of National Minorities, 1994, says: “Within the framework of their education systems, the parties shall recognize that persons belonging to a national minority have the right to set up and to manage their own private educational and training establishments.”  Article 14(3) of the European Charter of Fundamental Rights (2000), which binds members of the European Union, says explicitly: “The freedom to found educational establishments with due respect for democratic principles and the right of parents to ensure the education and teaching of their children in conformity with their religious, philosophical and pedagogical convictions shall be respected, in accordance with the national law governing the exercise of such freedom and right.”  The United Nations’ International Covenant on Economic, Social and Cultural Rights, to which India is a party, recognizes in Article 13(4) “the liberty of individuals and bodies to establish and direct educational institutions”

Arguments against: Constitutional Provisions:  Under Article 27, no proceeds of any taxes shall be utilized for promotion or maintenance of any particular religion or religious denomination. AMU was receiving funds from the state. This was thus problematic.

Stand of the government:  Centre argues that conferring minority status to AMU or any institution set up by a parliamentary enactment or state enactment would be contrary to Article 15 of the Constitution, which prohibits discrimination by state on grounds of religion.  Centre also states that minority status to AMU is “unconstitutional” and“illegal”, since it was discriminating against Scheduled Castes, Scheduled Tribes and Other Backward Classes by using the minority tag.

Summary:  JusticeDLSC A.P. Sen made a pertinent observation in Lilly Kurian vs Sr Lewina and others ,1978, “the protection of the minorities is an article of faith in the Constitution of India”. The constitution explicitly recognizes the right of minorities to establish and administer MEI. It is the duty of the government to ensure that the rights

guaranteed to minorities are not turned into a teasing illusion and promise of unreality. These guarantees are essential in a democratic and pluralistic country like India.

PRELIMS CARDINAL :

DLSC

11. SC sends Delhi power tussle case to larger Bench

News:  A Supreme Court Bench of Justices A.K. Sikri and Ashok Bhushan gave a split opinion on whether the Delhi government has control over the administration’s services and decided to refer the question to a larger Bench.  While Justice Bhushan held that the Delhi government has no power over services, observing that Entry 41 of the State List in the 7th Schedule of the Constitution — dealing with ‘State Public Services’ — was outside the purview of the Delhi Assembly, Justice Sikri, the lead judge on the Bench, took the middle path.

DLSC

Analysis:

Details of the issue:

PRELIMS CARDINAL :

Article 239AA:  Delhi, although a union territory, is not administered by the president acting through the LG (under Article 239). It is administered under Article 239 AA, incorporated in the Constitution through 69th Constitutional Amendment Act, 1992. It creates a “special” constitutional set up for Delhi.  It has provisions for popularly elected assembly, a council of ministers responsible to the assembly and a certain demarcation of responsibilities between the LG and the council of ministers.  As per Article 239 AA (3) (a), the Delhi assembly can legislate on all those matters listed in the State List and Concurrent List as are applicable to union territories, however, public order, police and land are reserved for the LG (Items 1, 2 & 18 of List II of 7th Schedule of the Constitution).  This special set up worked well mainly because the same party held office at the Centre as well as in Delhi for much of the time. Things changed when different government ruled the city and the centre.

12. Auditor’s DLSCaccount News: Experts point out that the price-redacted audit report on the process to acquire 36 Rafale fighter jets is unlikely to bring closure to the controversy over the deal.

Analysis:  It is important to note that the recent report of the CAG (Comptroller and Auditor-General of India) tabled in Parliament comes in the midst of a vigorous campaign by the Opposition that is questioning the process, based on media revelations about possible lapses and deviations and significant points raised by dissenting members of the INT (Indian Negotiating Team).  Experts have opined that the present Government at the Center can draw comfort from the fact that the CAG report concludes that the 2016 agreement is slightly better in terms of both pricing and delivery than what was under negotiation in 2007 during the UPA regime. However, the report does not allay all doubts.  Pegged at 2.86%, the price advantage in the contract over the 2007 offer is marginal.  As a matter of fact, it is a far cry from the 9% saving claimed by the government.  The delivery schedule is only one month sooner than the estimated outer limit in the earlier process.  Further, the CAG has found fault with Dassault Aviation being allowed to retain the gains made by the absence of a bank guarantee, which, if executed, would have come with significant charges.  Disappointingly, the CAG has not quantified this amount, though it declares that it should have been passed on to the Defence Ministry.  It is important to note that the 2007 price offered by Dassault included bank charges, and its absence in the 2016 contract is a clear benefit to the company. In other words, the ‘advantage’ is lower than the 2.86%.

Remarks:  Experts have pointed out that while the key question of pricing is sought to be resolved by the CAG by comparing the auditors’ aligned price with the INT’s computation, some issues remain unaddressed.  The original issue of bringing down the total acquisition from 126 to 36 aircraft does not draw much comment.  Also, the huge outgo on the India-Specific Enhancements (ISEs), despite the final figure being projected as a 17% saving on the aligned offer, is something that requires deeper examination.  While auditing the earlier process, the CAG found that ISEs were upgrades allowed to be made so that Dassault’s bid would be compliant with qualitative requirements.  As a matter of fact, even a team of Ministry officials that examined in March 2015 the integrity of the earlier process concluded that “the acceptance of [Dassault’s] additional commercial proposal after bid submission date… was unprecedented and against the canons of financial propriety.”  Dassault was not the lowest bidder in the earlier process, and its technical bid had been rejected.  Some experts opine that perhaps, this presented an opportunity to the present regime to reopen theDLSC entire process to buy Medium Multi-Role Combat Aircraft (MMRCA) and invite fresh bids. However, it chose the IGA route with France, possibly for diplomatic reasons.

Summary: In conclusion, the CAG identifies as a major problem the fact that the technical requirements are too narrowly defined for most vendors to comply with. The message from the report is that defence acquisition processes require reforms and streamlining.

PRELIMS CARDINAL :

CAG Provisions: CAG holds office for a period of 6 years or upto the age of 65 years, whichever is earlier.

Article 148 – Comptroller and Auditor-General of India

 There shall be a CAG of India who shall be appointed by the President by warrant under his hand and seal and shall only be removed from office in like manner and on like grounds as a Judge of the Supreme Court.  Every person appointed to be the CAG of India shall, before he enters upon his office, make and subscribe before the President or some person appointed in that behalf by him, an oath or affirmation according to the form set out for the purpose in the Third Schedule.  The salary and other conditions of service of CAG shall be such as may be determined by Parliament by law and, until they are so determined, shall be as specified in the Second Schedule: Provided that neither the salary nor his rights in respect of leave of absence, pension or age of retirement shall be varied to his disadvantage after his appointment.  The CAG shall not be eligible for further office either under the Government of India or under the Government of any State after he has ceased to hold his office.  Subject to the provisions of this Constitution and of any law made by parliament, the conditions of service of persons serving in the Indian Audit and Accounts Department and the administrative powers of the CAG shall be such as may be prescribed by rules made by the President after consultation with the CAG.  The administrative expenses of the office of the CAG including all salaries, allowances and pensions payable to or in respect of persons serving in that office, shall be charged upon the Consolidated Fund of India.

Article 149 – Duties and Powers of the CAG

The CAG shall perform such duties and exercise such powers in relation to the accounts of the Union and of the States and of any other authority or body as may be prescribed by or under any law made by Parliament and, until provision in that behalf is so made, shall perform such duties and exercise such powers in relation to the accounts of the UnionDLSC and of the States as were conferred on or exercisable by the Auditor-General of India immediately before the commencement of this Constitution in relation to the accounts of the Dominion of India and of the provinces respectively.

 Comptroller and Auditor-General’s (Duties, Powers and Conditions of Service) Act, 1971 (56 of 1971) also provides for the power of CAG. The act determines the conditions of service of the CAG of India and prescribes his duties and powers and for that matters connected therewith or incidental thereto.

Article 150 – Form of Accounts of The Union and of The States The accounts of the Union and of the States shall be kept in such form as the President may, on the advice of the CAG of India, prescribe.  An amendment to the above 1971 act in 1976 has relieved CAG from preparing the accounts of the government of India; the job is now done by the Controller General of Accounts (CGA). Thus, accounts were separated from audit in Central govt.  While CAG is independent constitutional body, CGA works under Ministry of Finance and is neither a constitutional nor statutory body.  Departmentalisation of Accounts - While President lays down general principles of government accounting relating to union/state governments and form of accounts on the advice of CAG (article 150), CGA does the compilation and maintenance of accounts.

Article 151 – Audit Reports  The reports of the CAG of India relating to the accounts of the Union shall be submitted to the president, who shall cause them to be laid before each House of Parliament.  CAG submits 3 reports to the President  Audit Report on Appropriation Accounts  Audit Report on Finance Accounts  Audit Report on Public Undertakings  The reports of the CAG of India relating to the accounts of a State shall be submitted to the Governor of the State, who shall cause them to be laid before the Legislature of the State.

Article 279 – Calculation of “net proceeds”, etc. (1) In the foregoing provisions of this Chapter, “net proceeds” means in relation to any tax or duty the proceeds thereof reduced by the cost of collection, and for the purposes of those provisions the net proceeds of any tax or duty, or of any part of any tax or duty, in or attributable to any area shall be ascertained and certified by the CAG, whose certificate shall be final. (2) Subject as aforesaid, and to any other express provision of this Chapter, a law made by Parliament or an order of the President may, in any case where under this Part the proceeds of any duty or tax are, or may be, assigned to any State, provide for the manner in which the proceeds are to be calculated, for the time from or at which and the manner in which any payments are to be made, for the making of adjustments between one financial year and another,DLSC and for any other incidental or ancillary matters.

13. Why only bureaucrats on information panels, asks SC

News:  The Central Information Commission (CIC) and State Information Commissions (SICs), the country’s apex bodies entrusted to uphold the citizen’s fundamental right to information, have been bastions of government employees and their retired counterparts.  This “strange phenomenon” was exposed in a 52-page judgment pronounced by a Supreme Court Bench of Justices A.K. Sikri and S. Abdul Nazeer.

Analysis:  The apex court found that “official bias” in favour of bureaucrats and government employees was evident from the very beginning of the process for appointment of Chief Information Commissioners and Information Commissioners. In fact, the selection committee, which shortlists candidates for appointment, is itself composed of government employees / civil servants only.  The Right to Information (RTI) Act, 2005 mandates that people with a range of experience and from various fields should serve as information commissioners.  The 2005 law was enacted to ensure accountability in governance. The Commissions are meant to be the law’s eyes and hands to provide information to ordinary people.  The apex court directed the government to look beyond bureaucrats and appoint professionals from “all walks of life,” including eminent persons with wide knowledge and experience in law, science and technology, social service, management, journalism as Information Commissioners.  The SC concluded that the entire RTI mechanism has been choked by rising pendency and growing number of vacancies of Information Commissioners.  The SC has, for the first time, put the government on a deadline as far as filling vacancies in the Commissions. The court directed that the process of appointment should commence at least one or two months before the retirement is due.

Summary:  As per the apex court’s 2018 order, the Centre should have put on the website the names of members of search committee, candidates who have been shortlisted and the criteria which was followed for selection, but this was done only after appointment of 4 information commissioners.  This information should have been made public during the process of appointment and not after the appointment was already being done; transparency in the entire process is required.  Centre and state governments should not “attempt to stifle” the functioning of the RTI Act by failing to comply with the apex court’s orders.

DLSC

PRELIMS CARDINAL : Central Information Commission (CIC)  CIC was established in 2005 by Central Government under provisions of RTI Act of 2005.  The Chief Information Commissioner heads the CIC.  The general superintendence, direction and management of affairs of Commission are vested in Chief Information Commissioner who is assisted by Information Commissioners.  CIC hears appeals from information-seekers who have not been satisfied by the public authority, and also addresses major issues concerning the RTI Act.  CIC submits annual report to Union government on the implementation of the provisions of RTI Act. The central government in turn places this report before each house of Parliament.  The Chief Information Commissioner and Information Commissioners are appointed by the President on the recommendation of a committee consisting of –  The Prime Minister, who shall be the Chairperson of the committee  the Leader of Opposition in the Lok Sabha  a Union Cabinet Minister to be nominated by the Prime Minister

Functions and Powers of CIC  It can order inquiry into any matter if there are reasonable grounds. It can secure compliance of its decisions from the public authority.  It can recommend steps to be taken for promoting such conformity, if public authority does not conform to provisions of RTI Act.  It examines any record which is under control of the public authority and which may be withheld from it on any grounds during the enquiry. While inquiring, it has powers of civil court  A complaint may be filed directly in the CIC under section 18 of the RTI Act, by a person:- (a) who has been unable to submit an information request to a CPIO (Central Public Information Officer) either by reason that no such officer has been appointed under the Act, or because the Central Assistant Public Information Officer has refused to accept his or her application for information or appeal under this Act for forwarding the same to the CPIO or senior officer specified in subsection (1) of section 19 or this Commission; (b) who has been refused access to any information requested under this Act; (c) who has not been given a response to a request for information or access to information within the time limit specified under this Act; (d) who has been required to pay an amount of fee which he or she considers unreasonable; (e) who believes that he or she has been given incomplete, misleading or false informationDLSC under this Act; and (f) in respect of any other matter relating to requesting or obtaining access to records under this Act.

14. How the 16th Lok Sabha fared

News: The 16th Lok Sabha had its final sitting, marking an end to the five-year period. Important bills were passed; but going forward there must be a debate on the anti-defection law.

Analysis:  The 16th Lok Sabha was surpassed only by the preceding one in terms of the low number of hours it worked. It met for 1,615 hours, 40% lower than all full-term Parliaments.  This Lok Sabha sat for 331 days (against a 468-day average for all previous full-term Lok Sabhas), and lost 16% of its time to disruptions.  It shows a decline in the number of sitting days over the decades as well as a significant part of the scheduled time lost to disruptions.  There were no extreme incidents — an MP used pepper spray in the 15th Lok Sabha — MPs often broke the rules.  The House was often disrupted by MPs carrying placards, entering the well, and even on occasion, blocking their colleagues from speaking. A big casualty was Question Hour — the Lok Sabha lost a third of this time and the Rajya Sabha 60%; consequently, just 18% of the starred questions in each House got an oral reply.  Another notable event was the Speaker blaming unruly behaviour for her inability to count the required number of MPs demanding a no-confidence motion but allowing the Union Budget to be passed in the interim. There was a similar episode at the end of the 15th Lok Sabha when the Speaker was unable to conduct a no-confidence motion but let the House pass the Act to bifurcate the State of Andhra Pradesh.

Key legislation: However, Parliament made some important laws.  The Goods and Services Tax was implemented.  The Insolvency and Bankruptcy code was enacted.  The IIM Act gave premier management educational institutions a level of autonomy not available to other public educational institutions.  The Juvenile Justice Act allowed children (between 16 and 18 years) accused of committing heinous crimes to be prosecuted as adults.  Mental Healthcare Act, The Human Immunodeficiency Virus and Acquired Immune Deficiency Syndrome (Prevention and Control) Act, 2017 were passed: for treatment of mental health patients, and those with HIV/AIDS.  The Rights of Persons with Disabilities Act, 2016, the disability legislation was passed by the Indian Parliament to fulfill its obligation to the United Nations Convention on the Rights of Persons with Disabilities, which India ratified in 2007.  There were some efforts to address the issues of corruption, black money and leakages.  The Prevention of Corruption Act was amended to make bribe-giving an offence.  Laws wereDLSC made requiring a declaration of assets held outside India.  Fugitive economic offenders act was passed to declare as fugitives those economic offenders who had fled the country.  The Aadhaar Act was passed to create a biometric-based identity system.

Bill passing:  The Aadhaar Act was passed as a Money Bill — and was upheld by the Supreme Court. There were debates questioning the legitimacy of Aadhaar bill being passed as money bill.  The issue here is that the Constitution defines a Bill as a Money Bill if it contains provisions that exclusively relate to taxes or government spending.  Importantly, such Bills need majority support only in the Lok Sabha, with the Rajya Sabha having just a recommendatory role.  Arguing that Aadhaar was primarily a subsidy delivery mechanism, and not an identity system seems like a stretch, but that was the majority decision of the Supreme Court.  There has not been much conversation on the various Finance Bills that have been passed as Money Bills. It is difficult to see how these Bills would fall within the narrow definition of Money Bill, as defined in Article 110 of the Constitution.  The Finance Bill is traditionally introduced with the Budget, and contains all the legislative changes to tax laws. Therefore, it is usually a Money Bill. However, Finance Bills, in the last few years, have included items which have no relation to taxes or to expenditure of the government.  The Finance Bill, 2015 included provisions to merge the regulator of commodity exchanges with the Securities and Exchange Board of India.  The Finance Bill, 2016 included amendments to the Foreign Contribution (Regulation) Act which relate to donations to non-profits.  The Finance Bill, 2017 went further and changed the compositions of 19 quasi-judicial bodies such as the Securities Appellate Tribunal, the National Green Tribunal and the Telecom Disputes Settlement and Appellate Tribunal (TDSAT), and repealed seven other bodies including the Competition Appellate Tribunal.  About half the clauses of the 2018 Bill were on issues unrelated to taxes.  Even the Finance Bill, 2019 presented with the interim Budget amended the provisions related to attaching property under the money laundering law.

Bills that would lapse:  A few other Bills, such as the Triple Talaq Bill and the Citizenship Bill, were passed by the Lok Sabha but will lapse as they were not passed by the Rajya Sabha.  It is evident that the government was able to have its way on every issue in the Lok Sabha and was held in check only due to a lack of majority in the Rajya Sabha; even this check was bypassed occasionally using the Money Bill route.  The government could do this as a result of the anti-defection provision which gives complete control of all party votes to the party leadership.  The Tenth Schedule (anti-defection provision ) was inserted in the Constitution in 1985. It lays down the process by which legislators may be disqualified on grounds of defection by the Presiding Officer of a legislature based on a petition by any other member of the House.  A legislator is deemed to have defected if he either voluntarily gives up the membership of his party or disobeys the directives of the party leadership on a vote.This implies that a legislator defyingDLSC (abstaining or voting against) the party whip on any issue can lose his membership of the House.  The law applies to both Parliament and state assemblies.

 This law has converted MPs from being representatives of the people to delegates of the party.  If the party in government has a majority of its own, it can have any provision passed; even coalition governments have to convince just a handful of leaders of their alliance partners.

Summary: Parliament plays the central role in our democracy by holding the government to account and scrutinising proposed laws and financial priorities. With the end of the 16th LS, it is an undeniable fact that many important bills were passed. But it is time to ponder on how to make this institution more effective. An important step will be by reviewing the anti- defection law that has hollowed out the institution.

PRELIMS CARDINAL : Devices of Parliament  Question hour (11am - 12pm) - mentioned in Rules of Procedure - 3 types of questions can be asked o Starred question - oral answer can be given - supplementary questions can be asked - green paper o unstarred question - needs an written answer - no supplementary questions can be asked - white paper o short notice question (less than 10 days notice) - oral answer can be given - supplementary questions can be asked - light pink paper o Questions can be asked to private members too - yellow paper  Zero hour (starts at 12pm) - Indian Innovation in field of parliamentary procedure & has been in existence since 1962 - informal device  Motions - no discussion on a matter of general public importance can take place except on a motion made with the consent of the presiding officer - 3 principal categories i. Substantive motion - self-contained independent proposal dealing with a very important matter like impeachment of President or removal of CEC ii. Substitute motion - moved in substitution of an original motion and proposes an alternative to it (supersedes original motion, if adopted) iii. Subsidiary motion - this motion, by itself has no meaning and cannot state the decision of the House without reference to the original motion or proceedings of the House; there are 3 sub-categories in this. a. Ancillary motion - used as regular way of proceeding with various kinds of business b. Superseding motion - moved in the course of debate on another issue and seeks to supersede that issue c. Amendment - seeks to modify or substitute only a part of the original motion  Closure motion - if approved, the debate is stopped and matter is put to vote - 4 types o Simple closure - matter having been sufficiently discussed be now put to vote o Closure byDLSC Compartments - clauses (of a bill or a lengthy resolution) grouped into parts, before debate of part as a whole - then vote o Kangaroo Closure - only important clauses taken up for debate & voting - intervening clauses skipped (considered/taken as passed)

41 o Guillotone Closure - undiscussed clauses put to vote along with discussed ones due to want of time  Privilege motion (to censure) - concerned with breach of parliamentary privilege of the House or one or more of its members by a minister, by withholding facts of a case or by giving wrong or distorted facts.  Calling Attention Motion - mentioned in Rules of Procedure - Indian Innovation in field of parliamentary procedure & has been in existence since 1954 o by member to call the attention of a minister to a matter of urgent public importance and to seek an authoritative statement  Adjournment motion - EXTRAORDINARY DEVICE (only in LokSabha, needs support of 50 MPs to be admitted) - minimum 2.5 hours discussion - to draw attention of the House to a definite matter of urgent public importance  No-confidence motion - Article 75 says Council of Ministers shall be collectively responsible to the Lok Sabha - needs support of 50 MPs to be admitted - can be introduced in Lok Sabha only  Censure motion - should state reasons for adoption, unlike No-confidence motion - can be introduced in Lok Sabha only

15. Discord in Puducherry

News:  The recent round of conflict between Puducherry Chief Minister V. Narayanasamy and Lt. Governor Kiran Bedi has been more serious than those in the past.  Narayanasamy sat in protest for six days, before the two could meet to hold talks to resolve a set of issues he raised in a letter in the month of February, 2019.

Analysis:  As a matter of fact, Mr. Narayanasamy has been opposing what he calls Ms. Bedi’s “high- handedness” and tendency to interfere in the administration.  Both Mr. Narayanasamy and Lt. Governor Kiran Bedi have had differences on many issues over the last couple of years.  Experts have opined that such problems are an obvious consequence of the political structure of Union Territories, in which the Administrator, as the nominee of the President, enjoys powers superior to the Chief Minister and the Council of Ministers.

A Closer Look at the differences:  The trigger for the latest stand-off seems to have been Ms. Bedi’s move to enforce the rule for two-wheeler riders to wear helmets.  While the Chief Minister believes it can be enforced only after raising awareness, Ms. Bedi wants it implemented immediately.  But, the Chief Minister insists that his protest has nothing to do with this.  The ChiefDLSC Minister lists the blocking of welfare schemes such as the free rice scheme and enhanced scholarship for Scheduled Caste students, among other actions of the L-G, as the real issues.

 Whatever be the origin of this conflict, the sight of a Chief Minister on an indefinite dharna is not seemly. It could not have gone on indefinitely, and the fact that a dialogue was formally initiated, albeit after much delay, is a welcome development.

Is the Lieutenant Governor acting within her powers?

 Central to the conflict is the question whether Ms. Bedi is acting within her powers or exceeding her brief in seeking to play a proactive role in the affairs of the Union Territory.  Under the Constitution, the territory belongs to the President, who runs it through the L-G as Administrator. However, under Section 44 of the Union Territories Act, 1963, the Administrator has to act on the ‘aid and advice’ of the Council of Ministers.  At the same time, any difference of opinion between them can be referred to the President, and in the meantime the Administrator’s action prevails on any urgent matter.  This scheme, which gives a clear edge to the Centre, can work only if there is harmony between the Council and the L-G. It would be unfortunate if individuals occupying Raj Nivas in any Union Territory with a Legislative Assembly get carried away and ignore or undermine the elected body.

Summary: In the year 2018, ruling on the limits of the L-G’s powers in Delhi, the Supreme Court stressed the need for the L-G as well as people’s representatives to “function in harmony within constitutional parameters”. The L-G was cautioned against having a hostile attitude towards the Ministers. Experts opine that there is no reason why that principle cannot be extended to Puducherry, which has a longer record of elected governments.

PRELIMS CARDINAL :

The case of Delhi: Delhi forms a unique category. Its governance has been a vexatious issue since Independence.  In July 1947, the Pattabhi Sitaramayya committee was set up to report on Constitutional changes in the administrative structure of the Chief Commissioner’s Provinces. This included Delhi.  The Committee was of the opinion that the “province which contains the metropolis of India should not be deprived of the right of self-government enjoyed by the rest of their countrymen living in the smallest of villages.”  However, members of the Drafting Committee of the Constituent Assembly, including Nehru and Ambedkar, felt that the national capital could not be placed under a local government.  DeshbandhuDLSC Gupta – the sole representative of Delhi in the Assembly, made vociferous demands for full-statehood. However, ultimately the Constituent Assembly classified Delhi as a Union Territory.  Numerous amendments to the Constitution have changed the nature of government in

Delhi over the years. These culminated in the 69th Constitutional Amendment of 1991, by which Article 239AA was introduced. Special status of Delhi:  Article 239AA of the Constitution provides for a legislative assembly in Delhi and the Article provides the legal framework within which Delhi is to be governed.  Article 239AA(3)(a) vests the Delhi Assembly with the power to make laws for the whole or any part of the National Capital Territory with respect to any of the matters enumerated in the ‘State List’ or in the ‘Concurrent List’ (except police, public order and land).  Article 239AA(4) provides for a council of ministers “to aid and advise the L-G”. The proviso to the Article provides that “in case of difference of opinion between the L-G and his ministers on any matter, the L-G shall refer it to the President for decision.” Bone of contention:  The primary dispute before the Court was related to the interpretation of the phrases “any of the matters” and “aid and advise”.  Additionally, the scope of the L-G’s discretion to refer matters to the President was a point in issue. The Judgement: “Nations fail when institutions of governance fail. The working of a democratic institution is impacted by the statesmanship (or the lack of it) shown by those in whom the electorate vests the trust to govern” – writes Justice D.Y. Chandrachud. The above view is in concurrent to recent judgment of the Supreme Court on the powers of the Delhi government and the lieutenant governor. Supreme Court’s verdict in Government of NCT of Delhi vs Union of India, 2018:  Delhi government has power in all areas except land, police and public order.  Lt. Governor is bound by the aid and advice of the NCT govt in areas other than those exempted.  It noted that there is no room for anarchy or absolutism in a democracy. Conclusion: The respect for institutions has been declining in India in recent years, but respect for the Supreme Court continues to be very high. Cutting to the heart of all the political and constitutional wrangling, the judgment unanimously affirms the principle of an elected representative being vested with the power to administer democratically. It negates the bureaucratic usurpation of power that sought to operate in constitutional interstices, at the instance of an inimical central government.

16. 7 islands in Andamans, Lakshadweep identified for seaplane operations

News:  4 islands in the Andamans and 3 in Lakshadweep have been identified for seaplane operations, while private sector participation has been invited for tourism-based projects.  The 5th meetingDLSC of the Island Development Agency, chaired by Home Minister Rajnath Singh, also reviewed the progress made towards the programme ‘Holistic development of islands’.

Analysis:

Details of the initiative:  Swaraj Dweep(formerly called Havelock Island), Shaheed Dweep(formerly called Neil Island), Hutbay and Long Island in Andaman and Nicobar Islands and Kavaratti, Agatti and Minicoy in Lakshadweep have been identified for seaplane operations.  Key infrastructure projects such as operationalisation of the Diglipur airport for civilian aircraft and the construction of a new airport on Minicoy Island have been accorded high priority by the government, while CRZ clearance (Coastal Regulation Zone) has been accorded for ‘Middle Strait Bridge’ (strait between South Andaman and Baratang Island) on Andaman Trunk Road.  Bids for private sector participation in 3 tourism-based projects have already been invited by the Andaman & Nicobar Administration. They include eco-tourism projects on Smith Island and Long Island and a tent city project on Aves Island. Bids will be invited shortly for one more project on Neil Island (renamed as Shaheed Dweep now).  The Ministry of Commerce has issued a notification extending tax incentives for investments made in the manufacturing and service sector in the islands of Andaman and Nicobar and Lakshadweep.

Why these islands are important?  Andaman & Nicobar Islands, a group of picturesque islands at the junction of the Bay of Bengal and the Andaman Sea, are blessed with pristine sea beaches, attractive marine life and a large extent of forest cover with rich biodiversity.  About 82.16% of the total geographical area has been reported under forest and tree cover in Andaman & Nicobar (India State of Forest Report 2017).  The Islands possess a mix of natural ecosystems including mangrove forests, tropical rainforests, sandy beaches, rocky shores and coral reefs.  In the limited geographical area, a high level of biodiversity with several species of mammals, birds and fish have been reported to occur in the Islands. Other strengths possessed by the Islands are rich cultural traditions, historical heritage sites and peaceful environment.  Presently, tourism has the potential to be an efficient driver of high economic growth in the Islands. Development potential also exists in other sectors such as maritime trade, shipping, DLSCfisheries, under-sea mining, oil and gas.  The Andaman and Nicobar Islands have a long coastal length of about 1,912 km. The Exclusive Economic Zone around these Islands is about 6 lakh sq km constituting 28% of the total EEZ in our country.

 The Great Nicobar Island is only about 90 km away from the western tip of the Malacca Strait, an important shipping route between the Indian Ocean and the South China Sea. Being at close aerial/shipping distance to a number of countries (Indonesia, Myanmar and Thailand) and the Malacca Strait, the Islands have the potential of enhanced maritime trade, particularly for export of the products made in the Islands.  Realizing the potential in Andaman and Nicobar and more or less similar potential in Lakshadweep, holistic development of identified Islands has been accorded high priority by the Government.

Summary: Existing situation calls for formulation of suitable strategies for holistic development of identified Islands. Effective implementation of well-planned strategies in tourism and other key economic sectors would lead to creation of more jobs and generation of additional income for the Islanders.

However, while planning development interventions, both the ecological concerns and the tribal-related issues need to be fully addressed so as to ensure a sustainable development process.

PRELIMS CARDINAL :

Andaman & Nicobar Islands: Tribe Race Island Sentinelese Negroid North Sentinel Island of North Andaman Region Jarawa Negroid Middle & South Andaman Islands Andamanese Negroid North & Middle Andaman Islands Onge Negroid Little Andaman Shompen (mutual hostility Mongoloid Great Nicobar Island among groups)

Nicobarese Mongoloid Great Nicobar Island

Few Notes: Jangil - extinct by 1920s - South Andaman island Sentinelese - North Sentinel island - negrito tribe in North Sentinel Island, West of South Andaman island - left alone, because their island had little commercial attraction to colonisers - connected to Jarawa, on physical basis, as well as linguistic similarities.

DLSC

National Highway 4 connecting Mayabandar to Chiriyatapu - called Andaman Trunk Road (ATR or The Great Andaman Trunk Road). The Jarawa repeatedly attacked workers, the state power-fenced the construction site, and several tribal were electrocuted. In recent times local touts and policemen conducting human safaris on NH 223(the current NH4 was called NH223 at that time) that cuts through the Jarawa reserve. The highway continues to bring the world and sexual exploitation, substance abuse and disease into their shrinking sanctuary.

ATR passes through the buffer zone of the Jarwa Reserve between Jirkatang to Middle Strait where is laws have been placed to minimize traveller contact with the native tribe of Jarawa. Only vehicle convoys with armed escorts are allowed.

DLSC

17. Without land or recourse

News:  Experts have opined that the order of the Supreme Court issued on February 13, 2019 with respect to the claims of forest-dwelling peoples in India — the Scheduled Tribes and Other Traditional Forest Dwellers — is a case of the Supreme Court speaking against itself.  In effect, the court has ordered the eviction of lakhs of people whose claims as forest dwellers have been rejected under the Scheduled Tribes and Other Traditional Forest Dwellers (Recognition of Forest Rights) Act, 2006, or FRA.  As a matter of fact, this order negates the claims of citizens under special protection of the Constitution, viz. the Scheduled Tribes and other vulnerable communities, who are already pushed by neglect precariously to the edge.  An important question before us today centres on the responsibility of the Supreme Court in upholding constitutional claims and equal citizenship.

Context:  The order in question was issued in the case of Wildlife First & Ors v. Ministry of Forest and Environment & Ors.  The question before the court as stated in the order of 2016 when the matter was last heard related to “the constitutional validity of the [FRA / Forest Rights Act, 2006] and also the questions pertaining to the preservation of forests in the context of the above-mentioned Act.”  The details regarding claims made under the FRA that were placed before the court by the petitioner in 2016 showed that of the 44 lakh claims filed before appropriate authorities in the different States, 20.5 lakh claims (46.5%) were rejected.  The order of 2016 went on to observe: “Obviously, a claim in the context of the above- mentioned Act is based on an assertion that a claimant has been in possession of a certain parcel of land located in the forest areas.” This is true. A claim is made either for individual or community rights by the people/communities covered by the FRA. This is a plain reading of the Act, which is unambiguous on this score.  However from here, the order observed, “If the claim is found to be not tenable by the competent authority, the result would be that the claimant is not entitled for the grant of any Patta or any other right under the Act but such a claimant is also either required to be evicted from that parcel of land or some other action is to be taken in accordance with law” (emphasis added). Experts have opined that this was the material part of the order.  In other words, the claimant cannot contest the decision of the authority, said the court.  Further, with respect to action to be taken against those “unauthorisedly in possession of forest land”, the States were then asked by the Supreme Court to report on concrete measures taken to evict the Scheduled Tribes and Other Traditional Forest Dwellers from the forest. DLSC  In the very next paragraph, which pertained to the State of Tamil Nadu, the order referred to action against those people whose claims had been rejected as “eviction of encroachers”.

Analysis:

Current Situation: A Perspective  In the present order of February 2019, the Supreme Court specifically directs governments in 21 States by name to carry out evictions of rejected claimants without further delay and report on or before July 12, 2019.  There are several questions that must be foregrounded for immediate attention.  The most obvious one has to do with the meanings attached to the rejection of claims.  According to the 2014 report of the High-Level Committee on Socio-Economic, Health and Educational Status of Tribal Communities in India, constituted by the Government of India (Xaxa Committee), 60% of the forest area in the country is in tribal areas — protected by Article 19(5) and Schedules V and VI of the Constitution.  With specific reference to claims under the FRA, reiterating the finding of several other studies that have documented the deep procedural flaws in processing claims, the Xaxa Committee observed that “claims are being rejected without assigning reasons, or based on wrong interpretation of the ‘OTFD’ definition and the ‘dependence’ clause, or simply for lack of evidence or ‘absence of GPS survey’ (lacunae which only require the claim to be referred back to the lower-level body), or because the land is wrongly considered as ‘not forest land’, or because only forest offence receipts are considered as adequate evidence.  The rejections are not being communicated to the claimants, and their right to appeal is not being explained to them nor its exercise facilitated.”  It is important to note that the mere rejection of claims by the state therefore does not add up to a finding of the crime of “encroachment”; as a matter of fact, some experts opine that the sheer volume of rejections should instead set alarm bells ringing in the court of procedural improprieties.  Interestingly, in this case, it appears as if a private party, named Wildlife First, is pitted against the state.  A closer examination reveals that it is, in fact, Wildlife First and the state together which have joined forces against the most vulnerable communities in the country living in areas constitutionally protected from encroachment even by the state — an important aspect to keep in mind would be the Samata judgment of the Supreme Court in 1997.

Samata Judgement of the Supreme Court (1997) In 1987, Samata, a non-governmental organisation closely associated with 10 community- based institutions in 300 villages of Srikakulam, Visakhapatnam and East Godavari districts, began to work for the rights of the tribal people as it found them being alienated from their lands and exploited by non-tribal people and the state, in contravention of the Fifth Schedule of the Constitution and various Central & State govt laws.  After a protracted struggle – in the form of dharnas, rallies, picketings and meetings – and several rounds of petitions to various Central and State departments, Samata decided to approach theDLSC courts.  It first filed a case in the local courts and later in the Andhra Pradesh High Court in 1993 against the State government’s move to lease tribal land to mining companies. When the High Court dismissed the case, Samata filed a Special Leave Petition in the Supreme

Court. After a four-year legal battle, it won a historic judgment, which declared null and void the transfer of land in the Scheduled Areas for private mining and upheld the Forest Protection Act of 1980, which prohibits mining in reserved areas.  The main issue in the Samata case was whether or not the word `person’ in Section (3)(a) of the Mines and Minerals (Regulation and Development) Act included the government.  The Supreme Court held that indeed it did, and that the state should adhere to the laws and principles governing the tribal areas, as any other person.

Significance of the Samata judgment:  The Samata judgment nullified all mining leases granted by the State government in the Scheduled areas and asked it to stop all mining operations.  Only the State Mineral Development Corporation or a cooperative of the tribal people, it ruled, could take up mining activity and that too in compliance with the Forest Conservation Act and the Environment Protection Act.  It also recognised the Constitution (73rd) Amendment and the Panchayat (Extension to Scheduled Areas) Act, under which gram sabhas are competent to preserve and safeguard community resources, and reiterated the right of self-governance of Adivasis.  The judgement also observed that where similar Acts in other States do not prohibit the grant of mining leases in the Scheduled areas, a committee of Secretaries and State Cabinet sub-committees should be constituted and a decision taken.  Further, it also said that before granting leases, it is obligatory for the State government to obtain the concurrence of the Centre, which would, for this purpose, constitute a sub- committee consisting of the Prime Minister and the Union Ministers for Welfare and Environment so that the State’s policy is consistent with that of the nation.  The judgment also noted that at least 20 per cent of the net profits should be set apart as a permanent fund for the establishment and provision of basic facilities in the areas of health, education, roads and other public amenities.  The judgment said: “It would also be open to the appropriate legislature, preferably after a debate/conference of all Chief Ministers and Ministers concerned, to take a policy decision so as to bring about a suitable enactment in the light of these guidelines so that there emerges a consistent scheme throughout the country in respect of tribal land under which national wealth, in the form of minerals, is located.”

Significance of the 2019 order by the Supreme Court:  As has been widely reported, the immediate result will be the forced eviction of over one million people belonging to the Scheduled Tribes and other forest communities.  Importantly, the area marked for eviction falls under areas designated under Schedule V and Schedule VI of the Constitution — there is no reference to the implications for governance in the Scheduled Areas and whether the Supreme Court, in fact, has the authority to order evictions of Scheduled Tribes from Scheduled Areas. Some expertsDLSC take the view that in a democratic country with citizens (not subjects) and a written Constitution which is affirmed by the people who are sovereign, how can we countenance the dismantling of an entire constitutional apparatus that

prescribes the non-derogable boundaries to Adivasi homelands and institutional mechanisms that promote autonomy and restrain interference in self-governance?

Against the safeguards? A Perspective:  At an even more fundamental level, we are speaking of special protections under the Constitution — even more today than ever before.  The presence of Article 19(5) in the Fundamental Rights chapter of the Constitution, which specifically enjoins the state to make laws “for the protection of the interests of any Scheduled Tribe”, is vital.  Some experts take the view that the order given by the Supreme Court runs contrary to the core and express fundamental right protection to Adivasis (as distinct from legal/statutory protection), which protects them from a range of state and non-state intrusions in Scheduled Areas as well as from the perennial threat of eviction from their homelands?  A question arises: Is it not the obligation of the Court to protect the Scheduled Tribes and other vulnerable communities from the grave harms of violent dispossession?

PRELIMS CARDINAL :

The Scheduled Tribes and other Traditional Forest Dwellers (Recognition of Forest Rights) Act, 2006  The Scheduled Tribes and Other Traditional Forest Dwellers (Recognition of Forest Rights) Act, 2006 is a result of the protracted struggle by the marginal and tribal communities of our country to assert their rights over the forestland over which they were traditionally dependent. This Act is crucial to the rights of millions of tribals and other forest dwellers in different parts of our country as it provides for the restitution of deprived forest rights across India, including both individual rights to cultivated land in forestland and community rights over common property resources. The notification of Rules for the implementation of the Forest Rights Act, 2006 on 1st Jan 2008, has finally paved the way to undo the ‘historic injustice’ done to the tribals and other forest dwellers.  The livelihood of perhaps 100 million poorest of the poor (The Indian Forest Rights Act 2006: Communing Enclosures) stands to improve if implementation can succeed. The Act is significant as it provides scope and historic opportunity of integrating conservation and livelihood rights of the people.

This Act is a potential tool for the following:  To empower and strengthen the local self-governance  To address the livelihood security of the people, leading to poverty alleviation and pro poor growth  To address the issues of Conservation and management of the Natural Resources and conservation governance of India.

Significance ofDLSC the Act:  For the first time Forest Rights Act recognises and secures  Community Rights or rights over common property resources of the communities in addition to their individual rights

 Rights in and over disputed land Rights of settlement and conversion of all forest villages, old habitation, un-surveyed villages and other villages in forests into revenue villages  Right to protect, regenerate or conserve or manage any community forest resource which the communities have been traditionally protecting and conserving for sustainable use.  Right to intellectual property and traditional knowledge related to biodiversity and cultural diversity  Rights of displaced communities  Rights over developmental activities

18. EVM is ‘information’ under RTI, says CIC

News: According to a ruling by the Central Information Commission an Electronic Voting Machine (EVM) is “information” under the Right to Information Act.

Analysis:  An appeal by an RTI applicant led to the ruling that the EVM is itself an information under Section 2(f) of the RTI Act.  According to the definition of information under Section 2(f) of the RTI Act “any material in any form, including records, documents, memos, e-mails, opinions, advices, press releases, circulars, orders, logbooks, contracts, reports, papers, samples, models, data material held in any electronic form…”

RTI Act, 2005:  Right to Information Act 2005 is an initiative taken by Department of Personnel and Training, Ministry of Personnel, Public Grievances and Pensions which mandates timely response to citizen requests for government information.  The citizens can go for quick search of information on the details of first Appellate Authorities, PIOs etc. amongst others, besides access to RTI related information / disclosures published on the web by various Public Authorities under the government of India as well as the State Governments.

Summary:  The basic object of this Act is to empower the citizens, promote transparency and accountability in the working of the Government, contain corruption, and make our democracy work for the people in real sense.  This act makes the government more accountable to the citizens and keeps them informed about the activities of the Government.

PRELIMS CARDINAL : Recent judgements related to RTI Act, 2005:  PradyumanDLSC Bisht vs UoI (2017) - SC directed all HC s to ensure CCTV and audio and video recordings in subordinate courts.  Suggestion - This order should be extended to SC and HCs too and a copy of recordings to be made available under RTI.

 Delhi High court in 2017 - found that the office of the attorney general would not be a public authority and thus, not fall within the ambit the Right to Information Act; Section2(h) of RTI Act, 2005 .  Delhi High Court in 2017 - CBI, IB Aren't Exempt Under RTI Act on Matters of Corruption, Human Rights, Delhi HC Reiterates (earlier, they were claiming exception under Section 24(1) of RTI Act)

RTI Act provisions:  Section 4 - deals with voluntary disclosure by public authorities  Section 8 - Exceptions to disclosure  Section 12 - Constitution of CIC  Section 24 - Authorities exempted from the act to be listed in second schedule of the act (security & intelligence agencies are exempted)

19. De-odourising sewage

News: India’s Statistics:  The World Bank estimates that more than a fifth of all communicable diseases in India (21%) are caused by contaminated water.  It attributes one in ten deaths to diseases or infections directly or indirectly transmitted through water.  Over 500 children die every day due to diarrhoeal diseases.

Analysis: Nitrogen, a growing pollutant:  According to a study by the Indian Nitrogen Group, a task force of scientists tracking the issue, the amount of reactive nitrogen in a bulk of the water bodies in India is already twice the limit prescribed by WHO.  The study found that the Nitrogen pollution from untreated sewage outstrips nitrogen pollution from the Indian farmer’s urea addiction (they use more urea, as it is subsidized)

Swachh Bharat Abhiyan (SBA) Mission:  Under the SBA, toilets are being built in mission mode and there is enough anecdotal evidence to suggest that there has been a measurable reduction in the number of people defecating in the open, which stood at over 500 million or half the population a few years ago. Ironically, India’s latest, largest and most significantly scaled attempt at cleanliness is likely to add to the problem.  Under the mission, in the past four years alone, over nine crore toilets have been constructed. Of these, only 60 lakh are in urban areas, where one assumes they are connectedDLSC to some sort of sewage system.  A study done by the Centre for Science and Environment in 30 cities in Uttar Pradesh found that only 28% of toilets in these cities were connected to a sewage system. The rest will be

generating fecal sludge, sewage and septage which has no place to go, simply getting dumped, polluting land, surface and ground water and killing our rivers and ponds.  According to the Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB), 63% of urban sewage flowing into rivers is untreated.  The CPCB’s website admits that the gap between sewage generated in urban areas and capacity for treating that is over 78%.  Up to a third of the installed sewage treatment capacity is fully or partly dysfunctional. Even where the plants are working, many are not working at full capacity, because the infrastructure needed to feed the raw sewage into the treatment plant (a network of drains, sewers and pumping stations) is inadequate or incomplete.

Smart Cities Mission:  Even though it is arguably one of the major health hazards faced by the people — in cities, in particular, sewage and human waste is simply not on the agenda.  Here are the statistics: the 99 cities in the ‘Smart Cities’ mission, which are collectively spending Rs. 2 lakh crore over five years (from 2015), only 2.4% of the money is going to be spent on waste management.  Storm water drainage (which only removes short-term excess water during heavy downpours and doesn’t really add to waste management) gets a higher share of 2.5%.

AMRUT:  Schemes like the Atal Mission for Rejuvenation and Urban Transformation (AMRUT) also fund such schemes.  AMRUT covers a much larger spread — 500 ‘mission cities’ across the country.  Of these, only 217 pitched for a sewage treatment plant as an AMRUT project.  Of these, in the last four years, only four have been completed, according to a reply filed in the Lok Sabha.  Even these numbers are misleading. Of the 212 schemes, as many as 189 are accounted for by just Andhra Pradesh, Rajasthan, Madhya Pradesh, Maharashtra and Gujarat. Only six other States have one or more projects under way. The rest have no plans.

Access to water: According to NITI Aayog’s composite water management index report released in 2018, 75% of households do not have access to drinking water on premises, 70% households lack piped water (potable or otherwise) and as many as 20 cities will effectively use up all available water resources by 2020.

Summary: Sewage and waste need to come centre stage in our policy debates. Elections may be fought on ‘bijli, sadak, paani’ (power, roads, water) but no election is fought over naali (drain). Unless that happens, we run the real risk of eventually either choking or being poisoned DLSC by our own waste. The policymakers and governments must be nudged into action. Just like the nation is building toilets in mission mode, civic administrations must build drains and sewers and treatment plants with the same zeal.

PRELIMS CARDINAL : Why Waste Treatment is a Challenge in India?

Rural Sanitation Coverage - 4 years of Swachh Bharat Mission: Parameter 2015-16 Till Date ODF States/UTs 0 30 ODF Districts 5 615 ODF Villages in Namami 694 4473 Gange ODF Villages 47,021 5,54,754 Household toilets built 38.7% (Oct 2nd, 2014) 98.9% since, 2nd Oct, 2014 (9,23,41,185)

20. ‘What action can you take against political parties?’

News:  The Delhi High Court has sought the stand of the Election Commission of India (EC) on taking action against political parties, which do not comply with its instructions to disclose funding and expenditure details.

Context:  The EC toldDLSC the Bench that it has been consistently writing to the parties, which have not disclosed their expenditure.  “You wrote to them, but they have not complied. What further? When compliance has not been done, tell us what you propose to do? What powers do you have? Your response

indicates helplessness on your part,” a Bench of Chief Justice Rajendra Menon and Justice V.K. Rao said.  The High Court directed the EC to file an affidavit indicating what powers or options it has to ensure implementation or enforcement of its guidelines regarding disclosure of expenditure by political parties and what steps it can take when there is violation of its norms.  The High Court was hearing a petition by NGO Association for Democratic Reforms (ADR) seeking implementation of the guidelines as well as the Law Commission’s recommendation that a provision be enacted to monitor and regulate the expenditure by political parties during elections.  The NGO has alleged in its plea that since the present political system was being “funded through various illegal means and also by the people and corporate agencies with vested interests, it [political system] does not seem to be inclined to give effect to the recommendations of the Law Commission”.  Senior advocate Arvind Nigam and advocate Abhimanue Shrestha, appearing for ADR, said the Supreme Court has held that the EC has the power to give effect to the law panel’s recommendations.

Analysis:

Limitations of Electoral Reforms – 2017 The present government has introduced 3 major changes in the political funding -  Cash Donations -The limit on cash donations has been reduced from Rs 20,000 to Rs 2,000. It is futile without a cap on the ‘total number of donors or total permissible cash donations’. Otherwise more number of entries will be made to the registry by breaking down bigger cash donations.  Electoral Bonds- Anonymous electoral bonds, in which a donor can conceal his political preferences were suggested. In the present format this would actually legalize nepotism & corruption to get favours done.  Corporate Funding -The cap on corporate funding which was earlier fixed at 7.5% of the average annual profit of a company for the preceeding three years has been removed. This can lead to gross extortions of business houses by political parties. It also will increase the power of big corporations to influence public policy. The 7.5% cap has now been withdrawn.

Summary:  Political parties need to be recognized as ‘public authorities’ under the RTI Act and be brought under RTI regulations.  Cash donations need to be completetly scrapped or a cap on the total amount receivable in cash donations needs to be fixed.  The value of electoral bonds that can be bought by a particular person or entity needs to be restricted. DLSC  Corporate funding of elections needs to be reduced by various caps & other regulations.  Public financing of elections is another major area which needs to be explored.

PRELIMS CARDINAL :

Election Commission - Constitutional Provisions: 1. Art. 324: broadly speaks of the functions of EC and its composition. 2. Art. 325: there shall be one general electoral roll for every territorial constituency for election to either Houses of Parliament and State legislature. It establishes equality among citizens by affirming that no person shall be ineligible for inclusion in the electoral roll on the grounds of religion, race, caste or sex. 3. Art. 326: lays down adult suffrage as the basis of elections to the Lok Sabha and to the Legislative Assemblies of States. 4. Art. 327: confers on Parliament the power to make provisions with respect to elections to federal and State Legislatures 5. Art. 328: confers on State Legislature the power to make laws with respect to elections to such legislature 6. Art. 329: bars interference by courts in electoral matters. Notwithstanding anything said in the constitution i.e. validity of any law relating to the delimitation of constituencies or the allotment of seats to such constituencies shall not be called in question in any court

Functions and Powers of Election Commission: Key functions of the Election Commission of India are as under: 1. The Election Commission of India is considered the guardian of free and reasonable elections. 2. It issues the Model Code of Conduct in every election for political parties and candidates so that the decorum of democracy is maintained. 3. It regulates political parties and registers them for being eligible to contest elections. 4. It publishes the allowed limits of campaign expenditure per candidate to all the political parties, and also monitors the same. 5. The political parties must submit their annual reports to the ECI for getting tax benefit on contributions. 6. It guarantees that all the political parties regularly submit their audited financial reports.

Other powers handled by the Election Commission of India are as follows: 1. The Commission can repress the results of opinion polls if it deems such an action fit for the cause of democracy. 2. The Commission can recommend for disqualification of members after the elections if it thinks they have violated certain guidelines. 3. In case, a candidate is found guilty of dishonest practices during the elections, the Supreme Court and High Courts consult the Commission. 4. The Commission can postpone candidates who fail to submit their election expense accounts DLSCtimely.

INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS

DLSC

1. U.S. to pull out of nuclear Treaty

News:  The U.S is suspending its obligations under the Intermediate-Range Nuclear Forces (INF) Treaty effective February 2 and will withdraw from the treaty in six months, Secretary of State Mike Pompeo said.

Context:  The Trump and Obama administrations have repeatedly alleged that Russia was violating the treaty by fielding a ground-based cruise missile, the Novator 9M729 (“SSC-8” in NATO terminology) that could strike Europe at a short notice, an allegation that Russia has repeatedly denied.  The Russians have raised counter-allegations against the U.S., with regard to launchers for antiballistic missile systems in Europe.

Analysis: INF Treaty:  The 1987 treaty required the U.S. and the Soviet Union to eliminate and permanently forswear all of their nuclear and conventional ground-launched ballistic and cruise missiles with ranges of 500 to 5,500 kilometers.  The treaty marked the first time the superpowers had agreed to reduce their nuclear arsenals, eliminate an entire category of nuclear weapons, and utilize extensive onsite inspections for verification. As a result, the United States and the Soviet Union destroyed a total of 2,692 short-, medium-, and intermediate-range missiles by the treaty’s implementation deadline of June 1, 1991.  Despite its name, the INF Treaty covers all types of ground-launched cruise and ballistic missiles — whether their payload is conventional or nuclear. Moscow and Washington are prohibited from deploying these missiles anywhere in the world, not just in Europe. However, the treaty applies only to ground-launched systems. Both sides are free to deploy air- and sea-launched missiles within the 500-to-5,500-kilometer range.  The treaty, signed during the Cold War in 1987, bans ground-launched missiles with a range of 500 km-5,500 km. It was key to ending the arms race between the (then) two superpowers and helped protect the U.S.’s NATO allies in Europe from Soviet missile attacks. The U.S. will formally give Russia and the other treaty parties a formal notice that it is withdrawing under Article XV of the Treaty, Mr. Pompeo said. Article XV mandates a six-month notice period before withdrawal.

U.S. concerns:  U.S. believes the Treaty puts the nation in an “excessively weak position” against Russia “and more importantly China.  China has been gaining a strategic advantage (significant military advantage in Asia) over it as it is notDLSC party to the INF treaty and therefore, not bound by its terms. Withdrawal from the treaty will increase the weapons options for the U.S. in the Asia-Pacific, where China has increased its influence, threatening U.S. military interests in the region .

 The Chinese People’s Liberation Army now has the largest and most diverse missile force in the world, with an inventory of more than 2,000 ballistic and cruise missiles. 95% of those missiles would violate the INF Treaty, if China were a signatory.  The growing conventional military imbalance could well mean that the United States will not be able to uphold its security commitments to allies or reassure partners in the Indo-Pacific in the face of an increasingly assertive China.  Also, U.S. does not have easy access to much land around China to deploy ground- launched missiles. Missiles could certainly be placed in Guam, a U.S. island territory in the Pacific, but placing them in countries such as Japan or the Philippines would require more complicated negotiations. Ally concerns:  There is a debate among US allies in Europe over whether Russia’s alleged violations warrant a countermeasure such as deployment of an equivalent American missile in Europe. The US has no nuclear-capable missiles based in Europe currently; the last of that type and range were withdrawn in line with the INF treaty. Summary:  Leaving the INF treaty will unleash a new missile competition between the United States and Russia, which now plans to develop new types of missile systems in the next 2 years. The US had failed to exhaust diplomatic options to save the treaty.  The new Pentagon strategy of the U.S. identified China and Russia as key threats and called for sustained financial investment in the military to overcome a “a period of strategic atrophy”. It should be seen in the broader context of U.S.’s attempts to control and contain a raising China.  Given that Moscow has voiced concerns in the past about Chinese missiles, only creative diplomacy can show the way to a new treaty that would include China too. But, as of now, the U.S. unilateral withdraw from the treaty will have a multilateral negative effect. PRELIMS CARDINAL : A new arms race? DLSC

2. 11 EU nations back Guaido as President

News:  11 European nations joined the U.S. in recognising opposition leader Juan Guaido as Venezuela’s interim President, heightening a global showdown over Nicolas Maduro’s socialist rule.  The EU members’ coordinated move followed the expiry of an ultimatum for Mr. Maduro to call a new election and aligned them with Washington against Russia and China.

Analysis: What’s happening in Venezuela now?  Venezuela has for several years faced a devastating economic collapse that has created a humanitarian crisis and caused millions to flee the country. Maduro, a socialist dictator, has overseen much of that collapse. He was reelected last May (2018), but many citizens and international observers claim the process was rigged and that his presidency is a sham.  Juan Guaidó claims that Maduro’s rule is thus illegitimate. He says that according to the Venezuela’s constitution (articles 233 and 333), he, as the head of the National Assembly (the country’s legislative body), is now the rightful, albeit temporary, president of the country — not Maduro. He doesn’t plan to hold on to the presidency indefinitely, he says, and will call for new elections in the future.

DLSC

 President Donald Trump, along with a number of other world leaders, has now officially recognized Guaidó as the country’s legitimate ruler — and Maduro has retaliated by severing diplomatic ties with the US. Experts caution that the situation could escalate into a dangerous political showdown.  The Socialist government responded by warning that the top military leadership would come out “in support of the constitutional President”; the military would show “backing for the sovereignty” of Venezuela.  It is important to note that Article 233 of the Constitution, which Mr. Guaidó has invoked, lists the circumstances, such as the President’s death, dismissal or resignation, where the Parliament chief can assume power and call for fresh elections.  Experts opine that the current crisis, triggered by economic woes, government repression and a disputed election, is different.  Besides, most constitutional institutions in the country, including the armed forces, back Mr. Maduro. So do Russia and China.

What is the National Constituent Assembly? The opposition-controlled National Assembly has continued to meet, but its decisions have been ignored by President Maduro in favour of those made by the National Constituent Assembly.

Who can break the impasse? The security forces are seen as the key player in this crisis. So far, they have been loyal to Mr Maduro, who has rewarded them with frequent pay rises and put high-ranking military men in control of key posts and industries.

How did Venezuela get this bad?  Some of the problems go back a long time. However, it is President Maduro and his predecessor, the late President Hugo Chávez, who find themselves the target of much of the current anger. Their socialist governments have been in power since 1999, taking over the country at a time when Venezuela had huge inequality.  But the socialist polices brought in which aimed to help the poor backfired. Take price controls, for example. They were introduced by President Chávez to make basic goods more affordable to the poor by capping the price of flour, cooking oil and toiletries. But this meant that the few Venezuelan businesses producing these items no longer found it profitable to make them.  Critics also blame the foreign currency controls brought in by President Chávez in 2003 for a flourishing black market in dollars.  Since then, Venezuelans wanting to exchange bolivars for dollars have had to apply to a government-run currency agency. Only those deemed to have valid reasons to buy dollars, for example to import goods, have been allowed to change their bolivars at a fixed rateDLSC set by the government. With many Venezuelans unable to freely buy dollars, they turned to the black market.

Russia & Chinese concerns:  Russian and Chinese relations with Latin American countries are often described as simply transactional, and it is true that both Moscow and Beijing can drive hard bargains for their support. One price of Russia’s continued backing of the Maduro regime has been a significant ownership stake in the Venezuelan oil industry. China, too, has seen Venezuela as an energy source, and its economic growth would have driven enhanced involvement in Latin America even in the absence of any geopolitical design.  But for both countries, that involvement also has a deeply competitive logic. Reaching into Latin America is a way of keeping the U.S. off-balance by exerting influence in Washington’s “near abroad.” It helps augment Beijing’s and Moscow’s global influence and stature at a time of intensifying rivalry with Washington. Finally, supporting autocratic regimes such as those in Caracas and Managua — whether quietly, as in China’s case, or more vocally, as in Russia’s — is a way of making sure that the world remains ideologically safe for authoritarianism in Beijing and Moscow, as well.

What are the biggest challenges?  Arguably the biggest problem facing Venezuelans in their day-to-day lives is hyperinflation. The annual inflation rate reached 1,300,000% in the 12 months to November 2018, according to a study by the opposition-controlled National Assembly.

What's the government doing about it?  Back in August, the government lopped five zeros off the old "strong bolivar" currency and gave it a new name - the "sovereign bolivar". This meant people no longer had to carry such huge amounts of cash.  It also began circulating eight new banknotes worth 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200 and 500 sovereign bolivars and two new coins.  The new currency is part of an "economic package" of measures which the government says is the "magic formula" to help Venezuela's battered economy recover. Among the measures were:  Raising the minimum wage to 34 times its previous level from 1 September  Anchoring the sovereign bolivar to the petro, a virtual currency the government says is backed by the country’s oil, gas, gold and diamonds.  Curbing Venezuela's generous fuel subsidies for those not in possession of a "Fatherland ID"  Raising VAT by 4% to 16%  However, the currency has continued to fall since its introduction, and a further minimum wage increaseDLSC has had to be introduced, leading to questions over how effective the move was.

Other Challenges:

 Economic war: The government says it is the victim of an "economic war", including speculation and hoarding, by pro-opposition businessmen. Venezuela's currency has weakened sharply on the black market.  Food shortages: The government controls the price of basic goods, but the black market still has a powerful influence on prices. Prices on basic goods can change in a matter of days, causing severe food shortages.  Refinancing its debt: Instead of a default, Venezuela needs to work on refinancing and restructuring its foreign debt.  Health assistance: The economic crisis is also hitting Venezuela's public health system the hardest. In the country's public hospitals, medicine and equipment are increasingly not available.  Crime and poverty: Crime and violence are also widespread. In 2016, 27,479 people were killed - an all-time high - according to the independent group the Venezuelan Violence Observatory.

How have Venezuelans reacted?

 According to United Nations figures, three million Venezuelans have left the country since 2014 when the economic crisis started to bite. The mass migration is one of the largest forced displacements in the western hemisphere.

Summary:

 The growth of Russian and Chinese influence in Latin America broadly, and Venezuela specifically, is a key reason the Trump administration has so uncharacteristically taken up the banner of human rights and democracy. By imposing harsh economic sanctions, calling for the military to desert Maduro, and backing the political opposition led by the Juan Guiadó, the Trump administration is seeking to deprive Moscow, Beijing and Havana of a critical partner in Latin America. And while Russia and China have responded very differently to this crisis, both are working, in their own ways, to protect that partner.  Washington is increasingly waking up to the new struggle for advantage in Latin America. The outcome in Venezuela will be an early indicator of whether U.S. policy is up to the task. DLSC

PRELIMS CARDINAL : OPEC’s 14 Member nations:

DLSCOPEC members in South America

OPEC members in Africa

DLSC

OPEC members in West Asia(counter-clockwise, starting from Iran)

3. Visa crackdown (Indian Diaspora)

News:  The recent arrest of 129 Indians on the charge of willfully violating immigration laws to stay and work in the United States sends a stark message to youth looking for better prospects abroad: their efforts should begin with due diligence and strictly follow the letter of the law.

Analysis: As a matter of fact, in the sting operation carried out by the U.S. Department of Homeland Security, which threatens to encompass many more Indians in the ‘University of Farmington’ case, the contentious issue is whether they fell victim to unscrupulous recruiters who offered to secure an I-20 student document that allowed them to undertake paid work using the provision for Curricular Practical Training, or knowingly engaged in fraud. Going by the indictment of 8 recruiters of Indian origin, they knew they were violating U.S. immigration law when they enrolled students using fraudulent and unlawful means, and their profits included negotiated referral fees paid into their accounts by undercover agents.

What has the prosecution alleged?  The prosecution has alleged that each student who enrolled in the ‘university’ was aware that there would be no classes, credit scores or academic requirements, and the intention was merely to “pay to stay” and gain access to employment.  It is important to note that these statements are, of course, subject to scrutiny during the trial of the alleged recruiters.  The Ministry of External Affairs has made the correct distinction between students who may have been duped and the recruiters.  Students who are eligible to pursue studies at an authorised university in the U.S. should, therefore, get a further opportunity and not be subjected to summary deportation or humiliation.  It must also not prejudice the prospects of such students who may apply in future for legal entry. Was this the first case?  The University of Farmington case in Michigan is not the first instance of Indian students falling foul of U.S. immigration laws, although it stands apart as a racket exposed by a sting operation.  Others such as Tri-Valley University and Herguan University were degree mills run by individuals that used false claims and documents to enable youth to unlawfully stay in the U.S. and, in many cases, pursue employment.

Summary: DLSC  It is important to note that these trends reinforce the need for good communication that would help students identify credentialed institutions that meet the requirements of the Student and Exchange Visitor Program, and highlight the serious nature of visa fraud.

 If the averments in the Michigan case are correct, the prospect of working in America attracted many of the 600 students who were recruited.  This should serve as a reminder to India’s policymakers that access to higher education, job-creation and raising of living standards to meet the aspirations of youth must receive priority.  Lastly, talk of an impending demographic dividend is meaningless without creating opportunities at home.

PRELIMS CARDINAL :

Few important US Visas: H-1B Visa  The H-1B category is an expedient and lawful method to bring foreign-born professionals temporarily to the US, and therefore one of the most widely sought after visa classifications for employment in the United States.  The H-1B is a non-immigrant visa; it allows U.S. employers to temporarily employ foreign workers in specialty occupations.  H-4 visa is a work permit issued to the spouses of H1-B visa holders under a special order by the previous Obama administration. It allows work permits for spouses who otherwise could not be employed without waiting for their spouses to receive permanent resident status, a process that can take a decade or longer.

H-2B Visa  The H-2B visa non-immigrant program permits employers to hire foreign workers to come temporarily to the United States and perform temporary nonagricultural services or labor on a one-time, seasonal, peakload or intermittent basis.

L-1 Visa  The L-1 visa facilitates the temporary transfer of foreign worker in the managerial, executive or specialized knowledge category to the U.S., to continue employment with an office of the same employer, its parent branch, subsidiary or affiliate.  L-1 visa is a temporary non-immigrant visa that allows L-2 visa for the spouse and minor unmarried children under 21 years of age. L-1 visa holder is known as intra- company transferee.  Even though L-1 visa was initially made for large multinational companies to transfer their employees to the U.S., it provides small or start-up companies abroad to expand their business and services to the U.S.

4. No zero-sum games

News:  There are DLSCalarm bells in India over a possible decision by the U.S. Trade Representative (USTR) to withdraw the Generalised System of Preferences (GSP) status.  The revocation of the GSP, which was first extended to India in 1976 as part of a “global concession” by the U.S. to help developing countries build their economies,

will be a blow to Indian exporters, and the biggest in a series of measures taken by the Trump administration against India to reduce its trade deficit.  The measures are in line with Mr. Trump’s campaign promises.

Analysis:

India – USA trade hostilities:  Trump’s case on what he calls “unequal tariffs” from India rests on the trade relationship in favour of India (India has a trade Surplus with the U.S): Indian exports to the U.S. in 2017-18 stood at $47.9 billion, while imports were $26.7 billion.  On the matter of Harley-Davidson motorcycles, Trump spoke directly to Modi on at least 3 occasions, demanding that India zero out tariffs to match U.S. rates on Indian motorcycles.  In March 2018, the U.S. began imposing tariffs on several Indian products.  In April 2018, the USTR began a review of India’s GSP status, based on complaints of trade barriers from India it had received from the dairy industry and manufacturers of medical devices.  In November 2018, the U.S. withdrew GSP status on at least 50 Indian products.  In retaliation, India proposed tariffs of about $235 million on 29 American goods, but has put off implementing these 5 times in the past year in the hope that a negotiated trade settlement will come through. The latest deadline expires on March 1, 2019.  India has also attempted to address the trade deficit with purchase of American oil, energy and aircraft.  U.S. officials say the decision on data localisation for all companies operating in India and tightening of the norms for FDI in e-commerce have aggravated the situation.

What is GSP Status?  It is a U.S. trade program designed to promote economic growth in the developing world by providing “preferential duty-free entry” for up to 4,800 products from 129 designated beneficiary countries and territories.  GSP was instituted on January 1, 1976, by the Trade Act of 1974.  Under GSP, India is able to export about 2,000 product lines to the U.S. under zero tariff ($5.6bn exports to USA).  At present, 29 countries including EU extend GSP status to India.

What is the objective of GSP? To give development support to poor countries by promoting exports from them into the developed countries. GSP promotes sustainable development in beneficiary countries by helping these countries to increase and diversify their trade with the United States. GSP provide opportunities for many of the world’s poorest countries to use trade to grow their economies and climb out of poverty.

Benefits of GSP:DLSC Indian exporters benefit indirectly – through the benefit that accrues to the importer by way of reduced tariff or duty free entry of eligible Indian products.

Reduction or removal of import duty on an Indian product makes it more competitive to the importer – other things (e.g. quality) being equal. This tariff preference helps new exporters to penetrate a market and established exporters to increase their market share and to improve upon the profit margins, in the donor country.

What is the impact of GSP withdrawal on India? India exports nearly 50 products of the 94 products on which GSP benefits are stopped. The GSP removal will leave a reasonable impact on India as the country enjoyed preferential tariff on exports worth of nearly $ 5. 6 billion under the GSP route out of the total exports of $48 bn in 2017-18. In total India exports nearly 1,937 products to the US under GSP. Removal of GSP indicate a tough trade position by the US; especially for countries like India who benefited much from the scheme. India is the 11th largest trade surplus country for the US and India enjoyed an annual trade surplus of $ 21 bn in 2017-18.

Summary:  India must leverage the U.S-China trade issues: India must keep in mind that the larger, global picture is about U.S.-China trade issues, and if a trade deal with the U.S. is reached, India could be the biggest beneficiary of business deals lost by China.  The U.S. must also realize that India is heading into elections, and offer more flexibility in the next few months.  Both sides should work towards breaking the deadlock and speed up efforts for a comprehensive trade “package”, rather than try to match each concern product by product.

PRELIMS CARDINAL :

Difference between GSP and usual trade arrangement under WTO: Under the normal trade laws, the WTO members must give equal preferences to trade partners. There should not be any discrimination between countries. This trade rule under the WTO is called the Most Favored Nation (MFN) clause. The MFN instructs non- discrimination that any favorable treatment to a particular country. At the same time, the WTO allows members to give special and differential treatment to from developing countries (like zero tariff imports). This is an exemption for MFN. The GSP given by developed countries including the US is an exception to MFN.

5. India, Maldives reverse visa stand-off

News:  India and Maldives had exchanged an agreement to facilitate visas for travel between the two countriesDLSC in a number of categories, easing a bilateral stand-off which had resulted in thousands of Indian job seekers being denied work permits last year.  The agreement was signed in December of last year during the visit of Maldives President Ibu Solih.

Analysis:

Details of the Agreement:  It provides a very liberal visa regime for Maldivian nationals to visit India for tourism, business, education & medical purposes. It also makes it easier for Indians to travel to Maldives for business purposes  Under the agreement, the government will free up the visa regime for Maldives citizens who travel to India for medical reasons and for education in particular. This will include allowing Maldives citizens who receive a visa on arrival in India to change their visa status to medical visas if they require hospitalisation during their stay.  Medical visas will also be granted to attendants to accompany patients. The government has also agreed to grant visas for parents and other dependants to live in India while their children attend school here. The facilitation has been a long-pending demand of the Maldives government, given the difficulties faced by thousands of short-term visa applicants each year.  The agreement will ease visas on arrival for Indian businessmen, and bring cheer to Indians applying for work in the Maldives, as it stipulates that work permits will be issued within 15 days to Indian employees, and the visa fees will be paid by employers in the Maldives.

Summary:

DLSC

Importance of Maldives to India

PRELIMS CARDINAL : Chinese String of Pearls:

6. Ageing revolution (Iran’s 1979 Revolution)

News:  Iran has concluded the formal celebrations of the 40th anniversary of the Islamic revolution at a time when the regime is under serious global, regional and domestic pressure.  The theocratic regime, established by Ayatollah Ruhollah Khomeini in 1979, struck a defiant note by mobilising a huge rally in Tehran and repeating its familiar anti-West rhetoric.

Analysis:

Current Situation in Iran:  Currently, Iran’s leaders are under pressure with a weak economy and social tensions rising at aDLSC time when Donald Trump is becoming increasingly hostile towards Tehran.  The fact that the Islamic Republic has survived 4 decades is telling.  Over these years, Iran saw an 8-year-long war with Iraq, near-total isolation in West Asia, and economic hardships.

 The Iranian regime turned some of these challenges into opportunities — as in the case of the 1980-88 Iran-Iraq war — and made substantial changes in certain sectors. For example, the investments made in education and health care have seen positive results.  As of 2015, the literacy rate among Iran’s adult population was 93%. More than 60% of university students in Iran are women. Access to health care has also improved for large sections of society.

Rise of Discontentment:  Some experts have pointed out that even as the Islamic Republic holds strong, discontent has risen.  As a matter of fact, when Iran signed the multilateral nuclear deal in 2015, the Tehran elite hoped it would allow the country to join the global economic and diplomatic mainstream.  President Hassan Rouhani banked on increased investments to bolster the economy. However, the détente between the U.S. and Iran ended as soon as Mr. Trump became U.S. President.

Impact of Trump becoming President:  The Trump administration pulled the U.S. out of the nuclear deal and reimposed sanctions on Tehran.  The U.S. has also joined hands with Iran’s rivals, such as Saudi Arabia, to scuttle the country’s regional ambitions.  Further, Israel is repeatedly bombing Iranian positions within Syria.  Within Iran, the regime is facing repeated protests as economic hardships mount. After the 2009 Green Movement, which was suppressed brutally, there were widespread anti-government demonstrations in 2017-18.  Women came out against the mandatory headscarf in recent months, challenging religious orthodoxy.  The Iranian state responded typically — an Amnesty report says “a shameless campaign of repression” was unleashed in 2018, resulting in the arrest of more than 7,000 protesters.

Perspective on Anti-Western Sentiments:  The American support to Saddam’s invasion of Iran in 1980 augmented anti-Western sentiments and further helped the clergy-dominated regime to consolidate its power in the country.  The bankrolling of Hussein’s war to the tune of billions of dollars by Saudi Arabia and allied Gulf regimes solidified the antagonism between revolutionary Iran and the Arab monarchies of the Gulf. As a matter of fact, it also hardened the division between Shias and Sunnis in West Asia.  It is importantDLSC to note that the Iranian-Saudi rivalry is being played out to this day in Yemen, Syria, Lebanon and other parts of West Asia.

 However, the most important lesson of the revolution and its aftermath is the demonstration of Iran’s remarkable staying power as a state and a nation in the face of a very hostile international milieu.

The Iranian Spirit:

 Iran has confronted unprecedented economic sanctions since the revolution, a process that intensified in the past decade and a half to force Tehran to give up its presumed nuclear aspirations.  The Iranian people put up with grave hardship for four decades but did not surrender their “national sovereignty”.  This is because the state of Iran/Persia has been in existence since time immemorial, and in its present contours from the early 16th century, its citizens have developed a sense of innate pride and confidence in the state’s staying power against the heaviest odds.  The development of ‘Persian nationalism’ has been a gradual process that, one can argue, culminated in the underlying thrust of the revolution.  Persian nationalism draws upon its glorious pre-Islamic heritage, as described in the “Shahnameh”, Iran’s epic par excellence.  It is also engendered by the twin marks of distinction that Iranians are very proud of:  their ability to preserve their Persian character and language despite their acceptance of Islam, a religion of Arab origin  the distinctive character of Persian Islam embodied in Shia doctrines that distinguishes it from its predominantly Sunni neighbours.  Experts opine that regardless of the nature of a particular regime, longevity of national memories and people’s pride in them can work great miracles when faced by hostile forces bent on emasculating the nation’s sovereignty.

Summary:

 Tehran’s criticism of foreign intervention has some merit.  American sanctions will only multiply Iran’s economic woes.  Tehran will have to deal with the U.S.’s unilateral and hostile policies with help from other countries.  Experts have pointed out that it should also fix its system, tackle corruption and hold government departments accountable for the decisions they take.  It is also time for the government, which is celebrating the anniversary of the fall of a despotic monarch, to rethink its approach towards dissent and personal freedoms. DLSC

PRELIMS CARDINAL :

INSTC (International North South Transport Corridor):

 Standard Route - Transit time is 40-60 days  INSTC Route - Transit time is only 25-30 days and 30% cheaper  Compared to the current Indian Ocean-European transport route via the Red Sea, Suez Canal and the Mediterranean, the Chabahar-based INSTC is estimated to be 40% shorter and will reduce the cost of Indian trade by 30%.

Chabahar port in being developed by India, is also being proposed to be a part of INSTC. For India, the Chabahar port will serve as the Indian Ocean outlet for New Delhi’s grand InternationalDLSC North- South Transit Corridor (INSTC) initiative. With India’s overland access to Central Asia is blocked by Pakistan, the Chabahar deep-sea port and the INSTC running northward through Iran and Afghanistan will provide New Delhi vital access to Central Asian, Russian, and ultimately European markets, enabling India to

effectively compete with China. Further, with U.S. sanctions against Iran and Chabahar being granted a waiver, Iran too is focusing on the port (Free Trade zones, Special Economic Zones, infrastructure development etc) for its own economic development.

5 Countries bordering Caspian Sea: i. Russia ii. Kazakhstan iii. Turkmenistan iv. Iran v. Azerbaijan

7. India revokes Pak.’s MFN status day after terrorist strike in J&K

News:  India has revoked the Most Favoured Nation (MFN) status of Pakistan on security grounds and warned of more measures in response to its support for terrorist groups targeting India. The decision was taken in the meeting of the Cabinet Committee on Security (CCS) that took place on 15th February 2019.  Commerce ministry will notify to the WTO (World Trade Organization) to revoke the MFN status to Pakistan by invoking “Article 21” of the WTO (World Trade Organization) which is theDLSC “security exception”.  While the Indian Prime Minister asserted that those responsible for the terrorist attack in Jammu and Kashmir would be given a “befitting reply,” the Opposition rallied behind the government in a show of solemn unity.

Analysis:  The WTO is the only global international organisation dealing with the rules of trade between nations and the 164 member countries of the WTO represent 98 per cent of world trade.  Only a handful of very small countries are out of the WTO.  The primary purpose of the WTO is to open trade for the benefit of all. In that sense, “most favoured” sounds like a contradiction. But even though it suggests special treatment, in the WTO it actually means non-discrimination — that is treating virtually everyone equally. In effect, then, every WTO member is supposed to be“most favoured” for all other WTO members.  Article 1 of General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade (GATT), 1994, requires every WTO member country to accord MFN status (or preferential trade terms with respect to tariffs and trade barriers) to all other member countries.  Accordingly, India accorded in 1996 MFN status to all WTO member countries, including Pakistan, from the date of entry into force of the so called Marrakesh Agreement, establishing the WTO; however despite repeated promises, Pakistan has never granted MFN status to India.  Pakistan is yet to transition fully to MFN status for India and it maintains a Negative List of 1,209 products that are not allowed to be imported from India. In addition, Pakistan permits only 138 products to be imported from India through Wagah/Attari border land route. Despite these restrictions, India continues to maintain a substantial trade surplus with Pakistan.

What does MFN mean?  While the term suggests ‘special preference’ for the country given MFN status, it actually means it would be ‘treated equally’ as all others.  According to the WTO rules, countries cannot normally discriminate between their trading partners.  If one country is granted a trade concession such as, for example, lower import duties, then all WTO members must be extended the same concessions. This principle is known as the MFN treatment.

Controversy over reciprocal status for India:  On November 2, 2011, the Pakistani cabinet decided formally to accord India MFN status. But that decision remains unimplemented.  In March 2012, Pakistan substituted a “Positive List” of a more than 1,950 tariff lines permitted for import from India, by a “Negative List” of 1,209 lines that could not be imported.  This meant that the default setting had moved from ‘no import’ to ‘import’, and instead of listing only items that could be bought from India, Pakistan had listed items that could not be bought, with everything else allowed. But this was still not the same as according India MFN status.DLSC  This intransigence has periodically triggered anger in India, and demands have been raised, especially during times of heightened tensions and terrorist attacks sponsored by

Pakistan, to withdraw the MFN status that New Delhi has granted to Islamabad. India had not, however, taken that step so far.  Despite the bilateral ups and downs, the MFN status accorded by India was not touched.  It is important to note that as late as December 19, 2018, in response to a query in Rajya Sabha on the withdrawal of MFN status to Pakistan, the junior Commerce and Industry Minister had told Rajya Sabha in a written reply: “No decision has been taken to review the MFN status accorded to Pakistan, so far..”

Perspective on India-Pakistan trade:

 India’s trade numbers with Pakistan are minuscule. Trade between the neighbours jumped nearly three-and-a-half times between 2000-01 and 2005-06 (from $251 million to $869 million per annum), but progress was slower in the decade that followed, with volumes rising a little over three times.  India’s trade with much smaller Bhutan is over half that with Pakistan (In 2016, total India- Bhutan bilateral trade was Rs 8,723 crore; with Pakistan, it was around Rs 17,200 crore.) Back in 2007, the Indian Council of Research on International Economic Relations (Icrier) had projected a bilateral trade potential of $11.7 billion (Rs 46,098 crore), if both neighbours took proactive measures to exploit untapped areas of economic cooperation. But in FY17, India-Pakistan trade was a mere $2.29 billion, or about 0.35% of India’s overall trade.  It is important to note that in the 7th round of Commerce Secretary level talks with Pakistan, held in September 2012 in Islamabad, a roadmap was agreed for facilitating trade, identifying several actions to be taken by both the countries in a time-bound manner.  The agreed roadmap could not be implemented since Pakistan did not notify the removal of trade restrictions through Wagah-Attari land route (which was the first step identified in the roadmap).  The Commerce Ministers of India and Pakistan met in January 2014 on the sidelines of the 5th SAARC Business Leaders Conclave held at New Delhi.  Then in the meeting between Prime Ministers of India and Pakistan on 27th May 2014, India stated that the two countries could move immediately towards full trade normalisation on the basis of September 2012 roadmap worked out between the Commerce Secretaries of both countries.  No bilateral trade meeting between India and Pakistan has taken place since then.  Pakistan’s Prime Minister Imran Khan has repeatedly spoken of improving trade with India, arguing that “the best way to alleviate poverty and uplift the people of the subcontinent is to resolve our differences through dialogue and start trading”.

Move to withdraw the MFN status:  Union Finance Minister Arun Jaitley in his first day of resuming office addressed the press following a Cabinet Committee on Securities meeting on 15th February, 2019 saying that the MFN statusDLSC to Pakistan stands withdrawn.  The decision by India to withdraw MFN status to Pakistan is intended to isolate Pakistan diplomatically and squeeze the country’s industry.

What does revoking MFN mean? Revoking it means India can levy whatever import tariffs it wants. India can now make it very expensive for Pakistan to export its goods or services to India.

Summary:

Possible impact on Pakistan’s Economy: Post withdrawal of MFN Status:

 The scale of impact is questionable and the move is only symbolic, given the statistics. India’s total trade with Pakistan stood at $2.4 billion in 2017-18, with just $488.56 million of this being imports from Pakistan, according to Commerce Ministry data. Trade experts said this decision would not have a major implication on bilateral trade between the countries as the value of trade is below $ 3 billion annually.  However, even though the low volumes of trade limit the impact that such a step can have, the stoppage of input materials such as chemicals and cotton from India can push up costs of production for the relevant Pakistani industries.  It would also give a push to the illegal trade between the two countries, which takes place through border gaps and via third countries.  It could also give a handle to extremist elements in Pakistan to scale up the rhetoric against India.  Although Pakistan can drag India into the WTO's dispute settlement mechanism on the matter, their case would be weak as they have not yet granted the tag to India.

PRELIMS CARDINAL :

Other WTO Provisions - Special Safeguard Mechanism (SSM) SSM is a protection measure allowed for developing countries to take contingency restrictions against agricultural imports that are causing injuries to domestic farmers. The contingency measure is imposition of tariff if the import surge causes welfare loss to the domestic poor farmers. The design and use of the SSM is an area of conflict under the WTO. What are safeguards? In WTO’s terms, safeguards are contingency or emergency restrictions on imports taken temporarily to deal with special circumstances such as a surge in imports. Contingency restriction means imposition of an import tax if the imports are causing injuries to domestic agricultural sector. The original GATT itself allows such restrictions to protect domestic economy. Doha Development Agenda (2001) and the origin of the SSM: At the Doha Ministerial Conference, the developing countries were given a concession to adopt a SSM besides the existing safeguards (like the Special Agricultural Safeguard or the SSG). This SSM DLSCconstituted an important part of the promises offered to the developing world at Doha (known as Doha Development Agenda) and the Doha MC became known as a development round. As mentioned, the Special Safeguard Mechanism (SSM) allowed developing countries to

raise import duties on agricultural products in response to import surges. Difference between SSM and other safeguards under Agreement on Agriculture: The SSG was available to all countries - both developing and developed whereas the SSM is allowable only to the developing countries. It is to be mentioned that the SSG was available as it was inducted under the GATT agreement; whereas the SSM was the invention of the Doha MC. Conflict among WTO members about the structure of the SSM:  But the design of exact rules of the SSM created conflict among the WTO members. Setting the conditions for putting restrictions on imports and the amount of tariff imposition became contentious issues and it caused the delay in the implementation of the entire Doha Development Agenda.  Powerful negotiating countries at the WTO, the US and India had conflicting versions about the structure of the SSM. Other countries joined the two sides later.  The G33 supports India’s stand whereas the advanced countries and some agricultural exporting countries like Brazil supports the US stand.  Both groups differed substantially on many aspects of the SSM. Following are the main issues which created the conflict.  What should be the trigger factor that allows a developing country to put restrictions (raising tariff) on imports?  What should be the level of tariff that can be imposed on injurious imports  India argued for higher level of tariff and lower import surge for making the SSM. On the other hand, the US and allies argued for lower tariffs and higher imports for using the SSM. In 2008, the trade discussions got to a standstill because of the above conflicting views on SSM; especially due to the difference among the US and India.  Basically, the underlying cause of the disagreement among members was the inability to distinguish between import surges that do not threaten the livelihood conditions of developing country farmers and those that do. Much of the debate has focused on the circumstances under which the SSM could be evoked and how high safeguard duties could rise.  The developed countries want developing nations, including India, to agree to use SSM instrument when imports surge on a sustained basis by 40% over the previous year. On the other hand, India and the G33 insist that the mechanism can come into play if imports rise by about 10%.

8. Trump declares emergency to build border wall

News:  President Donald Trump formally declared a national emergency at the border to access billions of dollars to build a border wall that Congress refused to give him, transforming a highly charged policy dispute into a fundamental confrontation over separation of powers.  In a televisedDLSC announcement in the Rose Garden, Mr. Trump said he was signing the declaration to protect the country from the flow of drugs, criminals and illegal immigrants coming across the southwestern border from Mexico, which he characterised as a profound threat to national security.

Analysis:

National Emergencies Act of USA

 A president can declare a national emergency under the 1976 National Emergencies Act (NEA), which was passed in the aftermath of the Watergate crisis in an attempt to limit, not expand, executive power.  The act does not define what constitutes a “national emergency.” But it does require the White House to put forward a legal justification for any emergency declaration and requires a congressional review every six months.  The NEA is a United States federal law passed to end all previous national states of emergency and to formalize the emergencies powers of the President.  The Act empowers the President to activate special powers during a crisis but imposes certain procedural formalities when invoking such powers.  The perceived need for the law arose from the scope and number of laws granting special powers to the executive in times of national emergency. Congress can undo a state of emergency declaration with either a joint resolution and the President’s signature, or with a veto-proof (two-thirds) majority vote.  The legislation was signed by President Gerald Ford on September 14, 1976. As of February 2019, 59 national emergencies have been declared, and the United States is under 31 continuing declared states of national emergency.  The International Emergency Economic Powers Act, enacted in 1977, falls under the National Emergencies Act, which means that an emergency declared under that Act must be renewed annually to remain in effect.

Will the ‘emergency’ help to build the wall?

 In theory it could. Following the declaration of a national emergency, military officials are empowered to divert funding and resources “essential to the national defense” including the “use of the armed forces”.  So Trump could order the military to move money and troops around to address the emergency – in this case, Trump imagines, by building a wall.  But many analysts believe that the emergency declaration will not produce a wall, owing to the anticipated challenges in the courts and Congress. Or it will fail due to public outcry or perhaps to a breakdown in compliance somewhere in the chain of command, either on the part of military officials or Trump’s own legal team.

Mexican border wall – Will it help the US?

 Since his swearing-in as President, Trump is wasting no time in enforcing his numerous campaign promises. One such order is the use of federal resources to construct a Mexican borderDLSC wall.

 The border with Mexico is roughly 1,900 miles long and spans four states: California, Arizona, New Mexico and Texas.

 Trump’s thinking is that a giant wall dividing Mexico and the United States will restrict illegal immigrants’ entry into the country, as he feels the border patrol as it currently stands is weak and letting too many, as he puts it, “rapists” onto American soil.  Currently 652 miles of the 1,954-mile U.S. Mexico border has some amalgamation of walls, fences and other barriers. In areas closest to cities the wall has multiple layers. The wall is the weakest in more desolate areas and in some areas there is no wall at all. This is frequently because the terrain already provides a natural barrier, such as the widest partsDLSC of the “Rio Grande River” or steep mountain ranges.  Analysts believe the majority (possibly vast majority) of illegal immigrants enter America by air. There are 2 kinds of illegal immigration. President Trump’s rhetoric focuses on

“entries without inspection.” But most illegal immigrants actually arrive in America with a visa – and then simply don’t leave. These are called “overstays.”  Also, the states where illegal immigration is growing are not on the Mexican border. The states with rising illegal immigration are Washington, Pennsylvania, New Jersey, Virginia, Massachusetts and Louisiana. Texas, New Mexico and Arizona have seen no significant, measurable increase in illegal immigrants. And California, Nevada, Illinois, Alabama, Georgia and South Carolina have seen their illegal immigrant population decline.  A border wall does not address the growth of illegal immigrants and as to the extent illegal immigrants are working in the U.S., they are clearly not in the border states.  Besides, the number of illegal immigrants living in the U.S. is actually declining. There are more Mexicans returning to live in Mexico than are illegally entering the U.S. Between 2009 and 2014 over 1 million illegal Mexican immigrants willingly returned to Mexico where working conditions had improved and they could be with family.  Americans also seem divided by the wall. According to a poll 47% of voters support building a wall, with 45% against. Critics say the wall proposal is pointless because, among other things, most drugs smuggled into the United States pass through legal entry points and are not transported through the desert.  The US-Mexico border region is a delicate ecosystem with regular animal and bird migrations moving between the north and south of the American continent. A number of species need to cross the border to mate with their genetically different cousins, including the endangered North American jaguar and black bears, which would be threatened without being able to mate with Mexican bears.

Summary:  If the main intention is to stop illegal border immigrants into the U.S., the best (and least costly) policy would be to cooperate with Mexico to capture these immigrants as they flee Central America and find a solution for either housing them in Mexico or returning them to their country of origin.  It is ridiculous to expect Mexico to pay for a wall when it is not Mexico’s citizens creating the purported illegal immigration problem on the border.  If the administration would like to stop illegal immigration the best way is to help Mexico create more high-paying jobs (say with a trade deal like NAFTA) so they don’t come to America, and those in America simply choose to go to Mexico.

PRELIMS CARDINAL :

Rio Grande / Rio Bravo:  The Rio Grande is one of the principal rivers in the southwest United States and northern Mexico.  Its name is Spanish for the “Big River,” but the Rio Grande is actually known as Rio Bravo in Mexico. “Bravo” translates as “ furious,” so the name makes sense.  The lengthDLSC of the Rio Grande is approximately 3,051 kilometers (1,885 miles), though course shifts occasionally result in length changes.  The Rio Grande is the fourth longest river in North America.  The Rio Grande flows through seven states, 3 U.S states (Colorado, New Mexico &

Texas), and 4 Mexican states (Chihuahua, Coahuila, Nuevo León & Tamaulipas).  The river rising as a clear, snow-fed mountain stream more than 3,700 meters (12,000 feet) above sea level in the Rocky Mountains.

Rio Grande River

Sonoran Desert:  The Sonoran Desert is a North American desert which covers large parts of the Southwestern United States in Arizona and California and of Northwestern Mexico in Sonora, Baja California, and Baja California Sur. It is the hottest desert in Mexico. It has an area of 260,000 square kilometers (100,000 sq mi).  The western portion of the United States–Mexico border passes through the Sonoran Desert.

9. Heralding a new dawn

News: Saudi Crown Prince Mohammed bin Salman visits India in the month of February, 2019 at a time when both countries are seeking to deepen bilateral cooperation.

Analysis: Significance of the Visit: A Saudi Perspective: For CrownDLSC Prince Mohammed bin Salman, the visit to India, Pakistan, China, Malaysia and Indonesia is an opportunity to re-assert Saudi Arabia’s role as a major foreign policy player in Asia amid growing criticism over the Yemen war and the brutal assassination of journalist Jamal Khashoggi in Istanbul.

Significance of the Visit: An Indian Perspective: For the government of Prime Minister Narendra Modi, the visit, with general elections approaching, is an opportunity to cap its pursuit of stronger ties with West Asian nations on a high note.

Nature of Visits (Saudi-India):  High-level visits between India and Saudi Arabia have become the new normal since King Abdullah came to India in 2006, the first Saudi monarch to do so in five decades.  Four years later, Prime Minister Manmohan Singh travelled to Riyadh. Mr. Modi visited Riyadh in 2016; last year, he met Crown Prince Mohammed bin Salman in Argentina on the sidelines of the G-20 summit at a time when the Crown Prince had already come under sharp criticism in many Western countries.  A number of factors have influenced the turnaround in ties between the two countries, which had been underwhelming during the Cold War.  When India’s economy started growing at a faster clip post-liberalisation, its dependence on energy-rich nations grew. And Saudi Arabia was a stable, trusted supplier of oil.  Further, Post-9/11, the two have expanded the scope of their partnership to economic issues and fighting terrorism.

What is expected in the upcoming visit?  Mohammed bin Salman is expected to announce Saudi investments in both India and Pakistan.  Saudi Arabia, which has traditionally exercised great influence over Pakistan, had recently offered a $6 billion loan to Islamabad to stabilise the economy.  In India, Saudi Arabia and the UAE have acquired a 50% stake in a refinery complex in Ratnagiri district, Maharashtra. However, the project remains stalled amid protests against land acquisition, but it shows Saudi Arabia’s interest to make long-term investments in India’s energy sector.

Iran:  Another subject that that will come up in bilateral talks is Iran.  Crown Prince Mohammed bin Salman has made containment of Iran his top foreign policy priority, and has U.S. support in this pursuit.  It is also important to point out that India is certain to come under U.S. pressure to cut oil imports from Iran: it has so far walked the tightrope between Saudi Arabia and Iran.  Even as itsDLSC ties with the Kingdom improved over the past decade, India deepened its engagement with Iran, be it on oil trade or the Chabahar port.  This is driven by the conviction that while Saudi Arabia is vital for India’s energy security, Iran is a gateway to Central Asia.

 In conclusion, India is sure to continue this balancing act even as it seeks to strengthen the Saudi pillar of India’s West Asia policy.

Brief Historical Background:  In April 2016, under the leadership of the Custodian of the Two Holy Mosques, King Salman bin Abdulaziz Al Saud, and Crown Prince Mohammed bin Salman, the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia gave itself a goal and a promise in the form of Vision 2030.  The Saudi citizen has become the focal point for sustainable development with massive projects directed towards building a vibrant society, a thriving economy and an ambitious nation.  The entire foundation of Saudi Arabia’s economy is being transformed towards a post-oil age with the aim of attracting $427 billion in private investments over the next decade to diversify the economy and create 1.6 million new jobs through the National Industrial Development and Logistics Programme.

Powered by reforms:  According to World Bank’s ‘Doing Business 2018’ report, Saudi Arabia has instituted the largest number of business reforms among countries in the Middle East and North Africa (MENA) region as of July 2017.  Further, with its platform Meras, starting a business in the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia now requires only one step and one day!

Brief Note on the Meras Platform:  The Meras platform is an e-government initiative to enhance the private sector’s role in the Saudi market.  The initiative aims to help Saudi business owners to understand the process of establishing their business in Saudi Arabia.  It is a gateway that provides businesses with e-services, by collecting all the important links in one place.  These links direct the user immediately to the appropriate government website, thereby saving effort and time.  Thus, business owners will be able to manage their business registrations and complete them through one single platform.  FASAH is Saudi Arabia’s national platform which connects all government and private entities involved in cross border trade.  The single-window platform Fasah has also been launched for customs clearance and import and export procedures.

A Closer Look at Saudi Arabia:  The ‘Doing Business 2019’ report has ranked Saudi Arabia as the fourth-largest reformer within the G20.  In 2018, SaudiDLSC Arabia saw foreign direct investment rise by 127% year-on-year.  Further, it is important to note that Global confidence in Saudi Arabia’s ascent has further solidified with the International Monetary Fund forecasting increased growth for Saudi Arabia in July 2018.

 The Kingdom’s construction market is set to touch $96.52 billion in 2025, up from $45.33 billion in 2016.  There are three giga-projects underway — smart city project Neom, Qiddiya entertainment city and the Red Sea Tourism Project.  In 2018, FekraTech, which a national initiative for digital ideas, aimed at making Saudi Arabia a global innovation hub was also launched.  The Saudi Intellectual Property Authority is also working towards transforming Saudi Arabia into an advanced knowledge-based economy built on innovation and entrepreneurship.  A $100 billion planned investment in transport projects will also occur over the next decade as Saudi Arabia expands the railway system and introduce new light rail mass transit projects in Riyadh, Jeddah, Makkah and Madinah.  The grand expansions of the Holy Mosque in Makkah and the Prophet’s Mosque in Madinah have increased their capacity for accommodating millions of worshippers.

Vision 2030:  One of the most important goals of the Vision 2030 is to increase Saudi Arabia’s capacity to welcome 30 million Umrah performers every year by 2030, improve their experience and enrich it further.  Since a majority of the Kingdom’s population is below the age of 30, education is a key component of Vision 2030. Over the decades, Saudi Arabia’s education system has gone through an astonishing transformation.  Due to generous scholarships from the Kingdom, a large number of Saudi students study overseas.  By 2030, the Kingdom intends to have at least five Saudi universities among the top 200 in international rankings. Education reforms have also led to an increase in women’s literacy and participation in the workforce.  Further, with the Kingdom at the heart of the Arab and Islamic world, the changes taking place on the Saudi soil are creating positive influences for the entire Arab region.  Saudi Arabia remains committed to the social, economic and political stability of the region and will continue playing a leading role in countering terrorism and establishing peace as demonstrated by the Kingdom’s contribution towards the historic peace accord signed between Ethiopia and Eritrea in Riyadh in 2018.  Saudi Arabia continues to stand by its Yemeni brothers and support the Palestinian cause. It is Saudi Arabia’s dream of a peaceful, progressive and a prosperous world.

Perspective on India-Saudi Relations:  In the common pursuit for development and stability, Saudi Arabia sees India as an important partner.  Saudi-India ties trace its roots to the third millennium BC.  The Riyadh Declaration of 2010 had forged a Strategic Partnership between India and Saudi Arabia. Relations between the two countries are rooted in strong historical and civilisationalDLSC links. The mutually beneficial partnership encompasses active cooperation in a wide spectrum of spheres. Trade, science, arts, literature, languages — the links between India-Saudi Arabia has been civilisational.

 India holds a special place for Saudi Arabia. Nearly 3 million Indians form the largest expatriate community in the Kingdom. India has also seen its Haj quota of 1,36,020 increase consecutively during the last two years to a record 1,75,025.  India and Saudi Arabia have more opportunities today to tap into than ever before.  The bilateral trade for 2017-18, in excess of $27 billion, will accelerate as Saudi Arabia and India engage in a host of new areas such as information and communications technology (ICT), health care, defence, biotechnology, education and infrastructure among others.  India is one of the top countries on the Kingdom’s preferred list with great potential for investment in organic and food processing industries.

Expanding cooperation  The energy partnership between the two countries is also finding new grounds.  As of October 2018, Saudi Aramco has nearly $2 billion in material-service sourcing with Indian companies, and investing in India’s value chain from oil supply, marketing and refining to petrochemicals and lubricants is a key part of its global downstream strategy.  The $44 billion integrated refinery and petrochemicals complex at Ratnagiri in Maharashtra, being jointly developed by Saudi Aramco, Abu Dhabi National Oil Company (ADNOC) and a consortium of Indian public sector units (PSUs) consisting of Indian Oil Corporation Limited (IOCL), Bharat Petroleum Corporation Limited (BPCL) and Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited (HPCL), is yet another milestone.  Crown Prince Mohammed bin Salman met Prime Minister Narendra Modi in November 2018 on the sidelines of the G20 summit and both sides agreed to set up a high-level mechanism to boost concrete actions in terms of investment, technology and manufacturing across various sectors.

Summary:  In conclusion, as formidable economies of MENA and Asia, Saudi Arabia and India have a historic opportunity to collaborate in shaping the future of our regions, for a better tomorrow full of prosperity and promise.  Combining the respective strengths of Saudi Arabia and India will pave the way for endless possibilities and accomplishments for the benefit of our two peoples and the region.  The forthcoming state visit of the Crown Prince to India presents another historic opportunity to expand collaboration between our two friendly nations.

PRELIMS CARDINAL :

G20 Members:  The G20 is a global forum for central bank governors and governments that was established in 1999. The primary objective of the G20 is discussing numerous policies affecting the promotion of global financial stability.  G20 membershipDLSC is made up of a mixture of the biggest emerging and advanced economies on Earth that represents over 66% of the world’s population, 75% of the world trade, 85% of the planet’s GDP (gross domestic product).  The forum engages with numerous non-governmental sectors through their multiple

engagement groups like youth (Y20), labor (L20), civil society (C20) and business (B20). The outcome of these engagement groups contributes to the deliberations of the G20 leaders.

G20 Countries Argentina Australia

Brazil

Canada China France

Germany

India Indonesia Italy

Japan

Mexico Russia Saudi Arabia

South Africa

South Korea Turkey United Kingdom

United States

European Union Influential G20 Members European Union (EU) The G20 has 20 members which include 19 nations as well as the EU. The EU is usually represented by the European Central Bank and the European Commission. The EU is an economic and political union of twenty-eight member countries which are in Europe. The EU has over 510million residents and an area of about 1,728,099sq miles. Their policies promote free movement of capital, services, goods and people in their internal market. The EU has permanent diplomatic missions and represents itself at the G20, G7, World Trade Organization and the United Nations. Due to its influence, the EU has been described by many as an emerging superpower. United KingdomDLSC The United Kingdom is a developed state with the planet’s ninth-biggest economy by PPP (purchasing power parity). Its economy ranks fifth by GDP. The United Kingdom was the first industrialized state on earth and also the first superpower during the nineteenth

and twentieth centuries. United States The U.S. has the second biggest economy by PPP and largest by nominal GDP. It is the founding member of the IMF (International Monetary Fund) and the World Bank among other organizations. China China is a key regional power in Asia. China has one of the fastest-growing economies in the world with a growth rate of over 6% annually. It is the most populous nation on earth which occupies an area of over 3.7million sq miles. It has the biggest economy by PPP and the second by nominal GDP. Which Countries Have Featured As Guests In The G20 Events? The organization engages numerous non-member nations in their events to ensure that they reflect on global opinion. Some of the permanent invitees include Rwanda as the chair of the African Union, Papua New Guinea as the 2018’s host, Senegal, Spain and Singapore. Some of the nations which attended the 2017 G20 summit include Zimbabwe, Thailand, Switzerland, Myanmar, Mauritania, Laos, Guinea, Colombia, Brunei and Azerbaijan among others.

10. Sushma to address OIC meet

News: The External Affairs Minister of India has been invited for the first time to address the Organization of Islamic Cooperation (OIC) Foreign Ministers meet (46th session – Abu Dhabi).

Analysis: India has never been invited to the OIC before and the latest development, coming at a time when the India-Pakistan tension is running high, is being seen as a diplomatic success. The OIC has usually been supportive of Pakistan and, often sided with Islamabad on the Kashmir issue. OIC had denied India a seat when the grouping started.

Objectives:  The main motive of the organisation is to the safeguard and protect the interests of the Muslim world in the spirit of promoting international peace and harmony among various people of the world.  The Organization was established upon a decision of the historical summit which took place in Rabat, Kingdom of Morocco 25 September 1969 as a result of criminal arson of Al-Aqsa Mosque in occupied Jerusalem.

Governing Bodies of OIC i. The IslamicDLSC Summit, composed of Kings and Heads of State and Government of Member States, is the supreme authority of the Organization. It convenes once every three years to take policy decisions and provide guidance on all issues pertaining to the realization of the objectives and consider other issues of concern to the Member States and the Ummah.

90 ii. The Council of Foreign Ministers, which meets once a year, considers the means for the implementation of the general policy of the Organization by, inter alia:  Adopting decisions and resolutions on matters of common interest in the implementation of the objectives and the general policy of the Organization;  Reviewing progress of the implementation of the decisions and resolutions adopted at the previous Summits and Councils of Foreign Ministers; iii. The General Secretariat, which is the executive organ of the Organization, entrusted with the implementation of the decisions of the two preceding bodies.

India and Islamic World:  In the last few years, India has improved ties with the Islamic world from Saudi Arabia to Indonesia, while building on good relations with countries like Qatar and Oman.  While it was Bangladesh that floated the idea of India becoming an observer at the OIC in 2018, the UAE invite offered India an opportunity to address the forum.  The Crown Prince of Abu Dhabi, Sheikh Mohammed bin Zayed Al Nahyan (MBZ), was a very special Chief Guest at the 68th Republic Day celebrations in 2017, the first time that India laid out the Republic Day red carpet for a leader who was neither a Head of State nor Head of Government.  The Crown Prince MBZ had earlier visited India in February 2016, following a visit by Prime Minister Narendra Modi to the UAE in August 2015.  Recently, Crown Prince of Saudi Arabia, Mohammed bin Salman visited India.

Summary:  All these are indication of India’s improved ties with both Saudi and the UAE, and the Gulf region as a whole. The increased engagement is also rooted in the shared interest between India and the Arab conservatives in blunting the edge of religious extremism and terrorism.  Equally important has been the region’s growing economic and energy interdependence with India, which is emerging as the world’s third-largest economy and one of the biggest hydrocarbon importers and labour exporters.  The speech at the OIC inaugural plenary is also expected to take forward India’s case for action against the Jaish-e-Mohammad and strictures on Pakistan.

PRELIMS CARDINAL :

About Organisation of Islamic Cooperation (OIC):

 It is the second largest inter-governmental organization after the United Nations with a membership of 57 states spread over four continents. Has a membership of 57 states spread over 4 continents.  It is the collective voice of the Muslim world.  The OIC hasDLSC permanent delegations to the United Nations and the European Union.

 The first OIC Charter was adopted by the 3rd ICFM Session held in 1972. The Charter laid down the objectives and principles of the organization and fundamental purposes to strengthen the solidarity and cooperation among the Member States.

11. Beyond oil

News: This analysis is a deep dive into India’s strategic options in West Asia- dealing largely with three nations- i.e. Pakistan, Iran and Saudi Arabia, post Pulwama.

Context: India’s West Asian Outlook: A Perspective Post-Pulwama  It is important to note that over the past few years, the course of India’s relations with Israel, Saudi Arabia, and the United Arab Emirates (UAE) suggests that under Prime Minister Narendra Modi, India finally appears to be moving away from its traditional “balancing” approach to West Asia.  The present government at the Center has in practice, demonstrated a preference for working with the three regional powers rather than Iran, a trend likely to be reinforced after the visit of Saudi Crown Prince Mohammed bin Salman (MBS) and the proposed trip by Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu to New Delhi.

Regional realities: A Perspective:  Since the 1990-91 Gulf War, India has officially adopted a “balancing” approach to West Asia. It is viewed by some experts as a legacy of non-alignment.  Although this approach has allowed India to eschew involvement in regional disputes and de-hyphenate relations with regional rivals including Iran, Israel and Saudi Arabia, the policy has also constrained India’s ability to press its geopolitical interests in the region.  GeopoliticallyDLSC speaking, Mohammed Bin Salman (MBS - Crown Prince of Saudi Arabia) and Abu Dhabi’s Crown Prince Mohammed bin Zayed (MBZ) have over the past few years escalated their battle against political Islamist groups, including the Muslim Brotherhood.

 Most notably, this materialised in their support for Egyptian President Abdel Fattah el-Sisi’s takeover of power in Egypt from the Muslim Brotherhood in 2013, and in their dispute with Qatar, a key regional backer of the group.  Naturally, this brings them closer to Israel, which faces a growing threat from Islamist militant groups, including Hamas(Gaza strip), Hezbollah, and Iranian-backed forces in Syria.  Experts opine that the campaign by Saudi Arabia and the UAE to curtail the influence of political Islamist groups also draws them closer to India.  During his visit to New Delhi, the Saudi Crown Prince hinted at the attack by vowing to “cooperate in every way, including intelligence sharing”.  In recent months, it is important to note that the UAE has also ramped up its security cooperation with India, extraditing at least three suspects wanted in relation to the AgustaWestland case.

Defence and energy needs: A Perspective  India’s defence and security partnership with Israel has already proven useful to its security and military modernisation drive.  In 1998, Israel provided India with valuable intelligence on Pakistani positions during the Kargil war.  More recently, India and Israel have collaborated on a $777 million project to develop a maritime version of the Barak-8, a surface-to-air missile that India successfully tested in January, 2019.  India has also reportedly agreed to purchase 54 HAROP attack drones (anti-radiation drone) for the Indian Air Force and 2 airborne warning and control systems (AWACS) worth over $800 million from Israel.  It is important to note that due to its technological sophistication and warm relations, Israel has become one of India’s top suppliers of military technology.  Economically, the ability of Saudi Arabia and the UAE to mobilise investments despite low oil prices is a huge asset in their relations with India.  Investments have included a $44 billion oil refinery in India by Saudi Aramco and the Abu Dhabi National Oil Company in partnership with an Indian consortium.  During his visit to New Delhi, MBS said he foresaw up to $100 billion worth of Saudi investments in India over the next few years, including a plan by the Saudi Basic Industries Corp. to acquire two LNG plants.

1. Iran:  In contrast, Iran’s support for Islamist militancy, not least by transferring advanced missile technology to Islamist groups and militias in Lebanon and Syria, has led to an increase in tensions with Israel, which responded by conducting air strikes against Iranian targets on Syrian soil in January 2019.  Although the simultaneous attacks that claimed the lives of 27 members of Iran’s RevolutionaryDLSC Guard Corps and 40 members of India’s Central Reserve Police Force (CRPF) are likely to bring India and Iran closer together against Pakistan, it is doubtful that the occasion would generate much momentum in bilateral relations.

 From an economic perspective, U.S. sanctions have turned Iran into an unreliable economic partner.  Despite obtaining a six-month waiver from the U.S. in November, 2018 on energy imports from Iran, India is shoring up plans to find alternative sources as the waiver reaches its term.  Meanwhile, Indian investments in Iran, including the Shahid Beheshti complex at Chabahar and the Farzad B gas field, have languished for years, reflecting the severe constraints on doing business with Iran.  However, India’s tilt towards Israel, Saudi Arabia, and the UAE is not a risk-free move. Iran continues to exercise much influence in West Asia and can help shape events in Afghanistan by shoring up the Taliban against the U.S.  Moreover, Iran’s Chabahar port represents a strategic investment for India which hopes to use the facility to connect with the International North-South Transit Corridor (INSTC) that extends to Central Asia and to bypass Pakistan en route to Afghanistan.  Yet, as tensions rise in West Asia, Israel, Saudi Arabia and the UAE have coalesced more closely against Iran under the U.S.-sponsored Middle East Security Alliance (MESA).  Concurrently, recent escalations between Iran and Israel on the Syrian front suggests that tensions are unlikely to drop soon.  It is amid the competing demands from West Asian powers for India to take sides that India might find it difficult to maintain a “balancing” approach even if it wanted to.  For now, the Modi government seems to have taken its pick. Having practically abandoned a “balancing” approach, the Modi government has, in effect, placed its bets on Israel and the Gulf monarchies, relegating relations with Iran to the side.

2. Saudi Arabia:

Was the MBS visit a success?  As a standalone visit, the day-long trip of Crown Prince Mohammed Bin Salman Bin Abdulaziz Al-Saud (MBS) to New Delhi will be regarded as a diplomatic success, given the numerous outcomes.  After talks with Prime Minister Narendra Modi, the two sides announced measures to upgrade the defence partnership, create a “Strategic Partnership Council” to coordinate on security issues, and institute regular talks between the two national security advisers to discuss counter-terrorism, intelligence-sharing and maritime security.

Investments in India:  Saudi Arabia has also expressed its interest in investing in infrastructure projects worth about $26 billion.  This is beyond its already committed investments in India of $44 billion for the existing joint venture with the public sector oil undertakings and public fund investments of $10 billion.  The language on terrorism in the joint statement was something of a dampener for those who wouldDLSC have hoped there would be stronger condemnation of the terror attack in Pulwama.

 However, it was significant that the Saudi government agreed to insert an extra clause calling on states to renounce the “use of terrorism as an instrument of state policy”.  It also acknowledged that disputes between India and Pakistan must be resolved bilaterally.  At the leadership level, Mr. Modi extended more than a personal touch to the visit by going to the airport and embracing the Crown Prince on landing.  The prince repaid the compliment, agreeing to increase Haj quotas and release 850 Indians from Saudi jails after a plea from Mr. Modi.  These announcements and gestures would have been far more significant had it not been for the fact that MBS’s trip came on the heels of his visit to Pakistan just after the Pulwama attack.

The Pulwama attack: Casting a Shadow  MBS’s India visit is being measured against the statements made during his Pakistan visit, where he praised Islamabad for its fight against terrorism.  He also announced $20 billion worth of investments, in addition to previously announced aid of $6 billion in cash and reserves.  While such comparisons may be unwarranted, the visit to Delhi would have benefited in terms of optics if it hadn’t been preceded so closely by the one to Islamabad.  Some experts take the view that the Modi government also overplayed its expectations from the visit by billing it as part of a diplomatic offensive aimed at ‘isolating’ Pakistan in order to hold it to account for Pulwama.

Relations that have been carefully built:  It is important to note that India and Saudi Arabia have steadily built bilateral relations and taken great care over the past two decades to ‘de-hyphenate’ them from ties between Pakistan and Saudi Arabia.  India-Saudi Arabia ties were strengthened into a strategic partnership announced in 2010 in the Riyadh Declaration when Prime Minister Manmohan Singh paid a visit, and were bolstered by King Salman’s visit in February 2014 and Mr. Modi’s 2016 trip to Saudi Arabia.  Point-scoring with Pakistan, or attempting to compare the outcomes of the two visits, now only undermines the carefully built compact between New Delhi and Riyadh.

3. Pakistan: India withdrawing the Most Favoured Nation (MFN) status  Experts opine that India’s decision to withdraw the Most Favoured Nation (MFN) status to Pakistan means that India will not treat Pakistan on an equal footing in trade as is expected of fellow members of the World Trade Organisation.  The move comes after the attack on a Central Reserve Police Force convoy in Pulwama, Jammu and Kashmir.  It is important to note that this does not strictly fall under the ‘beggar-thy-policy’, often used in internationalDLSC trade through which one country tries to resolve its economic problems by means that worsen the economic problems of its neighbours or trade partners.  The moot point therefore is the sensitivity of the impact of the MFN status on Pakistan in terms of its trade with India.

 Experts opine that it can only be a pressure tactic and do little unless stringent actions are taken to stop informal trade that has been going on between the two countries for long.  Besides China, India and Pakistan are the two largest economies in the South Asian region. Being dominant constituents of the South Asian Association for Regional Cooperation, both countries, i.e. India and Pakistan have immense potential for intra- regional trade.

How does trade take place currently?  Trade now takes place using three channels: the official route; the illegal (informal) route, through smuggling along porous India-Pakistan land borders and also Afghanistan, which may not be accounted for in the national income; and lastly, through mainly Dubai and Singapore, which have free ports and accommodate legal agents of traders from India and Pakistan.  Informal trade generally takes place due to the following reasons: i. Restrictions on import of specific items on grounds of health and religious beliefs; ii. ‘high tariff barriers or transportation costs, making it cost effective to smuggle goods in the country; iii. imposition of non-tariff measures (NTMs)’; iv. weaknesses in the ‘rules of origin’ resulting in ‘trade routed through a third country; v. leakages in transit trade; and vi. distortions in domestic policies such as the absence of or relatively low indirect taxes, creating an incentive to transport items illegally to neighbouring countries.  It is also important to note that traders carry out informal trade between Pakistan and India through the exchange of goods at the border as well as through the personal baggage scheme’ through “green channel” facilities at international airports or railway stations.  ‘Informal trade has also taken place through Afghanistan where goods are exported officially from India and later smuggled into Pakistan.  Indian-made goods smuggled into Pakistan include cosmetics, liquor, stainless steel utensils, ayurvedic medicines, videotapes/CDs, confectionery/cashew nuts, tea, coffee, live animals and spices.

Trade data: A Look at Some Specifics  From 2011-12 to 2017-18, India’s formal trade with Pakistan increased from $1.94 billion to $2.41 billion.  Of this, the share of exports stands at almost 80% and has been fairly stable over the years (Ministry of Commerce and Industry, India).  In 2012-13, informal trade between India and Pakistan — estimated in a study (ICRIER, N. Taneja and S. Bimal, 2016) — was $4.71 billion, which was double when compared to formal trade.  Further, India’s informal export share to Pakistan was again much higher at $4 billion while its import share was low at $0.71 billion.  After the PulwamaDLSC attack, the follow-up measure to raise tariff duty on imports to 200% can again be trivial. So would be the NTMs, if increased, as India’s imports from Pakistan are reasonably low at $0.488 billion.

 Besides, imports from Pakistan grew at a lower rate (1.04%) compared to exports (1.32%) per annum from 2011-12 to 2017-18.  Major exports from India that would hard hit would be cotton (not carded or combed) valued at $0.273 billion, p-Xylene ($0.082 billion), polypropylene ($0.063 billion) and single yarn ($0.088 billion).  Pakistan’s loss from major exports to India would be much less — from dates ($0.113 billion), portland cement ($0.078 billion), other petroleum oil ($0.055 billion) and light oils and preparations ($0.028 billion).  Thus Pakistan is an important export destination for India but not vice-a-versa.This is despite the fact that Pakistan imposes a large number of NTMs (143) on Indian exports, the major ones being export related measures (25.2%); technical barriers to trade (24.5%); and sanitary and phytosanitary measures (22.4%).  These are concentrated on agriculture, plants, and food-related products and operate as bans that shut competitors out of its market.  Pakistan’s NTMs are blunt instruments; it is difficult to use them to provide targeted protection to the strategic industries.  In contrast, India’s NTMs are soft barriers which operate as delays or bureaucratic hurdles rather than bans.  Pakistan’s NTMs focus on general categories of goods whereas India’s NTMs are on particular industries and trading partners.  The widely used NTMs India uses include defence procurement procedure, preference to domestically manufactured electronic goods in government procurement’ and a ban on goods largely manufactured within the country.

Concluding Perspectives:  The sense is that Pakistan may not face an exacerbating situation with India withdrawing the MFN status and raising the import duty.  Informal trade may proliferate, which might not be in India’s interest and an appropriate strategy is required to bring it to a halt.  Also, under the South Asia Free Trade Area Agreement (SAFTA) 2004, Pakistan’s share in external trade is less than 10%, while India’s share is more than 70%.  Such steps may propel Pakistan to look for new markets beyond SAFTA, corroborated by the recent meeting held with Saudi Arabia and growing prospects of trade through a third country, mainly via Dubai.

4. The Saudi-Pakistan-Iran Triad

The Iran Perspective:  Iran is Saudi Arabia’s chief adversary in West Asia.  It is important to note that the Saudi-Iranian rivalry is being played out across the region, from Syria to Yemen.  Further, RiyadhDLSC perceives Pakistan as a major asset it can use to check the spread of Iranian influence despite the Nawaz Sharif government’s refusal to commit Pakistani troops in the Yemen war on behalf of the Saudi-led alliance.

The Saudi- Pakistan Dynamic:  Riyadh sees Pakistan Prime Minister Imran Khan and Pakistan Army chief General Qamar Javed Bajwa as more amenable to Saudi persuasion.  Pakistan on its part perceives MBS as a valuable interlocutor on its behalf with the U.S. because of his excellent rapport with U.S. President Donald Trump.  Islamabad deems this essential in light of the recent strains in U.S.-Pakistani relations over Pakistan’s support to terrorist groups targeting U.S. forces in Afghanistan that led to stern rebukes from Mr. Trump and suspension of American military aid to Pakistan.  Moreover, Pakistan’s relations with Iran, never easy, have hit a new low following the recent terrorist attack in the Sistan-Baluchistan Province that killed 27 Revolutionary Guards.  Supreme Leader Ayatollah Khamenei pointed the finger at “the spying agencies of some regional and trans-regional countries”, an obvious reference to Pakistan and the U.S.  The commander of the IRGC said, “The government of Pakistan must pay the price of harbouring these terrorist groups and this price will undoubtedly be very high.”

What makes Pakistan a natural ally of Saudi Arabia?  As Pakistan’s relations with Iran deteriorate, it is likely to move further into the Saudi orbit.  Increasing Sunni fundamentalism, bordering on Wahhabism, in Pakistan also makes it a natural ideological ally of Saudi Arabia and an ideological foe of Shia Iran.

Perspective on Aid bailout: Why Pakistan needs Saudi Arabia?  Saudi economic largesse matters greatly to Pakistan, which is in dire economic straits and has been forced to turn to the International Monetary Fund (IMF) for loans that are bound to come with strict conditionalities.  Over and above the $6 billion already promised by Saudi Arabia, MBS has promised a further $20 billion in Saudi investment in Pakistan.  A large part is earmarked for investment in the construction of an oil refinery in Gwadar on the Makran coast, which is being developed as a strategic port by China and features prominently in the China-Pakistan Economic Corridor (CPEC) plan.  Experts point out that in the context of this strategic and economic nexus between Saudi Arabia and Pakistan, it will be unwise for India to seriously believe that it will be able to wean Saudi Arabia away from Pakistan.  Instead, India should take advantage of any benefit that accrues from India’s economic relations with Saudi Arabia but should not pin much hope on Riyadh in the political-strategic sphere.

Summary:

India’s relations with Saudi Arabia: Going Beyond Oil Background: DLSC  India’s efforts to woo Saudi Arabia have been one of its more notable foreign policy successes of the last decade.

 Launched by Manmohan Singh, the current government has continued the policy of courting Riyadh.  At the same time, the Saudis have been one of Pakistan’s key supporters.  Pakistan relies on Saudi Arabia for everything from aid and investments to military back-up and possibly clandestine assistance to develop nuclear technology.  All the same, the desert kingdom of Saudi Arabia has woken up to the fact that India is one of the world’s largest economies and will soon be the world’s second-largest oil market.  From India’s side, the government has studiously ignored the furore over Saudi dissident Jamal Khashoggi’s assassination — Prime Minister Modi even held a one-to-one meeting with Saudi Crown Prince Mohammed bin Salman at the G-20 Summit when he was being cold-shouldered by many world leaders.

A Closer Perspective:  Visits from desert rulers are always highly choreographed but the prince’s India trip, part of his first major tour outside the Middle East since Khashoggi’s murder, had more tense moments than usual.  In the wake of the Pulwama suicide bombing, India was not happy that the Saudi-Pakistan joint statement called for not “politicising” UN terror listings at a time when India was trying to get Jaish chief Masood Azhar labelled as a ‘global terrorist.’  As expected, Prince Mohammed came bearing gifts, including a promise to collaborate on a $44-billion oil refinery, and said he expected total investment opportunities in India “to exceed $100 billion” in the coming two years.  He also said that the Saudis would free 800 Indians held in its jails.

India’s Diplomacy in West Asia:  India’s been performing an extraordinary diplomatic pirouette in West Asia, courting the Saudis, the Israelis and also the Iranians almost simultaneously.  India has had historically deep ties with Iran and External Affairs Minister Sushma Swaraj stopped over briefly in Teheran recently in the wake of the bombing in India and Iran’s Sistan and Baluchestan province.  Similarly, the Saudis need both India and Pakistan.  Prince Mohammed’s tour appears to be part of a Saudi “Look East” strategy because oil demand will rise in Asia in coming years.  Prince Mohammed went from India to China, cancelling at the last minute stopovers in Malaysia and Indonesia.  China is now Saudi Arabia’s biggest trading partner.  The Saudis are also talking to China about putting up a refinery in Gwadar, Pakistan, which is being developed as a key port by the Chinese.  It is important to note that India obtains 20 per cent of its oil from Saudi Arabia and three million Indians work there.  In conclusion, both India and Saudi Arabia will continue to find it useful to cultivate each other — butDLSC India will have to press the Saudis harder on committing to the war against terror.

PRELIMS CARDINAL : 4 Ancient Civilizations:

DLSC

100

SOCIETY / SOCIAL WELFARE

DLSC

101

1. Centre launches panic button on mobiles

News:  The government has launched the panic button feature on mobile phones for safety of women and other emergency services across 16 States and Mumbai.

Analysis:  The initiative was opened jointly by Home Minister Rajnath Singh and Women and Child Development Minister Maneka Gandhi nearly three years after the government first made the safety feature a mandatory requirement in phones through a gazette notification.

PRELIMS CARDINAL :

Also known as:  Emergency Response Support System Services provided:  Emergency service, such as police, medical and other services. Ministries involved:  Women and child development  Ministry of home affairs How it works?  user can dial 112 from any phone.  A smartphone user can also press the power button thrice in quick succession  A user of a basic or feature phone can long press 5 or 9 on the key pad.  One can also download the 112 mobile application which is available for free downloading  Once a user presses the panic button, five calls will be made to emergency number 112 as well as call log details and the geo location of the victim will be sent by SMSes and emails to police officials at the State, district and local level.  As a special feature, to ensure safety of women, a unique ‘SHOUT’ feature has been introduced in 112 India mobile App. This allows victims to seek immediate assistance from registered volunteers in the vicinity apart from contacting Emergency Response Centre. The SHOUT feature is exclusively available to women. Available in these states:  Andhra Pradesh, Uttarakhand, Punjab, Kerala, Madhya Pradesh, Rajasthan, UP, Telangana, Tamil Nadu, Gujarat, Puducherry, Lakshadweep, Andaman, Dadra & Nagar Haveli, Daman & Diu, Jammu & Kashmir as well as Mumbai.  The safety feature had earlier been launched in Nagaland and Himachal Pradesh. Supported under:DLSC  The Panic Button, which was conceived in 2015,at a cost of Rs 321.69 crore made available from the Nirbhaya Fund set up for safety of women.

102

Nirbhaya Fund  Nirbhaya Fund is an Indian rupee 10 billion corpus announced by Government of India in its 2013 Union Budget.  This fund is expected to support initiatives by the government and NGOs working towards protecting the dignity and ensuring safety of women in India.  Nirbhaya (fearless) was the pseudonym given to the 2012 Delhi gang rape victim to hide her actual identity.  The Ministry of Women and Child Development, along with several other concerned ministries, will work out details of the structure, scope and the application of this fund.

Women's safety laws 1. Guardians & Wards Act, 1890 2. Indian Penal Code, 1860 3. Christian Marriage Act, 1872 4. Indian Evidence Act, 1872 5. Married Women's Property Act, 1874 6. Workmen's compensation Act, 1923 7. Indian Successions Act, 1925 8. Immoral Traffic (prevention) Act, 1956 9. Dowry Prohibition Act, 1961 10. Commission of Sati(Prevention) Act, 1987 11. Cinematograph Act, 1952 12. Births, Deaths & Marriages Registration Act, 1886 13. Minimum Wages Act, 1948 14. Prevention of Children from Sexual Offences Act, 2012 15. Child Marriage Restraint Act, 1929 16. Muslim Personal Law (Shariat) Application,1937 17. Indecent Representation of Women(Prevention) Act,1986 18. Special Marriage Act, 1954 19. Hindu Marriage Act, 1955 20. Hindu Successions Act, 1956 21. Foreign Marriage Act, 1969 22. Family Courts Act, 1984 23. Maternity Benefit Act, 1861 24. Hindu Adoption & Maintenance ACT, 1956 25. Code of Criminal Procedure, 1973 26. Medical Termination of Pregnancy Act, 1971 27. National Commission for Women Act, 1990 28. The Pre-conceptionDLSC and Pre-natal Diagnostic Techniques (Prohibition of Sex Selection) Act, 1994 29. Protection of Women from Domestic Violence Act, 2005 30. Sexual Harassment of Women at Work Place (Prevention, Prohibition &

103

Redressal) Act, 2013 31. Indian Divorce Act, 1969 32. Equal Remuneration Act, 1976 33. Hindu Widows Remarriage Act, 1856 34. Muslim women (protection of rights on divorce) Act, 1986

2. Assam to cut pay of staff who neglects parents

News:  The Assam government formed a three-member commission for hearing cases under a pay-cut policy envisaged to make its employees take care of their dependent elderly parents and physically challenged siblings.  Reportedly, Assam will be the first state in the country to enforce such a law. Analysis:  A few employees do turn a blind eye to the sufferings of their parents. The PRANAM Act (Parents Responsibility and Norms for Accountability and Monitoring) was thus a welcome piece of law requiring a neglected parent to lodge a complaint in order to receive sustenance money from the pay of his or her ward.  Geriatric care was linked to the State government employees’ pay from the 2018-2019 fiscal.  The policy, enforced on October 2 last year.  The policy acts as a deterrent for employees who have been ignoring their parents and physically challenged siblings.  Such a law would ensure parents are cared for.

PRANAM Bill  PRANAM Bill The bill makes it mandatory for state government employees to look after their parents and unmarried differently abled siblings who do not have their own sources of income.  The government has said that it aims to cover the Employees of private companies and the central government working in the state at a later stage.

PRANAM Commission  The three-member PRANAM Commission is headed by Chief Commissioner,Former MLA, and social worker are the two Commissioners.  The Commission’s job would be to weigh each complaint, hear both parties and decide whether or not an employee deserves to be penalised.  an employee would be liable to part with 10-15% of his or her pay if found guilty of ignoring their dependentDLSC parents and physically challenged siblings.  The deducted money would then be transferred to the bank account of a parent or sibling.

104

Article 41 in The Constitution Of India  Right to work, to education and to public assistance in certain cases The State shall, within the limits of its economic capacity and development, make effective provision for securing the right to work, to education and to public assistance in cases of unemployment, old age, sickness and disablement, and in other cases of undeserved want

Article 266 (1)  Consolidated Fund of India Under Article 266 (1) of the Constitution of India, all revenues ( example tax revenue from personal income tax, corporate income tax, customs and excise duties as well as non-tax revenue such as licence fees, dividends and profits from public sector undertakings etc. ) received by the Union government as well as all loans raised by issue of treasury bills, internal and external loans and all moneys received by the Union Government in repayment of loans shall form a consolidated fund entitled the 'Consolidated Fund of India' for the Union Government.  Consolidated Fund of State Similarly, under Article 266 (1) of the Constitution of India, a Consolidated Fund Of State ( a separate fund for each state) has been established where all revenues ( both tax revenues such as Sales tax/VAT, stamp duty etc., and non-tax revenues such as user charges levied by State governments ) received by the State government as well as all loans raised by issue of treasury bills, internal and external loans and all moneys received by the State Government in repayment of loans shall form part of the fund.  The Comptroller and Auditor General of India audits these Funds and reports to the Union/State legislatures when proper accounting procedures have not been followed.

The Comptroller and Auditor General (CAG) Article 148 –151.  The Comptroller and Auditor General (CAG) of India is an authority, established by Article 148 of the Constitution of India, which audits all receipts and expenditure of the Government of India and the state governments, including those of bodies and authorities substantially financed by the government.  The CAG is also the external auditor of Government-owned corporations and conducts supplementary audit of government companies, i.e., any non-banking/ non-insurance company in which Union Government has an equity share of at least 51 per cent or subsidiary companies of existing government companies.  The reports of the CAG are taken into consideration by the Public Accounts Committees (PACs) and Committees on Public Undertakings (COPUs), which are special committees in the Parliament of India and the state legislatures.  The CAG is also the head of the Indian Audit and Accounts Department, the affairs of which are managed by officers of Indian Audit and Accounts Service, and has over 58,000 employees across the country.  The CAG is ranked 9th and enjoys the same status as a judge of Supreme Court of India in Indian orderDLSC of precedence.  appointed by the President of India following a recommendation by the Prime Minister.  On appointment, he/she has to make an oath or affirmation before the President of India.

105

Duties of the CAG

 As per the provisions of the constitution, the CAG's (DPC) (Duties, Powers and Conditions of Service) Act, 1971 was enacted. As per the various provisions, the duties of the CAG include the audit of:  Receipts and expenditure from the Consolidated Fund of India and of the State and Union Territory having legislative assembly.  Trading, manufacturing, profit and loss accounts and balance sheets, and other subsidiary accounts kept in any Government department; Accounts of stores and stock kept in Government offices or departments.  Government companies as per the provisions of the Companies Act, 2013.  Corporations established by or under laws made by Parliament in accordance with the provisions of the respective legislation.  Authorities and bodies substantially financed from the Consolidated Funds of the Union and State Governments. Anybody or authority even though not substantially financed from the Consolidated Fund, the audit of which may be entrusted to the C&AG.  Grants and loans given by Government to bodies and authorities for specific purposes.  Entrusted audits e.g. those of Panchayati Raj Institutions and Urban Local Bodies under Technical Guidance & Support (TGS).

Compensation  The salary and other conditions of service of the CAG are determined by the Parliament of India through "The Comptroller and Auditor-General's (Duties, Powers and Conditions of Service) Act, 1971". His salary is same as that of judge of the Supreme court of India. Neither his salary nor rights in respect of leave of absence, pension or age of retirement can be varied to his disadvantage after his appointment. The CAG is not eligible for further office either under the Government of India or under the Government of any State after he has ceased to hold his office. These provisions are in order to ensure the independence of CAG.

Removal  The CAG can be removed only on an address from both houses of parliament on the ground of proved misbehaviour or incapacity. The CAG vacates the office on attaining the age of 65 years even without completing the 6 years term by impeachment also.

Pay Commission  Pay Commission is set up by Government of India, and gives its recommendations regarding changes in salary structure of its employees.  Since India's Independence, seven pay commissions have been set up on a regular basis to review and make recommendations on the work and pay structure of all civil and military divisionsDLSC of the Government of India.  Headquartered in Delhi, the Commission is given 18 months from date of its constitution to make its recommendations

106

3. Niyamgiri’s Dongria Kondh gird for ‘resistance’ after SC order

News:  Odisha’s Dongria Kondh tribals have resolved to resist any attempt to force them out with a recent Supreme Court order triggering panic among forest dwellers over possible eviction.

Analysis:  The applications for regularization of residence under the Forest Rights Act (FRA), 2006 has been rejected.  The Dongria Kondh are currently holding their annual ‘Niyamraja festival’ on the picturesque hilltop of Niyamgiri.  Thus the issue of possible eviction of tribals, came up for discussion at the Niyamraja festival of the Dongria Kondh tribe.  Due to their successful resistance against the Vedanta Group’s plan to mine bauxite in the ecologically and mineral-rich Niyamgiri hill range the tribe came into the limelight.

PRELIMS CARDINAL :

Dongria Kondh  The Dongria Kondh people are a tribe residing in the Niyamgiri Hills of Odisha. They are forest dwellers and sustain themselves from the resources of the Niyamgiri forests, practicing horticulture and shifting cultivation.  They derive their name from dongar, meaning ‘hill’ and the name for themselves is Jharnia: protector of streams.  The Dongria live in villages scattered throughout the hills. They believe that their right to cultivate Niyamgiri’s slopes has been conferred on them by Niyam Raja, and that they are his royal descendants.  The Dongria have distinctive jewellery, tattoos and hairstyles. Women wear many rings through their ears and three through their noses, while boys wear two nose rings. Dongria girls wear clips in their hair and rings and beads around their necks.  It is a particularly vulnerable tribal group.

Niyamgiri  The Niyamgiri is a hill range situated in the districts of Kalahandi and Rayagada in the south-west of Odisha, India.  These hills are home to Dongria Kondh indigenous people.  The hills have one of India's most pristine forests in the interior. It is bound by Karlapat Wildlife Sanctuary on the north-west side and Kotgarh Wildlife Sanctuary on the northeast end.  The Environment and Forest ministry of Government of India scrapped a forest clearance given to aDLSC mining firm, Vedanta Resources, to mine bauxite in the area and the mining project was scrapped.  In 2013, the Supreme Court of India asked the tribal people to take the decision, in which BMP was rejected in all village council meetings.

107

Particularly vulnerable tribal group  Particularly vulnerable tribal group (PVTG) (earlier: Primitive tribal group) is a government of India classification created with the purpose of enabling improvement in the conditions of certain communities with particularly low development indices.  The Dhebar Commission (1960-1961) stated that within Scheduled Tribes there existed an inequality in the rate of development.  During the fourth Five Year Plan a sub-category was created within Scheduled Tribes to identify groups that considered to be at a lower level of development.  This was created based on the Dhebar Commission report and other studies. This sub- category was named "Primitive tribal group".  The features of such a group include . a pre-agricultural system of existence, . that is practice of hunting and gathering, . zero or negative population growth, . extremely low level of literacy in comparison with other tribal groups.  Groups that satisfied any one of the criterion were considered as PTG. At the conclusion of the Fifth Five year plan, 52 communities were identified as being a "primitive tribal group",  these communities were identified on the basis of recommendations made by the respective state governments.  At the conclusion of the Sixth Five year plan 20 groups were added and 2 more in the Seventh Five year plan, one more group was added in the eighth five-year plan, making a total 75 groups were identified as PTG.  The 75th group recognised as PTG were the Maram in Manipur in 1993-94. No new group was declared as PTG on the basis of the 2001 census.  In 2006 the government of India proposed to rename "Primitive tribal group" as Particularly vulnerable tribal group".  PTG has since been renamed Particularly vulnerable tribal group by the government of India.

The National Commission for Scheduled Tribes (NCST)  The National Commission for Scheduled Tribes (NCST) was established by amending Article 338 and inserting a new Article 338A in the Constitution through the Constitution (89th Amendment) Act, 2003.  By this amendment, the erstwhile National Commission for Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes was replaced by two separate Commissions namely- . the National Commission for Scheduled Castes (NCSC), and . the National Commission for Scheduled Tribes (NCST)  w.e.f. 19 February, 2004.  The term DLSC of office of Chairperson, Vice-Chairperson and each member is three years from the date of assumption of charge. The Chairperson has been given the rank of Union Cabinet Minister, and the Vice-Chairperson that of a Minister of State and other Members have the ranks of a Secretary to the Government of India.

108

Background  Certain Communities suffering from Extreme Social & Economic Backwardness- like Untouchability Primitive Agri-Practices, Lack of Infrastructural facilities, Geographical Isolation- needed special consideration for safeguarding their interests;  These communities were notified as Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes as per provisions of Art. 341(1) and 342(1) of the Constitution respectively;  Under the original provisions of Art.338 of the Constitution, Special Officer (Commissioner) for SC&ST appointed was assigned the duty to investigate all matters relating to the Safeguards for SCs and STs in various Statutes and to report to the President upon the working of these Safeguards;  To facilitate working of the Commissioner for (SCs&STs),17 Regional Offices were set up in different parts of the Country;  In 1978 the Govt. (through a Resolution) decided to set up a Multi-Member Commission (Non-Statutory) for SCs and STs with Sh. Bhola Paswan Shastri as Chairperson and having 4 Members (with 3 year tenure ); Office of Commissioner for SCs & STs also Continued to exist;  The 17 Regional Offices earlier transferred to DG (Backward Classes Welfare), were brought back under the control of the new Multi Member Commission;  In 1987, the Govt. (through another Resolution) modified functions of the Commission (making it as a National Level Advisory Body) to advise the Govt. on Broad Policy Issues and levels of Development of SCs and STs;  The statutory National Commission for SCs & STs came into being on 12-3-92 (after the Constitutional (65th )Amendment); Act 1990. Notified on 8-6-1990),

Article 19(5) the state to make laws “for the protection of the interests of any Scheduled Tribe”,

Pesa act  The Provisions of the Panchayats (Extension to Scheduled Areas) Act, 1996 or PESA is a law enacted by the Government of India for ensuring self governance through traditional Gram Sabhas for people living in the Scheduled Areas of India.  Scheduled Areas are areas identified by the Fifth Schedule of the Constitution of India. Scheduled Areas are found in ten states of India which have predominant population of tribal communities.  The Scheduled Areas, were not covered by the 73rd Constitutional Amendment or Panchayati Raj Act of the Indian Constitution as provided in the Part IX of the Constitution.  PESA was enacted on 24 December 1996 to extend the provisions of Part IX of the Constitution to Scheduled Areas, with certain exceptions and modifications.  PESA soughtDLSC to enable the Panchayats at appropriate levels and Gram Sabhas to implement a system of self-governance with respect to a number of issues such as customary resources, minor forest produce, minor minerals, minor water bodies, selection of beneficiaries, sanction of projects, and control over local institutions.

109

 PESA is an Act to provide for the extension of the provisions of Part IX of the Constitution relating to the Panchayats and the Scheduled Areas.  PESA was viewed as a positive development for tribal communities in Scheduled Areas who had earlier suffered tremendously from engagement with modern development processes and from the operation of both colonial laws and statutes made in independent India.  The loss of access to forest, land, and other community resources had increased their vulnerability.  Rampant land acquisition and displacement due to development projects had led to large scale distress in tribal communities living in Scheduled Areas.  PESA was seen as a panacea for many of these vulnerabilities and sought to introduce a new paradigm of development where the tribal communities in such Scheduled Areas were to decide by themselves the pace and priorities of their development.

Article 244 and 5th Schedule  The Constitution of India makes special provisions for the administration of the tribal dominated areas in four states viz. Assam, Meghalaya, Tripura and Mizoram. As per article 244 and 6th Schedule, these areas are called “Tribal Areas”, which are technically different from the Scheduled Areas under fifth schedule  244 : Administration of Scheduled Areas and Tribal Areas.- (1) The provisions of the Fifth Schedule shall apply to the administration and control of the Scheduled Areas and Scheduled Tribes in any State other than [the States of Assam, Meghalaya, Tripura and Mizoram. (2) The provisions of the Sixth Schedule shall apply to the administration of the tribal areas in the States of Assam, Meghalaya, Tripura and Mizoram.

Xaxa Committee  The Government has set up a high level Committee to look into the current socio- economic, health and educational status of tribals in the country.  The Committee was set up by the PMO on 14th Aug, 2013. The objective of Committee was to prepare a position paper on the present socio-economic, health and educational status of Scheduled Tribes and suggest a way forward. The Committee’s objective was also to suggest policy initiative as well as effective outcome-oriented measures to improve development indicators and strengthen public service delivery to STs and other tribal population.  According to the committee, 60% of the forest area in the country is in tribal areas — protected by Article 19(5) and Schedules V and VI of the Constitution

Samata judgment 1997  In 1987, Samata, a non-governmental organisation closely associated with 10 community- based institutionsDLSC in 300 villages of Srikakulam, Visakhapatnam and East Godavari districts, began to work for the rights of the tribal people as it found them being alienated from their lands and exploited by non-tribal people and the state, in contravention of the

110

Fifth Schedule of the Constitution and various Central and State government laws.  After a protracted struggle – in the form of dharnas, rallies, picketings and meetings – and several rounds of petitions to various Central and State departments, Samata decided to approach the courts.  It first filed a case in the local courts and later in the Andhra Pradesh High Court in 1993 against the State government’s move to lease tribal land to mining companies. When the High Court dismissed the case, Samata filed a Special Leave Petition in the Supreme Court. After a four-year legal battle, it won a historic judgment, which declared null and void the transfer of land in the Scheduled Areas for private mining and upheld the Forest Protection Act of 1980, which prohibits mining in reserved areas.  The main issue in the Samata case was whether or not the word `person’ in Section (3)(a) of the Mines and Minerals (Regulation and Development) Act included the government.  The Supreme Court held that indeed it did, and that the state should adhere to the laws and principles governing the tribal areas, as any other person.

4. Caught between two extremisms

News:

 Wahhabi influence and Hindu nationalism are responsible for the radicalisation of a small segment of Muslim youth.  News reports about occasional acts of terrorism outside of Jammu and Kashmir, which for historical reasons forms a special case, attributed to young Indian Muslims have appeared intermittently in the press.  In addition, several recent reports suggest that global jihadi organisations such as the Islamic State and Al-Qaeda in the Indian Subcontinent (AQIS) have recruited a few Indian Muslim youth primarily by exploiting the latter’s local grievances to serve their own global goals.

Background:  Wahhabism is an Islamic doctrine and religious movement often described as ultraconservative, fundamentalist.  The majority of Sunni and Shia Muslims worldwide disagree with the interpretation of Wahhabism, and many Muslims denounce them as a faction or a “vile sect”  Wahhabism has been accused of being “a source of global terrorism” for causing disunity in Muslim communities by labelling Muslims who disagreed with the Wahhabi definition of monotheism as nonconformists and justifying their killing.  It has also been criticized for the destruction of historic shrines of saints, mausoleums, and other Muslim and non-Muslim buildings and artifacts. DLSC Details:  Many analysts, Indian and foreign, had assumed until recently that Indian Muslims were immune to extremist propaganda (conventional wisdom) because of

111

1. Syncretic (blending of two or more religious belief systems into a new system, or the incorporation into a religious tradition of beliefs from unrelated traditions) nature of Indian Islam, 2. Moderate nature of Indian Islam and 3. Democratic and secular character of the country which made them feel they were equal participants in the political process.

 Both these assumptions are now problematic, as several factors have been at work in the past three decades that challenge this conventional wisdom.

Wahhabi influence:  The first is the increasing influence of Saudi Wahhabism and related forms of Salafism on Islam as practised in the Indian subcontinent.

 This is the result of several inter-related variables but the most important of these is the vast increase in employment opportunities in the energy-rich West Asian countries following the oil boom of the 1970s.  This resulted in many Indians of all faiths temporarily locating to these countries in search of higher earnings.  While a much larger number of Indians belonging to other religions moved to West Asia in search of lucrative jobs, both white and blue-collar, the religio-cultural impact of the encounter with the fundamentalist form of Islam followed in these countries, especially Saudi Arabia, on a section of Indian Muslim emigrants was qualitatively different.  Several of these temporary migrants returned to India filled with love for the deceptive ethos of these oil-rich countries.

 This fascination was publicly exhibited above all in the adoption by a section of Muslim women, often under patriarchal pressure, of an ultraconservative dress code, including the niqab, or full face covering, popular in Saudi Arabia and some other West Asian countries- This dress code is very different from the traditional concept of purdah practised by conservative Muslim families in the Indian subcontinent.  The impact of Wahhabi Islam on the mindset of a segment of returnees, who also passed on their preferences to a much larger group of relatives and acquaintances already impressed by the former’s newly acquired prosperity, was more profound.  Islamic beliefsDLSC and practices among some Indian Muslims began to approximate the harsh Wahhabi dogma, which stands in stark contrast to the indigenous version of Islam in India.

112

Protected by Sufism:  The vast majority of Muslims in the Indian subcontinent belong to the Hanafi sect based on the most liberal school of Islamic jurisprudence.  Moreover, traditionally Indian Islam has been greatly influenced by Sufi teachings and is, therefore, tolerant and accepting of religious diversity.  Visitors to major Sufi shrines, such as those of Khwaja Moinuddin Chishti in Ajmer and Nizamuddin Aulia in Delhi, where people of all confessions come to pray and seek blessings, is a testimony to the syncretic spirit of Indian Islam.  Consequently, it fosters natural defences against extremism in belief and practice.  The ideological infiltration of Wahhabism/Salafism has eroded some of these defences and made a section of Muslims more insular and, therefore, open to extremist ideas.

Rise of Hindutva:  Equally important, the spectacular rise of Hindutva or Hindu nationalism from the 1990s has had a major psychological impact on a section of Muslim youth, prompting their alienation from the national mainstream.  Inter-religious riots in which Muslims suffered disproportionately had been common in India since Independence. In some cases the police killed Muslim youth in fake encounters.  The Hashimpura massacre in Uttar Pradesh by members of the Provincial Armed Constabulary in 1987 was the most macabre example of such incidents.  However, until the 1990s the vast majority of Indian Muslims treated such occurrences as aberrations and their belief in the secular and non-discriminatory character of the Indian state remained unshaken.  The demolition of the Babri mosque in 1992 by a Hindu mob under the direction of Bharatiya Janata Party (BJP) luminaries and the riots that ensued shook the confidence of many Muslims in the secular character of the Indian state. What was most galling was the Central government’s lack of interest in the face of this shameless act of mob violence despite the fact that it had been forewarned. This event began the process of alienation among a section of Muslim youth from the Indian state.  This feeling grew exponentially a decade later in 2002 with the massacre of about 1,000 Muslims in Gujarat under BJP rule to avenge the death of 59 kar sevaks who were burnt to death inDLSC a train at Godhra after an altercation with local Muslims. What added insult to injury was the inaction, or, as the Human Rights Watch report on the bloodbath put it, the refusal of the state machinery to protect Muslim citizens.

113

 More recently, the disaffection has been reinforced by the lynching of several Muslims in northern and central India on the pretext that they were taking cows for slaughter or eating beef.  It was followed by additional acts of mob violence carried out with relative impunity by the so-called gau rakshak (cow protector) vigilantes.  Such incidents have led to a widespread feeling among Indian Muslims that the state, instead of providing security to them, now plots with those determined to intimidate them into submission. This series of actions and reactions makes it evident that the growth of Hindu nationalism has acted as a major stimulus for the radicalisation of a section of Muslim society in India and that the two phenomena feed off each other.

Suggestions:

 Opinion leaders and religious scholars from within the Muslim community have the primary duty to confront and defeat the malign Wahhabi-Salafi influence on Indian Muslims in order to preserve the liberal and syncretic nature of Indian Islam thus preventing the spread of extremist ideology among Muslim youth.  The impact of the growth of Hindu nationalism on the Muslim psyche can be countered only by the policies and actions of the governing elites at the Centre and in the States.

 Concrete steps, such as quick and impartial action against those responsible for creating mayhem in the name of religion have to be taken, to reassure Muslims that the state will not shirk its responsibility of providing them physical security and ensuring that they are treated with fairness and dignity.

DLSC

114

HEALTH & EDUCATION

DLSC

115

1. Medical journals publisher under fire

News:  The Indian Journal of Clinical Practice (IJCP) Group, a doctor-run publisher of medical journals, has come under strong criticism from public health experts for partnering with American e-cigarette maker Juul Labs Inc. Juul, which is evaluating an entry into India, has retained the Group to “better understand the India market,”.  Public health experts say it is unethical for journal editors to have financial ties with an e- cigarette maker, especially since the U.S.-based tobacco firm Altria Group is an investor in Juul.

Analysis:  E-cigarettes, which dispense nicotine by heating a liquid, are a controversial subject. Even though their aerosols are thought to contain fewer carcinogens than cigarette smoke, experts are divided about their safety.  Despite studies such as the one by NEJM (The New England Journal of Medicine), the benefits of e-cigarettes are far from clear. Their addictive-potential is not understood, and some studies show that they can act as a gateway drug for adolescents.  “Until independent large scale cohort studies among smokers and mixed tobacco users of varying intensity prove harm reduction benefits of ENDS (Electronic Nicotine Delivery Systems), the introduction of any new technology is a big risk to public health”  Another factor muddying the evidence around e-cigarettes is that the tobacco industry funds several harm-reduction initiatives, leading to worries that it may be distorting data.  For this reason, the World Health Organisation said in a statement in September 2018 that any industry-funded research “cannot be taken at face value.”

PRELIMS CARDINAL: Electronic Nicotine Delivery Systems (ENDS) (also known as e-cigarettes)E- cigarettes  An electronic cigarette (or e-cig) is a battery-powered vaporizer that mimics tobacco smoking.  It works by heating up a nicotine liquid, called “juice.”  Nicotine juice (or e-juice) comes in various flavors and nicotine levels.  e-liquid is composed of ingredients such as : vegetable glycerin (a material used in all types of food and personal care products, like toothpaste) and propylene glycol (a solvent most commonly used in fog machines.) propylene glycol is the ingredient that produces thicker clouds of vapor.

WHO report on E-Cigarettes  As per the report, ENDS emits nicotine, the addictive component of tobacco products. In addition to dependence, nicotine can have adverse effects on the development of the foetus duringDLSC pregnancy and may contribute to cardiovascular disease.  Although nicotine itself is not a carcinogen, it may function as a “tumour promoter” and seems to be involved in the biology of malignant disease, as well as of neuro degeneration.

116

 Foetal and adolescent nicotine exposure may have long-term consequences for brain development, potentially leading to learning and anxiety disorders.  The evidence is sufficient to warn children and adolescents, pregnant women, and women of reproductive age against ENDS use and nicotine.  As per the World Health Organization Report on the Global Tobacco Epidemic 2017, the Governments of thirty (30) countries including Mauritius, Australia, Singapore, Korea (Democratic People's Republic, Sri Lanka, Thailand, Brazil, Mexico, Uruguay, Bahrain, Iran, Saudi Arabia, United Arab Emirates etc, have already banned Electronic Nicotine Delivery System (ENDS) in their countries.

GOI’s stand  India’s Union Ministry of Health and Family Welfare favours a ban, and has advised all States to clamp down on the sales and manufacture of these products. However, some experts say e-cigarettes can be a part of “harm reduction” policies, because they are a comparatively safe alternative to combustible cigarettes.  Nicotine is prohibited for use as an ingredient in any food item under the Food Safety and Standards (Prohibition and Restrictions on sales) Regulation,2011 of the FOOD SAFETY AND STANDARDS ACT 2006  Both Nicotine and Nicotine Sulphate are listed as hazardous chemicals in the Manufacture, Storage and Import of Hazardous Chemical Rules, 1989 made under the Environment (Protection) Act, 1986;  Nicotine is also Iisted as an insecticide in the Schedule of lnsecticides under the Insecticide Act 1968, and subsequently its use as a pesticide is also highly restricted by Government of lndia  There are possibilities that children, adolescents & youth (and generally nonsmokers) will initiate nicotine use through ENDS at a rate greater than expected if ENDS did not exist; and that, once addicted to nicotine through ENDS, such children, adolescents & youth are Iikely to switch to ciSarette smoking; And whereas, the scientific evidence regarding the effectiveness of ENDS as a smoking cessation aid is scant and of low certainty, making it difficult to draw credible inferences.  The Drugs and Cosmetics Act, 1940 & Rules, 1945 permit the use of Nicotine up to 2 mg and 4 mg in gums, Iozenges and strips, which may be used as aids for Nicotine Replacement Therapy (NRT). However, such a product should adhere to the provisions of Chapter IV of the Drugs and Cosmetics Act & Rules made thereunder, which require them to be manufactured under a valid drug manufacturing license and also a valid sales license for products containing more than 2mg of nicotine. ENDS are not yet approved as NRTs under the Drugs and Cosmetics Act  The Ministry of Health & Family Welfare, Government of India conducted a Roundtable discussion on Electronic Nicotine Delivery Systems (ENDS) in 2014, wherein eminent doctors, specialists, scientists and officers of Health and Drug departments concluded that available scientific evidences indicate that the ENDS and similar technologiesDLSC that encourage tobacco use, are hazardous for an active as well as passive users and have an adverse impact on public health  The State Governments of Punjab, Karnataka, Mizoram, Kerala, Jammu & Kashmir; Uttar Pradesh; Bihar have prohibited the manufacture, distribution, import and sale of Electronic Nicotine Delivery Systems IENDS).

117

Drugs and Cosmetics Act, 1940  Act of the Parliament of India which regulates the import, manufacture and distribution of drugs in India.  The primary objective of the act is to ensure that the drugs and cosmetics sold in India are safe, effective and conform to state quality standards.  The related Drugs and Cosmetics Rules, 1945 contains provisions for classification of drugs under given schedules and there are guidelines for the storage, sale, display and prescription of each schedule.  This act was originally known as the Drug Act and was passed in 1940. The original act was prepared in accordance to the recommendations of the Chopra Committee formed in 1930. The related Drugs Rules was passed in 1945. Since 1940, the act has undergone several amendments and is now known as the Drugs and Cosmetics Act, 1940.  The term "drug" as defined in the act includes a wide variety of substance, diagnostic and medical devices.  In 1964, the act was amended to include Ayurveda and Unani drugs.  The Section 16 of the act defines the standards of quality for drugs.  The Section 17 defines "misbranding". A drug is considered misbranded if it claims to be of more therapeutic value than it actually is.  The manufacturer of such a drug may be asked to suspend manufacture of the drug under Section 18.  Section 27 deals with fake and adulterated drugs.  The act requires that ingredients of the drugs should be printed on the label.  The Section 22 defines the powers of the drug inspectors.  Section 23 defines the strict procedure which should be followed by the inspectors during any raids.

Controversy  The Act lacks specific penalties for violating provisions relating to clinical trials. As a result, no penalties could be imposed on the Bill and Melinda Gates Foundation-funded Programme for Appropriate Technology in Health (PATH) for violating norms in conducting the HPV vaccination trials on tribal girls in Andhra Pradesh and Gujarat. On 17 April 2015, the government told the Supreme Court of India that due to lack of specific penalties, the government could only halt the trials and issued warnings. The trial had been found to be unethical by a Parliamentary committee in 2013. Amendments 1. The Drugs (Amendment) Act, 1955 (11 of 1955). 2. The Drugs (Amendment) Act, 1960 (35 of 1960). 3. The Drugs (Amendment) Act, 1962 (21 of 1962) . 4. The Drugs and Cosmetics (Amendment) Act, 1964 (13 0f 1964). 5. The DrugsDLSC and Cosmetics (Amendment) Act, 1972 ( 19 of 1972). 6. The Drugs and Cosmetics (Amendment) Act, 1982 (68 of 1982). 7. The Drugs and Cosmetics (Amendment) Act, 1986 8. The Drugs and Cosmetics (Amendment) Act, 1995 (71 of 1995)

118

Summary:  Now therefore, it is evident that Electronic Nicotine Delivery Systems (ENDS) including eCigarettes, Heat-Not-Burn devices, Vape, e-Sheesha, e-Nicotine Flavoured Hookah, and the like devices or products available by whatsoever name, that enable nicotine delivery or its use, are a great health risk to public at large, especially to children, adolescents, pregnant women and women of reproductive age.  It is also evident that ENDS are not approved as NRTs under the Drugs and Cosmetics Act and Rules made thereunder. As such, the States/Union Territories are advised, in larger public health interest and in order to prevent the initiation of ENDS by non-smokers and youth with special attention to vulnerable groups, to ensure that any Electronic Nicotine Delivery Systems (ENDS) including e-Cigarettes, Heat-Not-Burn devices, Vape, e- Sheesha, e-Nicotine Flavoured Hookah, and the like devices that enable nicotine delivery are not sold (including online sale), manufactured, distributed, traded, imported and advertised in their jurisdictions, except for the purpose & in the manner and to the extent, as may be approved under the Drugs and Cosmetics Act, 1940 and Rules made thereunder. This issues with the approval of Competent Authority.

2. NGOs call for funds to eliminate TB

News:  Non-governmental organisations (NGO) working to eliminate tuberculosis have urged the government to ensure that the National Strategic Plan for 2017-2025 is fully funded and effectively implemented to eliminate tuberculosis.  NGOs and other stakeholders including TB survivors, have urged the Global Fund to Fight AIDS, TB and Malaria, and donor countries to invest substantially in communities and have further committed to support the government to  create person-centred, rights-based and gender-sensitive response to TB,  facilitate last-mile support to TB patients through partnerships with service providers and  provide real-time data on TB cases for an early  contributingDLSC to effective planning and implementation of the National Tuberculosis Control Programme (NTCB), drawing on their lived experiences of TB.  The signatories to these appeals are Touched by TB, TB Mukt Vahini-Bihar and REACH (Resource Group for Education and Advocacy on Community Health). These organisations

119

are supported by the Stop TB Partnership, Geneva; Global Coalition of TB Activists; Rainbow TB Forum, Tamil Nadu; and Journalists against TB, Bengaluru.

PRELIMS CARDINAL : Tuberculosis  Tuberculosis is an infectious, airborne disease caused by the bacterium Mycobacterium tuberculosis. It mainly affects the lungs. It can be transmitted from person to person through the air when people with TB cough, sneeze, laugh or speak, spit, propelling the germs into the atmosphere  With proper diagnosis and treatment, TB can be cured. However, too many people with TB don’t seek care for early symptoms and get properly diagnosed. Of those in whom the disease is detected, many do not complete their treatment.  The disease also has been reported to be main cause of deaths related to antimicrobial resistance and the leading killer of people with HIV.  The biggest challenge was underreporting and underdiagnosis of TB cases, especially in countries with weak health systems and large unregulated private sectors.

Global Fund to Fight AIDS, Tuberculosis and Malaria (or Global Fund/ GFATM),  An international financing organization that aims to “attract, leverage and invest additional resources to end the epidemics of HIV/AIDS, tuberculosis and malaria to support attainment of the Sustainable Development Goals established by the United Nations.  A public-private partnership, the organization maintains its secretariat in Geneva, Switzerland.  The organization began operations in January 2002.  The Global Fund is the world's largest financier of AIDS, TB, and malaria prevention, treatment, and care programs.  The Global Fund is a financing mechanism rather than an implementing agency. Programs are implemented by in-country partners such as ministries of health, while the Global Fund secretariat, whose staff only have an office in Geneva, monitor the programs. Implementation is overseen by Country Coordinating Mechanisms, country- level committees consisting of in-country stakeholders that need to include, according to Global Fund requirements, a broad spectrum of representatives from government, NGOs, faith-based organizations, the private sector, and people living with the diseases.  Mobilizes and invests funds in multi-year cycles known as Replenishments, to support national programs  India has been associated with GFATM since 2002 as both recipient and donor.

WHO 2018 Global TB Report  The 2018 edition of the Global Tuberculosis Report, provides a comprehensive and up- to-date assessmentDLSC of the TB epidemic and progress in the response at global, regional and country levels.  The report said that globally, the best estimate is that India accounted for 27 per cent of

120

the 10 million people who developed tuberculosis in 2017, the highest among the top 30 high TB burden countries in the world,  Of these, 5.8 million are men, 3.2 million women and one million children. There were cases in all countries and age groups, but overall 90 per cent were adults, and nine per cent were people living with HIV.  India has the highest burden of TB and multi-drug-resistant TB (MDR-TB)

Government of India initiatives to control TB Revised National TB Control Programme (RNTCP)  Tuberculosis (TB) control activities are implemented in the country for more than 50 years.  The National TB Programme (NTP) was launched by the Government of India in 1962 in the form of District TB Centre model involved with BCG vaccination and TB treatment.  In 1978, BCG vaccination was shifted under the Expanded Programme on Immunisation.  A joint review of NTP was done by Government of India, World Health Organization (WHO) and the Swedish International Development Agency (SIDA) in 1992 and some shortcomings were found.  Around the same time in1993, the WHO declared TB as a global emergency, devised the directly observed treatment – short course (DOTS), and recommended to follow it by all countries.  The Government of India revitalized NTP as RNTCP in the 1993.  DOTS was officially launched as the RNTCP strategy in 1997 and by the end of 2005 the entire country was covered under the programme.

National Strategic Plan for Tuberculosis Control 2012-2017 For achievement of the long term vision of a “TB free India” Goal: ‘universal access to quality TB diagnosis and treatment for all TB patients in the community’. Significant interventions and initiatives were taken during NSP 2012-2017 in terms of . mandatory notification of all TB cases, integration of the programme with the general health services (National Health Mission), . expansion of diagnostics services, . programmatic management of drug resistant TB (PMDT) service expansion, . single window service for TB-HIV cases, . national drug resistance surveillance and revision of partnership guidelines. National strategic plan for tuberculosis elimination 2017-2025 To eliminate TB in India by 2025, five years ahead of the global target, a framework to guide the activities of all stakeholders including the national and state governments, development partners, civil society organizations, international agencies, research institutions,DLSC private sector, and many others whose work is relevant to TB elimination in India is formulated by RNTCP as National Strategic Plan for Tuberculosis Elimination 2017-2025. According to the NSP TB elimination have been integrated into the four strategic pillars

121

of “Detect – Treat – Prevent – Build” (DTPB). Detect: . The first objective of NSP is to find all drug sensitive TB cases (DS-TB) and drug resistant TB cases (DRTB) with an emphasis on reaching TB patients seeking care from private providers and undiagnosed TB cases in high-risk populations (such as prisoners, migrant workers, people living with HIV/AIDS, contacts etc.). NIKSHAY: To facilitate TB notification, RNTCP has developed a case-based web-based TB surveillance system called “NIKSHAY” for both government and private health care facilities. Public private partnership: . For promotion of public-private mix (PPM) in TB prevention and care, private providers are provided incentives for TB case notification, and for ensuring treatment adherence and treatment completion. . The incentives are provided through direct beneficiary transfer. Free drugs and diagnostic tests to TB patients in private sector- . Free drugs and diagnostic tests are provided to TB patients seeking treatment from private health sector. There are two approaches:  first is access to programme- provided drugs and diagnostics through attractive linkages;  second is reimbursement of market- available drugs and diagnostics. Initiative for Promoting Affordable and Quality TB Tests (IPAQT). . Significant cost reduction of select diagnostics is achieved by IPAQT. . 131 private sector labs networked to provide four quality tests for TB at or below the ceiling prices. . For TB diagnosis more than 14,000 designated microscopy centres spread across the country. Cartridge Based Nucleic Acid Amplification Tests (CBNAAT) / Line Probe Assay (LPA) have been established at district levels for decentralised molecular testing for drug resistant TB. . Reference laboratories have been established at state and national levels which provide culture and dug sensitivity test (DST) services as well as molecular diagnosis. Treat: Provision of free TB drugs in the form of daily fixed dose combinations (FDCs) for all TB cases is advised with the support of directly observed treatment (DOT). DOT is a specific strategy, to improve adherence by any person observing the patient taking medications in real time. The treatment observer does not need to be a health-care worker, but could be a friend, a relative or a lay person who works as a treatment supervisor or supporter. If treatment is incomplete, patients may not be cured and drug resistance may develop. Screening of all patients for rifampicin resistance (and for additional drugs wherever indicated) DLSCis done. For drug sensitive TB, daily fixed dose combinations (FDCs) of first-line anti-tuberculosis drugs in appropriate weight bands for all forms of TB and in all ages should be given.

122

First line treatment of drug-sensitive TB consists of a two-months (8weeks) intensive phase with four drug FDCs followed by a continuation phase of four months (16 Weeks) with three drug FDCs. For new TB cases, the treatment in intensive phase (IP) consists of eight weeks of Isoniazid (INH), Rifampicin, Pyrazinamide and Ethambutol (HRZE) in daily doses as per four weight band categories and in continuation phase three drug FDCs- Rifampicin, Isoniazid, and Ethambutol (HRE) are continued for 16 weeks. For previously treated cases of TB, the Intensive Phase is of 12 weeks, where injection streptomycin is given for 8 weeks along with four drugs (INH, Rifampicin, Pyrazinamide and Ethambutol) and after 8 weeks the four drugs (INH, Rifampicin, Pyrazinamide and Ethambutol) in daily doses as per weight bands are continued for another four weeks. In continuation phase Rifampicin, INH, and Ethambutol are continued for another 20 weeks as daily doses. The continuation phase in both new and previously treated cases may be extended by 12- 24 weeks in certain forms of TB like skeletal, disseminated TB based on clinical decision of the treating physician. Patients eligible for retreatment should be referred for a rapid molecular test or drug susceptibility testing to determine at least rifampicin resistance, and preferably also isoniazid resistance status. On the basis of the drug susceptibility profile, a standard first-line treatment regimen (2HRZE/4HR) can be repeated if no resistance is documented; and if rifampicin resistance is present, shorter regimen for MDR-TB (multi drug resistant TB) regimen should be prescribed according to WHO’s recent drug resistant TB treatment guidelines. RNTCP has introduced Bedaquiline CAP for MDR-TB under conditional access programme in 2016 across six sites, with a country wide scale up plan in 2017-2020. Nikshya poshak yozana: . It is centrally sponsored scheme under National Health Mission (NHM), . financial incentive of Rs.500/- per month is provided for nutritional support to each notified TB patient for duration for which the patient is on anti-TB treatment. . Incentives are delivered through Direct benefit transfer (DBT) scheme to bank accounts of beneficiary.

Expending options for ICT based treatment adherence support mechanisms:  Mobile based “Pill-in-Hand” adherence monitoring tool  Interactive Voice Response (IVR), SMS reminders.  Specially designed electronic pill boxes or strips with GSM connection and pressure sensor  Patient Compliance toolkit: a mobile app for patients to report treatment compliance using video, audio or text message  Automated pill loading system  innovatively designed ICT enabled smart cards SMS gateway Intensifying TBDLSC control activities in following key populations is addressed in NSP:  TB-HIV  Diabetics, Tobacco use and Alcohol dependence  Poor, undernourished, economically and socially backward communities

123

 TB control in hilly and difficult terrains  Substance dependence and sexual minorities  TB and pregnancy  Paediatric population  Prison Inmates and staff of prisons/jails  management of extra pulmonary TB

Prevent: With the objective to prevent emergence of TB in susceptible population various measures are indicated as:  Scale up air-borne infection control measures at health care facilities  Treatment for latent TB infection in contacts of bacteriologically-confirmed cases  Address social determinants of TB through intersectoral approach. a) Air borne infection control measures- aimed at minimizing the risk of TB transmission within population and hospital and other settings. The foundation of such infection control is:  Early diagnosis, and proper management of TB patients.  Health education about cough etiquettes and proper disposal of sputum by patient. Cough etiquette means covering nose and mouth when coughing or sneezing. This can be done with a tissue, or if the person doesn’t have a tissue they can cough or sneeze into their upper sleeve or elbow, but they should not cough or sneeze into their hands. The tissue should then be safely disposed of.  Houses should be adequately ventilated.  Proper use of air borne infection control measures in health care facilities and other settings b) Contact tracing-Since transmission can occur from index case to the contact any time (before diagnosis or during treatment) all contacts of TB patients must be evaluated. c) Isoniazid Preventive Therapy (IPT)- Preventive therapy is recommended to Children < 6 years of age, who are close contacts of a TB patient. Children will be evaluated for active TB by a medical officer/ pediatrician and after excluding active TB he/she will be given INH preventive therapy d) BCG vaccination- It is provided at birth or as early as possible till one year of age. BCG vaccine has a protective effect against meningitis and disseminated TB in children. e) Addressing social determinants of TB like poverty, malnutrition, urbanization, indoor air pollution, etc. require inter departmental/ ministerial coordinated activities and the programme is proactively facilitating this coordination.

Build: Health system strengthening for TB control under the National Strategic Plan 2017-2025 is recommendedDLSC in the form of building and strengthening enabling policies, empowering institutions and human resources with enhanced capacities.

124

3. A fungus that cripples immune system

News:  According to the scientists a common fungus Aspergillus fumigatus found virtually everywhere on the Earth can hamper the human body’s defence system enabling a potentially fatal infection to develop.

Analysis: Where can you find this?  The fungus Aspergillus fumigatus is everywhere, and is extremely dangerous for people with weakened immune systems. It occurs virtually everywhere on Earth, as a dark grey stain on damp walls or in microscopically small spores that blow through the air and cling to wallpaper, mattresses and floors. Who is at risk?  Healthy people usually have no problem if spores find their way into their body, as their immune defence system will protect them. However, the fungus can threaten the lives of people with a compromised immune system, such as AIDS patients or people who are immunosuppressed following an organ transplantation

What makes it deadly?  Among other factors, it is gliotoxin, a potent mycotoxin, that is responsible for the pathogenicity of Aspergillus fumigatus.

How does it affect immune system?  To achieve this, the researchers brought immune cells into contact with synthetically produced gliotoxin.  These cells, called neutrophilic granulocytes, represent the first line of the immune defence system. Their task is to detect pathogens and eliminate them.  As soon as such a cell comes into contact with a pathogen, for example a fungus, it releases specific messenger substances (leukotrienes) into the blood, which attract other immune cells.  Once a sufficiently large number of immune cells has gathered, they can render the intruder harmless.  This does not happen if the pathogen Aspergillus fumigatus is involved.  gliotoxin ensures that production of the messenger substance leukotrieneB4 in the neutrophilic granulocytes is inhibited, so that they are unable to send a signal to other immune cells.  This is caused by a specific enzyme (LTA4 hydrolase) being switched off by the mycotoxin.  This interrupts communication between the immune cells and destroys the defence mechanism. As a result, it isDLSC easy for spores – in this case the fungus – that enter the organism to infiltrate tissues or organs.

125

PRELIMS CARDINAL : BASICS Immunodeficiency  Immunodeficiency is a state in which the immune system's ability to fight infectious disease and cancer is compromised or entirely absent.  Most cases of immunodeficiency are acquired ("secondary") due to extrinsic factors that affect the patient's immune system.  Examples of these extrinsic factors include HIV infection, extremes of age, and environmental factors, such as nutrition.  In the clinical setting, the immunosuppression by some drugs, such as steroids, can be either an adverse effect or the intended purpose of the treatment.  Examples of such use is in organ transplant surgery as an anti-rejection measure and in patients suffering from an overactive immune system, as in autoimmune diseases.  Some people are born with intrinsic defects in their immune system, or primary immunodeficiency. A person who has an immunodeficiency of any kind is said to be immunocompromised.  An immunocompromised person may be particularly vulnerable to opportunistic infections, in addition to normal infections that could affect everyone.

Neutrophilic granulocytes White blood cells (also called leukocytes or leucocytes and abbreviated as WBCs) are the cells of the immune system that are involved in protecting the body against both infectious disease and foreign invaders.  All white blood cells are produced and derived from multipotent cells in the bone marrow known as hematopoietic stem cells.  Leukocytes are found throughout the body, including the blood and lymphatic system.  Two pairs of broadest categories classify them either by structure (granulocytes or agranulocytes) or by cell lineage (myeloid cells or lymphoid cells).  These broadest categories can be further divided into the five main types: neutrophils, eosinophils (acidophiles), basophils, lymphocytes, and monocytes. These types are distinguished by their physical and functional characteristics. Monocytes and neutrophils are phagocytic. Further subtypes can be classified; for example, among lymphocytes, there are B cells, T cells, and NK cells.

Leukotrienes Are inflammatory mediators produced in leukocytes. One of their roles is to trigger contractions in the smooth muscles lining the bronchioles;like in asthma.

Mycotoxin (from the Greek mykes, "fungus" and toxikon, "poison") is a toxic secondary metabolite produced DLSC by organisms of the fungus kingdom and is capable of causing disease and death in both humans and other animals

126

ECONOMY

DLSC

127

1. The Pradhan Mantri Kisan Samman Nidhi (PM-KISAN) scheme

Analysis: Pradhan Mantri Kisan Samman Nidhi:  In an effort to provide an assured income support to the small and marginal farmers the Government is launching the, Pradhan Mantri Kisan Samman Nidhi (PM-KISAN).  As a matter of fact, while presenting the Interim Budget 2019-20 in Parliament on 1st February, 2019, the Union Minister for Finance, Corporate Affairs, Railways & Coal, Shri Piyush Goyal said, “Under this programme, vulnerable landholding farmer families, having cultivable land upto 2 hectares, will be provided direct income support at the rate of Rs. 6,000 per year.  This income support will be transferred directly into the bank accounts of beneficiary farmers, in three equal instalments of Rs. 2,000 each.  This programme will be funded by the Government of India. Around 12 crore small and marginal farmer families are expected to benefit from this.  The programme would be made effective from 1st December 2018 and the first installment for the period upto 31st March 2019 would be paid during this year itself. This programme will entail an annual expenditure of Rs.75,000 crore”.  PM-KISAN would not only provide assured supplemental income to the most vulnerable farmer families, but would also meet their emergent needs especially before the harvest season. PM-KISAN would pave the way for the farmers to earn and live a respectable living.

Complete Analysis:  As of now the proposal of minimum income guarantee (MIG) is only an electoral promise with no further details available.  The idea is not new and has been in discussion for some time among academics in India but attracted attention after it was proposed in the Economic Survey of 2017.

Who will benefit?  In simple terms, the proposal of transferring some income to every citizen is built on the twin principles of universality and a notion of minimum basic income to those living at the poverty line.  The principle of universality is at the core of it given the problems of targeting.  However, some form of income support to those who are unable to participate in labour market has been there in most countries in some form or other including in India, like the National Social Assistance Programme (NSAP) pensions for widows, elderly and disabled.  Although the idea of UBI has been in discussion for decades, no country has implemented it.

International Experiences:  Further, it DLSCis important to note that while a proposal for UBI was rejected by a three-fourth majority in Switzerland, Finland which started a pilot has now discontinued it.  But even in Finland, the pilot was not a strict UBI but a social protection scheme aimed at only the unemployed.

128

 While there have been some pilots by NGOs in developing countries in Asia and Africa, they have varied in content of transfer and coverage with only few being fully universal and only the Namibia pilot experiment provided income transfer to people in the poverty line.

The Indian Context:  The proposals in the Indian context have mostly been for a targeted income transfer scheme and not UBI.  In developed countries, the UBI is supposed to supplement existing social security provisions and a top-up over and above universal provision of health, education and so on.  In the Indian context, most arguments in favour of UBI are premised on the inefficiencies of existing social security interventions and seek to replace some of these with direct cash transfers.

Not leakage proof:  It is important to note that several studies on cash transfers including one by J-PAL South Asia for NITI Aayog found that cash transfers are not greatly superior in terms of leakages compared to other schemes of in-kind transfer such as the public distribution system (PDS).  On the other hand, numerous studies have documented that a move towards universalisation and use of technology enabled Chhattisgarh and Tamil Nadu to reduce leakages in the PDS.  However, the real message from these experiments is also that universalisation is the key to efficient delivery of services against targeting proposed by these cash transfer schemes.  The obsession with cash transfers also comes with an understanding that these will take care of all problems.  The current sets of proposals claim these as silver bullets for agrarian crisis to malnutrition to educational deficit and also a solution for the job crisis. This is a tall order with different reasons for persistence for some of these.  A good example is the public distribution system (PDS) where it is clearly established that in-kind transfers are twice as effective in increasing calorie intake compared to equivalent cash transfer.  The real issue with the approach of a targeted cash transfer scheme is that it envisions the role of the state to only providing cash income to the poor.  Critics point out that this kind of ‘Robin Hood’ approach seeks to absolve the state of its responsibility in providing basic services such as health, education, nutrition and livelihood. However, it is also iniquitous since it seeks to create demand for services without supplying the services, leaving the poor to depend on private service providers.  Further, there is now sufficient evidence which shows that privatisation of basic services such as health and education leads to large scale exclusion of the poor and marginalised.  In any case, India is among the countries with lowest expenditure to GDP ratio as far as expenditure on health, education and so on are concerned.

Analysis- I: DLSC  The points mentioned here, take the view that the PM-KISAN scheme will provide farmers assured supplemental income.

129

 The Pradhan Mantri Kisan Samman Nidhi (PM-KISAN) scheme, announced in the Interim Budget, is the biggest scheme launched by the Government of India till date for providing structured support to small and marginal farmers.

For farmers’ welfare:  Under the scheme, Rs. 6,000 per year will be provided to farmers holding cultivable land of up to two hectares.  This has been done because the government is aware that the smaller the land holding, the greater the need for financial support.  This is a Central Sector Scheme and will be funded fully by the Government of India. The guidelines of the scheme have been issued.  The government has developed a portal for managing the scheme (http://pmkisan.nic.in), which has gone live.  The States have to upload the data of the beneficiaries on the portal.  The Ministry of Agriculture and Farmers’ Welfare will transfer the benefit directly into the accounts of the beneficiaries. The amount will be credited into the account of the beneficiary within 48 hours of its release by the government.  In the 2018-19 Budget, the government announced that minimum support price (MSP) would be 1.5 times the cost of production for all the notified commodities.  The Pradhan Mantri Annadata Aay Sanrakshan Abhiyan was approved by the Cabinet in the year 2018, to ensure remunerative prices to the farmers.  There have been various interventions to boost the production of pulses and oilseeds. Earlier, in 2016, the government launched the Pradhan Mantri Fasal Bima Yojana to provide insurance to farmers from all risks.  Thus, in the broader framework of farmers’ welfare, it is easy to understand the importance of the PM-KISAN scheme.

Perspective on Institutional credit:  The government was concerned that although our farmers work very hard, and we have had record foodgrain production in the last three years, they were unable to get good prices for their produce, especially for non-MSP commodities, because of the adverse terms of trade, including depressed international prices.  What has gone unnoticed is that the government is also trying to bring all farmers into the fold of institutional credit.  The target is to bring more than six crore farmers into the Kisan Credit Card (KCC) regime.  Directions have been issued for this to the States and banks. They have been advised to issue KCCs within 15 days of application by the farmers. All the charges which were being levied by the banks, including documentation and inspection charges, up to Rs. 3 lakhs have been waived. Credit should go to the Indian Banks’ Association for taking such a farmer-friendly decision.  It is important to keep in mind that the average annual income of small and marginal farmers is DLSCwell below the average income of all farmers.  The benefit being given to small and marginal farmers through PM-KISAN will provide them assured supplemental income and also meet their emergent expenses, especially immediately after harvest.

130

 The scheme will be implemented with an estimated expenditure of Rs. 1 lakh crore till 2019-20, benefiting 12.50 crore small and marginal farmer families.

Analysis- II:  The points mentioned here, take the view that the amount is not even enough for farmers to fill diesel in their hired tractors.  The farm crisis is not a recent phenomenon. As a matter of fact, it is the result of policies adopted by most of the political outfits that have governed India and its States for the past many decades.  The explanation for politicians turning a blind eye to the crisis is simple.  While solutions to the bottlenecks in business and industry could be dished out in comfortable offices in New Delhi or State capitals, agriculture, for long, had no spokesperson or lobby in India. All the so-called elites of India looked down on farmers as poor and unwanted citizens that the country could well do without.  Critics take the view that the past and present governments were concerned primarily with restructuring corporate laws, refunding financial institutions that were sick because of bad lending, providing subsidies to industries and attracting foreign investments.

The farm crisis is real:  Farmers with two hectares of land want not just ₹2,000 every four months, as the Pradhan Mantri Kisan Samman Nidhi promises.  That is not even enough to fill diesel in their hired tractors. Farmers are not begging for doles. The system of governance has to understand who the small farmer is.  There are many questions that arise. Among them include:

What does the word share-cropper imply? Who is a tenant farmer?  Are the land records sorted out in rural India, or are they all being purposefully kept vague to enable big sharks to grab large tracts?  What is land settlement and why has most of the country not gone through this process?These are the questions that we need to ask.  A Case for Imagining a New India: • It is time for a New India. • This New India requires modern irrigation facilities. • It needs seeds and scientific and modern technological knowledge that can help and guide in reducing costs. • It needs a rapid transition to cost-effective organic farming. • It needs timely delivery of inputs and transport systems to enable commercialisation of agricultural products and activities. It does not need doles.

Analysis- III:  The pointsDLSC mentioned here, take the view that building rural infrastructure in markets and providing tariff protection against subsidised imports is the way forward.  In the Interim Budget, the government has made a number of major political statements, which is understandable in an election year.

131

 The Pradhan Mantri Kisan Samman Nidhi (PM-KISAN) gives direct annual income support to farmers with a land holding of two hectares.  This borrows from Arvind Subramanian’s basic income support scheme for substantial sections of the rural workforce.  However, the Budget has shown an implicit appreciation of the idea and proposed it for a large part of the rural labour force.  It is important to note that landless labourers are a category in the Census and National Sample Survey Office, but as the Finance Secretary clarified, they cultivate at least kitchen plots, and so are marginal farmers for revenue purposes and are eligible for the scheme.  When we count the economic costs we factor in the terminal costs (for the year when the scheme is fully implemented) as a percentage of, say, GDP or agricultural GDP, but such schemes take time to implement and the initial costs are lower.

Will it work?  Of course, there is no way of testing if sufficient funds have been provided for the scheme.  Small farmers till around two-fifths of the land but are two-thirds of the labour force, since agricultural labourers also till small plots of land.  The Budget speech compares the revised estimates for this year with the Budget estimates for the next fiscal. Since Budgets get scaled down when the fiscal crunch begins mid-fiscal year, this gives a false sense of expansion.

A question arises:  Is there an economic case for the scheme in the real world? The terms of trade have been moving against agriculture (Commission for Agricultural Costs and Prices reports) since 2013. So, when income in real terms goes up by, say, 6% annually, the farmer’s real income in terms of what she gets for what she sells goes down. She is agitating because there is a real issue.  Some experts suggest that the answer is to build rural infrastructure in markets and give tariff protection against subsidised imports. But urban interests become a constraint.  The Interim Budget has rhetoric, but the NITI Aayog, does not have any fund allocation powers, unlike the reformed Chinese planning set-up where strategic plans are buttressed with funds. So, you live from day to day. Direct Transfers are then the oxygen you need.  The Budget speech also reiterates the government’s stated goal of doubling farmers’ income.  Some critics point out that the government is obviously sceptical of this; otherwise an additional Direct Transfer sounds rather excessive, even in the months before an election. The budgeted figure for MSP or other support will have to be based on a cost concept that includes rent and interest on farm investments.

Direct Transfers to stay:  Lastly, by calling it an Interim Budget, a legal constitutional hassle has probably been avoided. DLSC  But the argument that the amount that a new government can spend can be decided now is unconvincing.

132

 The new lot, even if the same party comes to power, will not be that generous in giving credit to their predecessors

Not applicable to:  Families with at least one member drawing a monthly pension of Rs 10,000 will be ineligible, according to the guidelines issued to the states by the Centre.  Families who have professionals such as doctors, engineers, lawyers, chartered accountants or architects will be left out too.  Families of former members of Parliament or Legislative Assemblies or even chairpersons of district panchayats would also be ineligible for benefit.  Some government employees, however, have been exempted from exclusion, such as those among the multitasking staff or classified in Class IV or Group "D" categories.  Land owned by temples or other institutions won't form part of the scheme. The guidelines also state if the spouse of a farmer falls within the exclusion criteria, he won't be considered eligible for the benefit.

Prelims cardinal :

Summary:  The best antidote to poverty is enabling citizens to earn their living by providing jobs. For those who are willing to work, schemes such as the Mahatma Gandhi National Rural Employment Gurantee Scheme should be strengthened to enable them to earn decent incomes. Similarly, the crisis in agriculture is unlikely to be resolved by income transfers.  But even with free and universal access to public services and access to livelihood opportunities, there may be a role for cash transfers, particularly for those who are unable to access the labour market or are marginalised due to other reasons.  The NSAPDLSC seeks to do exactly that by providing pensions to elderly, widows and disabled. But even for these vulnerable and marginalised groups, the Central contribution to pensions has been only Rs. 200 per month.

133

 In conclusion, critics assert that if governments cannot ensure decent incomes to the poor, then the issue is not of details of minimum income transfers but that of intent of those who are promising to eradicate poverty through income transfers. On this, there is no ambiguity.

2. Pension for informal sector workers

News:  A major announcement in the Interim Budget 2019-20 was the creation of the Pradhan Mantri Shram Yogi Mandhan (PMSYM), a pension scheme for informal workers.

Analysis :  PM-SYM will be rolled out by the Ministry of Labour and Employment. The scheme announced in the Interim Budget was notified by the Ministry recently. As many as 42 crore workers are estimated to be engaged in the unorganized sector of the country.  The unorganised workers mostly engaged as home based workers, street vendors, mid-day meal workers, head loaders, brick kiln workers, cobblers, rag pickers, domestic workers, washer men, rickshaw pullers, landless labourers, own account workers, agricultural workers, construction workers, beedi workers, handloom workers, leather workers, audio- visual workers and similar other occupations whose monthly income is Rs 15,000/ per month or less and belong to the entry age group of 18-40 years are eligible for the scheme.  They should not be covered under New Pension Scheme (NPS), Employees’ State Insurance Corporation (ESIC) scheme or Employees’ Provident Fund Organisation (EPFO). Further,

he/she should not be an income tax payer.

What will the government spend?  So far, the government has allocated just Rs. 500 crore for the scheme, but this is likely to be increased in the full Budget that will be presented in July.  Further, an analysis of the Interim Budget documents show that the allocation for the Pradhan Mantri Shram Yogi Mandhan could possibly come at the expense of an existing pension scheme — the National Social AssistanceDLSC Programme (NSAP) — announced last year to benefit more than three crore poor senior citizens, disabled people, and widows.

134

 The NSAP had originally been allocated Rs.9,975 crore in the 2018-19 Budget, which was reduced to Rs. 9,200 crore in the Interim Budget 2019-20, which is a drop of Rs. 775 crore

Enrolment Process under PM-SYM:  The subscriber will be required to have a mobile phone, savings bank account and Aadhaar number. The eligible subscriber may visit the nearest CSCs and get enrolled for PM-SYM using Aadhaar number and savings bank account/ Jan-Dhan account number on self- certification basis.  Later, facility will be provided where the subscriber can also visit the PM-SYM web portal or can download the mobile app and self-register using Aadhar number/ savings bank account/ Jan-Dhan account number on self-certification basis.  Enrollment agencies: The enrolment will be carried out by all the Community Service Centers (CSCs). The unorganised workers may visit their nearest CSCs along with their Aadhar Card and Savings Bank account passbook/Jandhan account and get registered themselves for the Scheme. Contribution amount for the first month shall be paid in cash for which they will be provided with a receipt.  Facilitation Centres: All the branch offices of LIC, the offices of ESIC/EPFO and all Labour offices of Central and State Governments will facilitate the unorganised workers about the Scheme, its benefits and the procedure to be followed, at their respective centers.  In this respect, the arrangements to be made by all offices of LIC, ESIC, EPFO all Labour offices of Central and State Governments are given below, for ease of reference:  All LIC, EPFO/ESIC and all Labour offices of Central and State Governments may set up a “Facilitation Desk” to facilitate the unorganised workers, guide about the features of the Scheme and direct them to nearest CSC.  Each desk may consist of at least one staff.  They will haveDLSC backdrop, standi at the main gate and sufficient number of brochures printed in Hindi and regional languages to be provided to the unorganised workers.  Unorganised workers will visit these centres with Aadhaar Card, Savings bank account/ Jandhan account and mobile phone.

135

 Help desk will have onsite suitable sitting and other necessary facilities for these workers.  Any other measures intended to facilitate the unorganised workers about the Scheme, in their respective centers.  Fund Management: PM-SYM will be a Central Sector Scheme administered by the Ministry of Labour and Employment and implemented through Life Insurance Corporation of India and CSCs. LIC will be the Pension Fund Manager and responsible for Pension pay out. The amount collected under PM-SYM pension scheme shall be invested as per the investment pattern specified by Government of India.  Exit and Withdrawal: Considering the hardships and erratic nature of employability of these workers, the exit provisions of scheme have been kept flexible.  Exit provisions are as under: In case subscriber exits the scheme within a period of less than 10 years, the beneficiary’s share of contribution only will be returned to him with savings bank interest rate.  If subscriber exits after a period of 10 years or more but before superannuation age i.e. 60 years of age, the beneficiary’s share of contribution along with accumulated interest as actually earned by fund or at the savings bank interest rate whichever is higher.  If a beneficiary has given regular contributions and died due to any cause, his/ her spouse will be entitled to continue the scheme subsequently by payment of regular contribution or exit by receiving the beneficiary’s contribution along with accumulated interest as actually earned by fund or at the savings bank interest rate whichever is higher.  If a beneficiary has given regular contributions and become permanently disabled due to any cause before the superannuation age, i.e. 60 years, and unable to continue to contribute under the scheme, his/ her spouse will be entitled to continue the scheme subsequently by payment of regular contribution or exit the scheme by receiving the beneficiary’s contribution with interest as actually earned by fund or at the savings bank interest rate whichever is higher.  After the death of subscriber as well as his/her spouse, the entire corpus will be credited back to the fund.  Any other exit provision, as may be decided by the Government on advice of NSSB.  Default of Contributions: If a subscriber has not paid the contribution continuously he/she will be allowed to regularize his contribution by paying entire outstanding dues, along with penalty charges, if any, decided by the Government.  Pension Pay out:Once the beneficiary joins the scheme at the entry age of 18-40 years, the beneficiary has to contribute till 60 years of age. On attaining the age of 60 years, the subscriber will get the assured monthly pension of Rs.3000/- with benefit of family pension, as the case may be.  Doubt and Clarification: In case of any doubt on the scheme, clarification provided by the JS& DGLW will be final.

PRELIMS CARDINAL :

Salient FeaturesDLSC of PM-SYM:  Minimum Assured Pension: Each subscriber under the PM-SYM, shall receive minimum assured pension of Rs 3000/- per month after attaining the age of 60 years.  Family Pension: During the receipt of pension, if the subscriber dies, the spouse of the

136

beneficiary shall be entitled to receive 50% of the pension received by the beneficiary as family pension. Family pension is applicable only to spouse.  If a beneficiary has given regular contribution and died due to any cause (before age of 60 years), his/her spouse will be entitled to join and continue the scheme subsequently by payment of regular contribution or exit the scheme as per provisions of exit and withdrawal.

Will the scheme work?  Social sector workers have pointed out that creating a voluntary contributory pension scheme for informal sector workers is not likely to work as their salaries are low. The argument is that they already pay large amounts as indirect taxes.  Further, for a salaried worker, the pension contribution can be cut from the salary. A daily wage earner or migrant labourer will, however, have to regularly deposit her income each month, which is an uncertain proposition.

3. Ayushman Bharat

News:  Ayushman Bharat for a new India -2022, announced Two major initiatives in health sector announced Rs. 1200 Crore allocated for 1.5 Lakh health and wellness Centres

Analysis :  National health protection Scheme to provide Hospitalisation cover to over 10 Crore poor and vulnerable families  The Government today announced two major initiatives in health sector , as part of Ayushman Bharat programme. The Union Minister for Finance and Corporate Affairs, Shri Arun Jaitely while presenting the General Budget 2018-19 in Parliament said that this was aimed at making path breaking interventions to address health holistically, in primary, secondary and tertiary care systems, covering both prevention and health promotion.

The initiatives are as follows:-  Health and Wellness Centre:- The National Health Policy, 2017 has envisioned Health and Wellness Centres as the foundation of India’s health system. Under this 1.5 lakh centres will bring health care system closer to the homes of people. These centres will provide comprehensive health care, including for non-communicable diseases and maternal and child health services. These centres will also provide free essential drugs and diagnostic services. The Budget has allocated Rs.1200 crore for this flagship programme. Contribution of private sector through CSR and philanthropic institutions in adopting these centres is also envisaged.  National Health Protection Scheme:- The second flagship programme under Ayushman Bharat is National Health Protection Scheme, which will cover over 10 crore poor and vulnerable families (approximately 50 crore beneficiaries) providing coverage upto 5 lakh rupees perDLSC family per year for secondary and tertiary care hospitalization. This will be the world’s largest government funded health care programme. Adequate funds will be provided for smooth implementation of this programme.

137

Significance of Ayushman Bharat

 Move towards the goal of universal health coverage  Creating Swasth Bharat.  Accessible healthcare at secondary and tertiary level institutions for the bottom 40% of the population.  High involvement of states as the states are the custodians and the implementers of the scheme.  Ensures enhanced productivity, well being and avert wage loss and impoverishment.  Generation of lakhs of jobs, particularly for women.  Like Jan Dhan scheme did for financial inclusion, Ayushman Bharat will create huge awareness of health insurance  A higher life expectancy.  The country will meet its social development goals.  With respect to infrastructure and trained medical professionals, tertiary healthcare faces a big challenge. This problem is more acute in rural areas. AB will address this challenge.  Will improve access to healthcare and bridge the demand-supply gap.

Challenges for Ayushman Bharat

 Inadequate funding.  Proper and transparent implementation on such a large scale.  Limited and uneven distribution of human resources at various levels of health services.  Presently, a lack of capacity to respond to huge demand for beds. This will take some time.  Private players faced various hurdles in earlier schemes like RSBY.  There was opaque procedure for empanelment and cost fixating mechanisms.  Huge delays in reimbursement to private hospitals was also a challenge in RSBY.  At the same time, the pricing mechanism of private players needs to be checked.  Politics of parties will hinder the participation of states.

Summary:

 The Finance Minister further said, that these two health sector initiatives under Ayushman Bharat Programme will build a New India 2022 and ensure enhanced productivity, well being and avert wage loss and impoverishment. These Schemes will also generate lakhs of jobs, particularly for women.  The Finance Minister said, that in order to further enhance accessibility of quality medical education and health care, 24 new Government Medical Colleges and Hospitals will be set up, by up-grading existing district hospitals in the country. This would ensure that there is at least 1 Medical College for every 3 Parliamentary Constituencies and at least 1 Government Medical College in each State of the country. DLSC

138

PRELIMS CARDINAL :

 Public health falls under Item 6 (Public health and sanitation; hospitals and dispensaries) of list II—State List in seventh schedule  Article 47 - Duty of the State to raise the level of nutrition and the standard of living and to improve public health. The State shall regard the raising of the level of nutrition and the standard of living of its people and the improvement of public health as among its primary duties and, in particular, the State shall endeavour to bring about prohibition of the consumption except for medicinal purposes of intoxicating drinks and of drugs which are injurious to health.

4. Surveying India’s unemployment numbers

News:  It is important to note that the monthly measurement of the unemployment rate is one of the requirements of the Special Data Dissemination Standard (SDDS) of the International Monetary Fund (IMF).

Analysis: A Look at Some Key findings:  The most important message from the data is that India’s labour participation rate is very low by world standards and that even this low participation rate fell very sharply after demonetisation.  The average labour participation rate was 47% during January-October 2016. The world average is about 66%.  Immediately after demonetisation in November 2016, India’s labour participation rate fell to 45%; 2% of the working age population, i.e. about 13 million, moved out of labour markets. That is a lot of people who were willing to work who decided that they did not want to work any more.  The data shows that it was not the employed who lost jobs and decided to stop working. The employed mostly retained their jobs. But it was largely the unemployed who decided that the labourDLSC markets had been so badly vitiated after demonetisation that they gave up looking for jobs any further. In short, they lost hope of finding jobs in the aftermath of demonetisation.

139

 As more and more unemployed left the labour market, the unemployment rate fell. This is because the unemployment rate is the ratio of the unemployed to the total labour force.  Further, experts opine that this fall gave misleading or at least confusing signals, almost implying that the unemployment rate was falling in a positive sense.  In reality, it was a reflection of an exodus of the unemployed from the labour markets — a fall in the labour participation rate. And this underlines the much greater importance of the labour participation rate.

Perspective on female labour:  It is important to note that India’s female labour participation rate is very low.  As a matter of fact, official statistics have always shown that India’s female labour participation rate is low and falling.  Researchers have shown that this fall is because of rising household incomes that reduce the need for women to join the labour force; increased enrolment in higher education by women which delays their entry into the labour force, and cultural and security factors that keep women away from the labour market in India.  Further, it is evident that employers are also biased against hiring women.  Experts also point out that the CPHS shows that the situation with respect to women’s participation in the labour force is extremely poor — much poorer than what the official agencies tell us. The entire brunt of demonetisation was borne by women. Their labour participation fell sharply while that of men did not.  Critics point out that after the demonetisation jolt came the Goods and Services Tax shock of July 2017 that drove away small enterprises which could not compete in a tax-compliant environment out of business. This caused a substantial loss of jobs. Preliminary estimates suggest that employment shrunk by 11 million in 2018. The brunt of this was again borne largely by women. Although men too were also impacted.

A Closer Look at Some Specifics:  Male labour participation rate was 74.5% in 2016. This dropped to 72.4% in 2017 and then to 71.7% in 2018.  In contrast however, female labour participation was as low as 15.5% in 2016 which dropped to 11.9% in 2017 and then 11% in 2018.  Urban female labour participation rates fell faster than rural female participation. In urban India it dropped from 15.2% in 2016 to 10.5% in 2018. The corresponding values for rural women were 15.6% and 11.3%, respectively.  It is important to note that although female labour participation is substantially much lower than male participation, the few women who venture to get employment find it much more difficult to find jobs than men. The unemployment rate for men was 4.9% in 2018 and that for women in the same year was much higher — 14.9%.

PRELIMS CARDINAL : Special Data DisseminationDLSC Standard (SDDS):  The SDDS was established in 1996 to help countries access the international capital markets by providing adequate economic and financial information publicly.

140

 India was one of the early signatories of the Special Data Dissemination Standard (SDDS).  India complies with many requirements of the SDDS, but it has taken an exception with respect to the measurement of unemployment.  It is important to note that the Government of India does not produce any measure of monthly unemployment rate.  Critics have pointed out that official plans to measure unemployment at an annual and quarterly frequency is in a shambles. This does not befit India’s claims to be the fastest growing economy and as the biggest beneficiary of a famed demographic dividend.

Centre for Monitoring India Economy (CMIE):

 The Centre for Monitoring India Economy (CMIE), a private enterprise, has demonstrated over the past three years that fast frequency measures of unemployment can be made and that seeking an exception on SDDS compliance is unnecessary.  The CMIE decided to fill India’s gap in generating fast frequency measures of household well-being in 2014.  In its household survey, called the Consumer Pyramids Household Survey (CPHS), the sample size was 172,365 as compared to that of the official National Sample Survey Organisation (NSSO), which was 101,724. In both surveys, the sample selection method has been broadly the same.  The CPHS is comprehensive, surveying its entire sample every four months. Each survey is a wave. The CPHS is also a continuous survey, and so, for example, three waves are completed in a year. The CMIE’s CPHS thus has a much larger sample and is conducted at a much higher frequency than the NSSO’s.  Further, the CPHS is conducted as face-to-face interviews necessarily using GPS-enabled smartphones or tablets. Intense validation systems ensure high fidelity of data capture. All validations are conducted in real-time while the teams are in the field. The data capture machinery ensures delivery of high quality data in real time obviating the need for any further “cleaning”, post field operations.  Once the data is collected and validated in real-time, it is automatically deployed for estimations without any human intervetion.  In 2016, the CMIE added questions regarding employment/unemployment to the CPHS. Since then, the CMIE has been generati This could be as one of four factors:  1. employed;  2. unemployed willing to work and actively looking for a job;  3. unemployed willing to work but not actively looking for a job, and  4. unemployed but neither willing nor looking for a job.ng labour market indicators regularly and making these freely available for public use.

Difference between the CPHS and NSSO Surveys:  A differenceDLSC between the CPHS and the NSSO surveys is the reference period of the employment status of a respondent.  While the NSSO tries to capture the status for an entire year and for a  week, the CPHS captures the status as on the day of the survey.

141

International Monetary Fund:

 IMF is an international organization headquartered in Washington, D.C., consisting of "189 countries working to foster global monetary cooperation, secure financial stability, facilitate international trade, promote high employment and sustainable economic growth, and reduce poverty around the world.  International Finance Corporation (IFC) and International Development Association (IDA). In fact, in absolute figures though not on per capita basis, India has been the largest borrower from the World Bank group.  Objective : IMF has also another important objective to promote international trade so as to achieve its required expansion and balanced growth. This would ensure development of production resources and thereby promote and maintain high levels of income and employment among all its member countries.  Main functions: Upon the founding of the IMF, its three primary functions were: to oversee the fixed exchange rate arrangements between countries, thus helping national governments manage their exchange rates and allowing these governments to prioritize economicgrowth, and to provide short-term capital to aid the balance of payments.

Summary:  This higher unemployment rate faced by women in spite of a very low participation rate indicates a bias against employing women.  Drawing women into the labour force by removing the impediments they face to at least bring their participation levels close to global standards is critically important for India to gain from the demographic dividend opportunity it has.  This window of opportunity is open only till 2030.  Critics point out that by not using a good data monitoring machinery, the Indian government is keeping both itself and the citizenry in the dark.

5. Bill shock for power producers

Analysis: Understanding the Issue: What happens if you don’t pay your electricity bill?  The power company cuts you off , right? Now what happens if you happen to be the power company, and haven’t been paying your bills to your supplier — the power generating company? Ideally, the same rules should apply.  Unfortunately, the same rules don’t apply.  All kinds of reasons are put forward: For example, power distribution companies (discoms) are essential utilities, electricity is a basic requirement, the discoms are all (or, almost all) owned by the government so the money isn’t going anywhere, and so on and so forth.

The power problem:DLSC  Currently, the Usually, the generators tend to cave in and simply let the dues mount till they reach a point where they can’t pay their suppliers or their employees and then the cycle of threat and bargaining starts.

142

 As a matter of fact, the recent stand-off between India’s largest power producer, NTPC, and the discoms of Andhra Pradesh, Telangana and Karnataka is a classic example.  Stuck with unpaid dues of over Rs. 5,838 crore, of which more than Rs. 4,100 crore were due for more than two months, NTPC threatened to “regulate” supply — effectively, reduce by over 3,400 MW the quantum of power it supplies to these three discoms — from midnight of February 5, 2019.  Within a day, the threat was kept in abeyance, with the three discoms promising to pay “as soon as possible”, although no clear date was given.  It is also important to note that as of November 2018, the latest month for which data are available, the money owed by discoms to power producers was over Rs. 41,000 crore. That number will climb closer to the Rs. 55,000 crore mark, if you add the dues which are still within the 60-day credit offered by generators. Pending payments are growing at 29% per year.  This is clearly unsustainable. If power producers don’t get paid, their only option is to go belly up or shut shop, since power distribution is, for all practical purposes, a monopoly.  If you have only one customer and that customer isn’t paying you, there’s little you can do. This is one of the reasons why over 30,000 MW of capacity is currently under the “stressed asset” category and looking for resolution.  With or without resolution, lenders are already facing a monumental haircut. If one adds productive, operational assets to this — because the buyer is not paying up – then we are looking at a systemic collapse accumulated losses of discoms are in excess of Rs. 17,000 crore.  But this is after two years of the government’s Ujwal DISCOM Assurance Yojana (UDAY), instituted after the cumulative losses of discoms crossed Rs. 51,000 crore in 2015-16.  Under the scheme, State governments took over the liability for half the accumulated losses, allowing the discoms to start with a near fresh slate.  In return, discoms were expected to cut losses resulting from theft, non-metering and leakages to 15% of the total by March 31, 2019, while gradually increasing tariffs to cover the rest.  With just a little more than a month left for that deadline, the loss figure is still over 20% — which means a fifth of the power produced doesn’t earn a paisa — while tariff hikes and axing of subsidies hasn’t happened.  India’s power problem, long thought to lie on the generation side, has shifted to the distribution side. We are now comfortable on the generation side.  It is important to note that with State governments stubbornly refusing to change, using discoms as handy vehicles to push all kinds of populist agendas without actually having to spend their budget monies on it, the discoms have virtually reached the point of no return.

PRELIMS CARDINAL : Brief Note on UDAY:  The Ujwal DISCOM Assurance Yojana (UDAY) was launched by the Government of India on 20-11-2015DLSC for operational and financial turnaround of State owned Power Distribution Companies (DISCOMs).  The Scheme aims to reduce the inter est burden, reduce the cost of power, reduce power losses in Distribution sector, and improve operational efficiency of DISCOMs.

143

 UDAY is the most comprehensive power sector reform ever planned and executed in the country.  The UDAY scheme is a classic example of Comprehensive, Cooperative, Collaborative, Competitive, Consensual and Compassionate Federalism, where in the Governments at the States are envisaged to work in complete cohesion and collaboration with the Centre so as to compassionately focus on the comprehensively serving the people of India in meeting their power demands.  Further, the scheme encourages State Governments to engage in constructive competition amongst themselves so as to achieve the financial and operational turnaround of their power departments and DISCOMs.

NTPC Limited :Electric power distribution company:  NTPC limited., is an Indian Public Sector Undertaking, engaged in the business of generation of electricity and allied activities. It is a company incorporated under the Companies Act 1956 and is promoted by the Government of India.

Difference between Companies Act 2013 vs Companies Act 1956: Sl Point Companies Act 2013 Companies Act 1956

1 Financial Companies must have their financial Companies were permitted to Year year ending on 31 Mar every year have financial year ending on a date decide by Company

2 Formats of Schedule III Schedule VI Financial Statement

3 Maximum No As per rules, subject to Max 100. 10 in banking business and 20 of Partners Currently is 50. in any other business.

4 Max 200 excluding past and present 50 excluding past and present Shareholders employees employees in Pvt Ltd Company

5 One Person Company which has only one person Did not exist Company (natural person) as its member (OPC)

6 Issue of Section 53 prohibits issue of shares at Section 79 permitted issue of Share at a discount. However, Section shares at a discount. discount 54 permits issue of ESOPs to its employees at a discount. 8 SecurityDLSC Utilisation of Securities Premium Utilisation of Securities Premium Premium Reserve is provided in Section 52(2) Reserve was provided in Sec 77A Reserve and 78

144

9 Article of Table F applies where Companies Table A applied where Association Limited by shares does not adopt their Companies did not adopt their own Articles of Association. own Articles of Association.

10 Interest in In the absence of a clause in the In the absence of a clause in Calls in Articles of Association, the maximum the Articles of Association, Arrears interest chargeable on Calls-in-arrears maximum interest chargeable is 10% p.a. on Calls-in-arrears was 5% p.a.

11 Interest in In the absence of a clause in the In the absence of a clause in Calls in Articles of Association, the maximum the Articles of Association, the Advance interest payable on Calls-in-advance is maximum interest payable on 12% p.a. Calls-in-advance was 6% p.a.

12 Minimum Sec39 a company shall not allot Sec 69 the requirement of Subscription Securities unless the amount stated minimum subscription was with in the prospectus as minimum respect to Shares only subscription has been subscribed & the sum paid

Past attempts in finding a workable solution:  The Centre has taken several shots at solving this. Initially, privatisation was thought of as the panacea, but the experience with privatised discoms has been only marginally better (For example, Mumbaikars are up in arms over sharp bill increases after Gautam Adani bought out Anil Ambani’s distribution utility there).  Later current government came up with the UDAY scheme. But clearly, UDAY too has just kicked the can down the road, since discoms haven’t cleaned up their act.  In 2018, a high-level committee headed by the Cabinet Secretary suggested that public financial institutions like the Power Finance Corporation discount discom receivables and pay power producers.  However, these institutions were wary of default by discoms and wanted the government to create a three-way arrangement with the Reserve Bank of India, such that flows to State government treasuries would be diverted to pay the institutions in case of default. This proved unworkable.

Current situation :  Currently, another committee has been formed, which is of the view that discoms should go into a prepaid mode with power producers. This too looks unlikely.  Lastly, what also looks unlikely is a workable solution — unless the political class stops play.

6. A ‘pink revolution’ quietly takes shape in Maharashtra News: DLSC  ‘pink revolution’ is quietly taking shape in Maharashtra with an objective to breed imported pigs to address the problem of protein deficiency in a sizeable section of the population that has been deprived of access to affordable meat besides providing livelihood to farmers.

145

Analysis:  Mumbai-based Gargi Genetics Pvt. Ltd., supported by the Maharashtra government’s policy, is gearing up to create an ecosystem for supply of high quality pork.  Many consumers stay away from consuming pork as local pigs are mostly bred under unhygienic conditions.  Gargi Genetics is planning to address this concern through supply of hygienic pork produced from imported breeds in clean environment and is launching an education campaign.  In five years, over 1,000 Maharashtra farmers, in a cooperative format, are expected to learn about commercial animal farming with international best practices.  Other States such as Punjab,Kerala and North Eastern States do have pig-related policies but Maharashtra’s policy supports international imported pig breeding for maximising output.  The project has been mooted by finance professional Sandeep Mestry and genetics healthcare exponent Nitin Malekar who have been working on this for years. They had achieved a litter(number of offspring) size of 10 to 14, which is probably the best under Indian conditions.

Highlights:  There is a plan to address this concern through supply of hygienic pork produced from imported breeds in clean environment and by launching an education campaign.  The company is planning to partner with farmers by supplying them pigs imported from Canada.  They would be bred under hygienic conditions for production of high quality meat.  The company plans to build a fully-equipped international-standard piggery which would support animal husbandry, food and medical industry.

Benefits:  While it would create a comprehensive value chain for pork production, it would also supply high quality animals for medical and research industry (organ transplant and insulin).  Commercial pig farming in India for meat production is one of the best and profitable business ideas.

Challenges:  Indian pig breeds are not suitable for high quality pork production.  Indian pork is sold at about Rs.250 per kg compared with international quality processed pork which is sold at Rs.1, 200- 3,000 per kg.  The Pink Revolution initiative is scheduled to start off in the second quarter of 2019.  The ‘pink revolution’ targets to produce five lakh high quality pigs over a period of 5-6 years.  ‘Pink revolution’ plans to offer ‘farm to market’ solution. DLSC

146

PRELIMS CARDINAL : Pink Revolution:  Pink revolution is a term used to denote the technological revolution in the meat and poultry processing sector .  Pink revolution was launched to increase the Pharmaceutical,Onion and prawn  production in India  Durgesh Patel is known as father of pink revolution.

Types of colour revolutions in India

Summary:  India needs more hygienic methods in meat and poultry processing and increased investment in the sector. The need of the hour is to enhance the farmer’s potential genetically superior quality animals and meeting consumers’ demand for safe and healthy meat and health industry’s requirement for quality animals. It is an industry with huge potential.

7. RBI cuts rates to spur growth

News:  The Reserve Bank of India (RBI) has cut the policy repo rate by 25 basis points to 6.25% in a bid to revive economic growth as it projected retail inflation to remain below its target of 4% for the next 12 months. The rate reduction was the first since August 2017.

Analysis:

Highlights of the recent Monetary Policy Review:  Barely fourDLSC months after the Reserve Bank of India switched its monetary policy stance to one of ‘calibrated tightening’, signalling interest rates were set to trend higher, it has reversed direction.

147

 The RBI also simultaneously changed the stance of the policy to ‘neutral’ from ‘calibrated tightening,’ which indicates that the central bank remains ready to move in either direction based on incoming data.  The move will enable banks to lower their lending rates. While all six members of the monetary policy committee voted for a change in the stance, the vote for a rate cut saw two members breaking with the majority view by backing the status quo.

MPC’s reasoning has been fairly straightforward  With Consumer Price Index-based inflation having continued to slow and projected to stay well below the medium-term target of 4% till at least the October-December quarter, the MPC saw an opportune moment to pivot to a growth-supportive stance.  That there is a need to bolster economic momentum is evident from the RBI’s downward revision of the forecast for growth in the first half of the next fiscal year.  The projection has been lowered to a range of 7.2-7.4%, from 7.5% posited in the RBI’s December statement, as moderating global growth and slowing overseas demand add uncertainties to the prevailing domestic imbalances.  Specifically, production and import of capital goods, which is a key gauge of investment demand, contracted in November/December and credit flows to industry remain muted.  With an overall shortfall of 4% in rabi sowing across various crops, and storage in major reservoirs at just 44% of the full level, the slowdown in farm output growth may end up being more protracted.

Weakening of demand  The less-than-sanguine(positive, especially in an apparently bad or difficult situation) outlook for the rural economy is also reflected in the high-frequency indicators of the services sector.  Data on sales of both motorcycles and tractors in December underscore weakening demand in the hinterland.  This weakness in the farm sector is undergirding the unprecedented softness in food prices. The December CPI data showed continuing deflation in food items.

MPC’s acknowledgment  While the RBI’s inflation calculus clearly benefits from the ongoing trend in price gains, the MPC is justifiably cognisant of the tenuousness of the assumptions it has made for its forward projections.  Importantly, while it has assumed a normal monsoon this year, the central bank acknowledges that any variation in geographic spread or uneven distribution in terms of time could roil the inflation outlook.

Understanding neutral and calibrated tightening:  Neutral in monetary policy refers Assurance of stable interest rate, with the control on inflation asDLSC projected. No hike in interest rate in near future.It is a sign of confidence given to the banks and borrowers etc. about the stable situation and intended to encourage their loans and advances.

148

 Calibrated Tightening in monetary policy refers Uncertainty of stable rate as well as probability of rate to go high /forward with no other option. Certainly interest rate hike is possible. It is a warning signal of increasing rate which will be given to the bankers about the interest rate high , which will push the MCLR - Marginal cost based lending rates of banks for the loans advanced to the borrowers.

PRELIMS CARDINAL :

Repo rate:  Repurchase rate or the repo rate is the rate at which the RBI lends money to commercial banks.  This is availed by the banks in the event of any shortfall of funds.  Repo rate is used by monetary authorities to control inflation

Reverse repo :  Reverse repo is the rate at which the RBI borrows money from commercial banks within the country.  It is a monetary policy instrument which can be used to control the money supply in the country.

Monetary Policy Committee:  The Reserve Bank of India Act, 1934 (RBI Act) has been amended by the Finance Act, 2016, to provide for a statutory and institutionalised framework for a Monetary Policy Committee, for maintaining price stability, while keeping in mind the objective of growth.  The Monetary Policy Committee would be entrusted with the task of fixing the benchmark policy rate (repo rate) required to contain inflation within the specified target level.  A Committee-based approach for determining the Monetary Policy will add lot of value and transparency to monetary policy decisions.  The meetings of the Monetary Policy Committee shall be held at least 4 times a year and it shall publish its decisions after each such meeting Composition :  The MPC will have six members – the RBI Governor (Chairperson), the RBI Deputy Governor in charge of monetary policy, one official nominated by the RBI Board and the remaining three members would represent the Government of India.  These Government of India nominees are appointed by the Central Government based on the recommendations of a search cum selection committee consisting of the cabinet secretary (Chairperson), the RBI Governor, the secretary of the Department of Economic Affairs, Ministry of Finance, and three experts in the field of economics or banking as nominated by the central government.  The three central government nominees will hold office for a period of four years and will not be eligible for re-appointment. These three central government nominees in MPC are mandated to be persons of ability, integrity and standing, having knowledge and experience in the field of economics or banking or finance or monetary policy.  RBI Act prohibits appointing any Member of Parliament or Legislature or public servant, or any employeeDLSC / Board / committee member of RBI or anyone with a conflict of interest with RBI or anybody above the age of 70 to the MPC.  The Central government also retains powers to remove any of its nominated members from MPC subject to certain conditions.

149

Summary:  However, the RBI’s policy statement fails to make any mention of its hitherto abiding concern about fiscal prudence.  With the Interim Budget showing some slippage from the fiscal roadmap and projecting a budget deficit of 3.4% for both the current financial year and the next, the risk of government borrowing crowding out private investment demand remains tangibly real.

8. Angel Tax

News:  Start-ups troubled by the so-called angel tax may soon receive some concession from the government.  On 4th February, 2019, the Centre set up a five-member working committee to look into revising the norms of the angel tax imposed on start-ups.

Analysis:  The tax, which was first introduced in 2012 to curb money-laundering through the sale of shares of private unlisted companies at bloated prices, has caused a lot of anguish among start-up investors in the country.  Start-up owners have complained that income tax officials have asked many start-ups to cough up money when they try to attract capital into their entities by issuing new shares.  For its part, the IT department fears that start-ups may be used as convenient tools to launder illegally acquired money, so a tax on investments beyond a certain threshold is necessary to deter such shady operations.  It is important to note that while the intent of such an angel tax may be justifiable, the arbitrary nature of it means the cost of unintended consequences could be larger than the supposed benefits.  In trying to curb money-laundering, Section 56(2)(viib) of the Indian Income Tax Act, 1961 gives income tax officials a free hand to harass even genuine start-ups looking to raise investments for their growth.  Under the Act, the IT department is free to arbitrarily decide the fair value of a company’s share and tax start-ups if the price at which their new shares are sold to investors is higher than the fair value of these shares.  The broad-brush tax on all investments means an unnecessary cost is imposed on the wider start-up community simply because of the lack of better means at the government’s disposal to tackle black money.

PRELIMS CARDINAL :

Meaning :  Angel tax is a term used to refer to the income tax payable on capital raised by unlisted companies DLSCvia issue of shares where the share price is seen in excess of the fair market value of the shares sold.  The excess realisation is treated as income and taxed accordingly. The tax was introduced in the 2012 Union Budget by then finance minister Pranab Mukherjee to arrest laundering of funds. It

150

has come to be called angel tax since it largely impacts angel investments in startups. The Income-tax Act, 1961  The Income-tax Act, 1961 is the charging Statute of Income Tax in India. It provides for levy, administration, collection and recovery of Income Tax. The Government of India brought a draft statute called the "Direct Taxes Code" intended to replace the Income Tax Act,1961 and the Wealth Tax Act, 1957.

Summary:  The committee set up by the government will, among other things, consider raising the threshold beyond which new investments into start-ups will be taxed.  It is expected that start-ups with aggregate paid-up share capital and share premium of less than Rs. 25 crore, against the previous threshold of only Rs. 10 crore, will not be taxed while attracting new investment.  Experts have opined that although this would definitely make life easier to a certain extent for angel investors and start-ups, it will not address the real problem with the angel tax, which has to do with the unbridled power that it vests in the hands of the income tax authorities.  Investors, foreign or domestic, may become wary of investing in new ideas when they are taxed while risking money on untested ventures.  As a way forward, experts suggest that the government should look to withdraw the angel tax and focus instead on building the capability to better identify and rein in illegal wealth. Otherwise it risks killing the nascent start-up ecosystem in the country.

9. The state of the States

News:  Recently NITI Aayog released the SDG India Index: Baseline Report 2018.

Analysis:  India was one among the 193 United Nations member states to adopt the Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs) in September 2015.  It has been making sincere efforts to achieve these goals.

Arbitrariness in the exercise  Although classification sounds like an appropriate thing to do, there is arbitrariness in the exercise.  In a unitary range, those States with scores till the midpoint are categorised as aspirants and a cluster of States in a close range of progress are termed as performers.  A few States are designated as front runners.  The three front runner States — Tamil Nadu, Kerala, and Himachal Pradesh — assume values of 66, 69 and 69, respectively, as against a range of States with values between 50 and 64. DLSC  With the national score being 57, almost 17 States qualify as above or equal to the national score.Plotted on a graph, there is a negatively skewed distribution of scores.

151

 This needs to be recognised in classification; otherwise the arbitrariness with which the classification is made somewhat hints at a purposive designation of a few States in two extremes and a major share of them in between.

The problem of averaging  Further, when one reads into the performance on various SDGs, it is found that many States fall into the aspirant category, especially for SDG-5 (gender equality), SDG-9 (industry innovation and infrastructure) and SDG-11 (sustainable cities and communities).  These kinds of differences could well be emerging owing to a different number of indicators considered under different SDGs as well as their corresponding variability across the States.  This is evident in the variation of scores across different goals.  For instance, in case of goals 1 and 2, the range for the majority of the States is between 35 and 80.  For goals 3 and 6, the range is between 25 and 100.  Again, for goal 5, it ranges between 24 and 50.  Given these variations across different goals, merely averaging them not only compromises on robustness but also masks the disaggregated story to a large extent.

Difference between two states doesn’t give a clear picture  The difference in progress between the three front runner States is three points.  This is perhaps not similar to the distance between the performing States of Telangana and Andhra Pradesh, which too have a three-point difference.  Such comprehension of achievement is limited as regards to comparing States, let alone designating them into four categories.

Summary :  On the whole, this performance assessment may not be misleading, but it does not help us understand the relative significance of compliance in some goals that helps in compliance of the other.  Thus, performance assessment of SDGs while overlooking the strict interdependence of them may not be rewarding.

PRELIMS CARDINAL :

SDG India Index: Baseline Report 2018  The report is a useful comparative account of how well different States and Union Territories have performed so far in their efforts to achieve these goals.  However, it has not been possible to establish suitable indicators for three of the 17 goals, including climate action (SDG-13).  This is on account of either lack of identification of appropriate indicators or of the inability to compare differentDLSC States.  On the whole, 62 indicators representing 14 goals have been identified based on their measurability across States over time.  A progress performance assessment has been made towards targets set by the Government of

152

India, or the UN SDGs target for 2030, or the average of the three best-performing States.  For reasons of comparability, all these indicators are normalised.

States are categorised into four groups  Based on a scale of 0 to 100, the States are categorised into four groups: achievers, front runners, performers, and aspirants.  Achievers are those States which have already accomplished the set target.  Front runners are those States that are very close to realising them.  A majority of the States are categorised as performers and some lag behind as aspirants.

What can be done?  Finally, the process of aggregation adopted to present the summary index of compliance with the targets being a simple average assumes that each of the goals as well as the corresponding set of indicators are equally important and can substitute for each other.  This also overlooks the aspect of inter-dependence of various goals, although it is upfront stated in the exercise.  To ensure minimum robustness of this measure, a geometric average would have served towards avoiding perfect substitutability of one goal with the other.  While this exercise serves as a report card of performance of States as regards compliance with the SDGs, its scientific adequacy is compromised with arbitrariness that presents a stereotypical pattern of performance rather than bringing out surprises.  The choice of indicators representing specific goals need not necessarily be guided by availability but also their explicit independence from one another.  This may help in making a uniform set of indicators for each of the goals with proper representation without duplication.

10. Everyone is afraid of data

Editorial Analysis:  It is important to note that over the past, headlines have focussed on declining employment between 2011-12 and 2016-17; loss of jobs under the National Democratic Alliance government, particularly post-demonetisation; and the government’s refusal to release a report using the Periodic Labour Force Survey (PLFS) documenting this decline, leading to resignations of two members of the National Statistical Commission.  As a matter of fact, in a pre-election, politically charged environment, these developments make for eye-catching headlines.

A Look at Five Important Trends:

Past experiences tell us five things: 1. Firstly, suppression of results seems to be a problem common to all political parties. Census 2011DLSC data on religious distribution of the population was not released until 2015. It is widely believed that these data were ready before the 2014 election, however, some experts believe that the United Progressive Alliance government was worried about inciting

153

passions around differential population growth between Hindus and Muslims and chose not to release the tables. – Similarly, the UNICEF conducted the Rapid Survey on Children (RSOC) 2013-14 on behalf of the Ministry of Women and Child Development but the report was held up by the new government- some critics allege that this was due to the fear that it showed Gujarat in poor light. – Sometimes these concerns lead to lack of investment in data collection itself, as is the case with the National Sample Survey, or the NSS’s Employment-Unemployment surveys (not conducted since 2011-12), forcing public policy to rely on non-comparable statistics from other sources such as the data from the Employees’ Provident Fund Organisation (EPFO). These episodes are likely to recur, and hence, we need a more comprehensive strategy for dealing with them. 2. Secondly, the fear of having statistical reports misquoted is legitimate. We live in a world where appetite for news is incessant and the news cycle is very short. – Statistics that don’t always lend themselves to rapid unpacking into sound bites and headlines are easily misinterpreted. – When Census 2001 results on religion were released, in September 2004, a newspaper led with a story that although the Hindu growth rate between 1981-1991 and 1991-2001 had declined from 25.1% to 20.3%, that for Muslims had gone up from 34.5% to 36%. – Media reports paid little attention to the actual report that highlighted that the 1991 Census was not conducted in Jammu and Kashmir and that after adjusting for it, growth rates for both Hindus and Muslims had declined. When the mistake was discovered, it was blamed on the then Registrar General and Census Commissioner, J.K. Banthia, a highly competent demographer. He was sent into bureaucratic exile while the news media moved on to a new story. 3. Thirdly, it is impossible to bottle up the genie once data are collected and reports prepared. In a world dominated by WikiLeaks, suppressing reports seem to create an even bigger problem, since it allows individuals with exclusive access to act as the interpreters for others. In the instance of the RSOC mentioned above, suppression of the report, coupled with leaked data encouraged speculation by The Economist (July 2015) that the data were being suppressed because Gujarat must have fared poorly on reducing malnutrition. It stated that Bihar had made much greater progress since the proportion of children who go hungry had been cut from 56% to 37% between 2005-6 and 2012-13, while the decline was much smaller in Gujarat, from 44.6% to 33.5%. 4. Fourthly, sometimes leaked results create speculation that is far worse than full disclosure would warrant. The Economist cherry-picked its comparisons. Nutritional status is measured by weight-for-age (underweight) and height-for-age (stunting). – The final report showed that about 41.6% of children in Gujarat were stunted (had low height for their age), This is higher than the nationwide average of 38.7%. – However, improvement in stunting in Gujarat between 2005-6 and 2013-14 was of similar and slightly higher magnitude as that for the nation as a whole: 10.1 versus 9.7 percentage points. DLSC – Moreover, stunting decline in Gujarat was greater than that in Bihar, 10.1 percentage points as opposed to 6 percentage points.

154

– Usually statistics on underweight and stunting should provide a similar picture; when they do not, greater care is required in interpretation. This was not possible because only The Economist seemed to have access to the report and led the headlines. 5. Fifth, statistics often deal with complicated reality and require thoughtful analysis instead of the bare bones reporting contained in typical government reports. The headline in the Business Standard on February 3, 2019 based on the leaked PLFS report, claims that more than half the population is out of labour force; however, the statistics they present show that the trend is dominated by women and the rural population.  Some experts believe that if the full report were available, it would be rural women who would drive the employment story. This is very much a continuation of the trend between 2004-5 and 2011-12 documented by the NSS, under a different government.  It is important to note that between 2004-5 and 2011-12, work participation rates for rural women of working ages (25-64) fell from 57% to 43%.  However, much of this decline was in women working on family farms and in family businesses, from 42% to 27%; decline in wage work was much smaller, from 24% to 21%.  It is important to note that if lower engagement of women with family-based activities such as farming, rearing livestock or engaging in petty businesses drives the decline in employment, we may need to look at declining farm sizes and increasing mechanisation as the drivers of this decline.  Some experts point out that one can blame the government for not creating more salaried jobs for women pushed out of farming and related activities, but it would be hard to blame it for eliminating jobs.  If the full report and unit level data for the PLFS were available, it is possible that we will find a continuation of the trend that started in 2004-5.  This is not to say that demonetisation may not have had a negative impact, particularly in urban India, where Business Standard reports that employment fell from 49.3% to 47.6%, but this is a much smaller decline.  It is also important to note that the urban comparison between the NSS and the PLFS requires caution, particularly for unemployment figures. Whereas the NSS contains independent cross-sectional samples for each sub-round, the PLFS includes a panel component in urban areas where the same households are re-interviewed every quarter.  Since it would be easier to find unemployed individuals than employed individuals for interview, attrition adjustment is necessary before drawing any conclusions. Without access to the full report, it is difficult to tell whether attrition adjustment was undertaken.  An important question arises: How do we get out of this vicious cycle where fear of misinterpretation leads to suppression of data, which in turn fuels speculation and suspicion and ultimately results in our inability to design and evaluate good policies? The only solution is to recognise that we need more openness about data coupled with deeper analysis, allowing us to draw informed and balanced conclusions.  Some experts point out that the onus for this squarely lies with the government. Simply placing basic reports in the public domain is not sufficient, particularly in a news cycle where manyDLSC journalists are in a hurry to file their stories and cherry-pick results to create headlines.

155

Case of Spreading the net wider  Understaffed and underfunded statistical services cannot possibly have sufficient domain expertise to undertake substantively informed analyses in all the areas for which statistical data are required.  A better way of building a robust data infrastructure may be to ensure that each major data collection activity is augmented by an analytical component led by domain experts, recruited from diverse sources, including academia

11. The shape of the jobs crisis

News:  India has no industrial policy or employment strategy to ride the wave of its demographic dividend.

Analysis :

Job creation has slowed down:  Job creation has slowed since 2011-12, the year of the last published National Sample Survey Office (NSSO) labour force survey.  Experts have used Labour Bureau annual survey (2015-16) data and Centre for Monitoring Indian Economy Pvt. Ltd. (CMIE) data (post-2016), which has a sample size larger than the NSSO labour force surveys, to reach this conclusion.  Both surveys cover rural and urban, and organised and unorganised sector employment.  They capture both the Employees’ Provident Fund Organisation/National Pension Scheme (organised) as well as such employment as might be generated by MUDRA loans or platform economy jobs.  The latter two job sources are precisely what the government claims were not being captured by jobs data available.  However, government claims on absence of ‘good’ data on jobs are simply untenable.

A jump now  The leaked NSSO 2017-18 data have shown that while the open unemployment rate (which does not measure disguised unemployment and informal poor quality jobs that abound in the economy) by the usual status never went over 2.6% between 1977-78 and 2011-12, it has now jumped to 6.1% in 2017-18.

More young people have become educated  This was expected as in the last 10-12 years, more young people have become educated.  The tertiary education enrolment rate (for those in the 18-23 age group) rose from 11% in 2006 to 26% in 2016.  The gross secondary (classes 9-10) enrolment rate for those in the 15-16 age group shot up from 58%DLSC in 2010 to 90% in 2016.  The expectation of such youth is for a urban, regular job in either industry or services, not in agriculture.

156

 If they have the financial wherewithal to obtain education up to such levels, they can also “afford” to remain unemployed.  Poor people, who are also much more poorly educated, have a much lower capacity to withstand open unemployment, and hence have lower open unemployment rates.

Unemployed have stopped looking for work  What NSSO 2017-18 also shows is that as open unemployment rates increased, more and more people got disheartened and fell out of the labour force.  In other words, they stopped looking for work.  The result is that labour force participation rates (LFPR, i.e. those looking for work) for all ages, fell sharply from 43% in 2004-5 to 39.5% in 2011-12, to 36.9% in 2017-18 (a reflection mainly though not only of the falling female LFPR).

Growing numbers of youth who are NEETs  This shows up in the growing numbers of youth who are NEETs: not in education, employment or training.  They are a potential source of both our demographic dividend but also what is looking to be a mounting demographic disaster.

Across education categories  A sharp increase in the unemployment rate of the educated should have worried the government.  It is estimated that the unemployment rate rose over 2011-12 to 2016 from 0.6% to 2.4% for those with middle education (class 8);  1.3% to 3.2% for those who had passed class 10;  2% to 4.4% for those who had passed class 12;  4.1% to 8.4% for graduates; and  5.3% to 8.5% for post-graduates.  Even more worrying, for those with technical education, the unemployment rate rose for graduates from 6.9% to 11%, for post-graduates from 5.7% to 7.7%, and for the vocationally trained from 4.9% to 7.9%.

Structural retrogression for Indian Economy  For an economy at India’s stage of development, an increase of workers in agriculture (of 20 million that took place over 1999-2004) is a structural retrogression, in a direction opposite to the desired one.  Between 2004-5 and 2011-12, the number of workers in agriculture fell sharply, which is good, for the first time in India’s economic history.  Similarly, the number of youth (15-29 years) employed in agriculture fell from 86.8million to 60.9 million (or at the rate of 3 million per annum) between 2004-5 and 2011-12.  However, after 2012, as non-agricultural job growth slowed, the number of youth in agricultureDLSC actually increased to 84.8 million till 2015-16 and even more since then (as the CMIE data would attest).  These youth were better educated than the earlier cohort, but were forced to be in agriculture.

157

Drop in manufacturing jobs

 Manufacturing jobs fell in absolute terms, from 58.9 million in 2011-12 to 48.3 million in 2015-16, a whopping 10.6 million over a four-year period.  This is consistent with slowing growth in the Index of Industrial Production (IIP), which consists of manufacturing, mining, and electricity.  The IIP had sharply risen from 100 in 2004-5 to 172 by 2013-14 (in the 2004-5 series), but only rose from a base of 100 in 2011-12 in the later series to 107 in 2013-14, and to 125.3 in 2017-18.  This is also consistent with exports first falling after 2013, then barely recovering to levels still lower than 2013.  It is also consistent with investment-to-GDP ratio falling sharply since 2013, and still remaining well below 2013 levels.  This holds for both private and public investment.

“NEET”: A major concern

 What is tragic is the growing number of educated youth (15-29 years) who are “NEET”.  This number (70 million in 2004-5) increased by 2 million per annum during 2004-5 and 2011-12, but grew by about 5 million per annum (2011-12 to 2015-16).  If that later trend continued it is estimated it would have increased to 115.6 million in 2017- 18.  That is a 32 million increase in “NEETs” in our society over 2011-12 to 2017-18.

Summary:

 These youth (“NEET” and unemployed) together constitute the potential labour force, which can be utilised to realise the demographic dividend in India.  It is estimated that the number of new entrants into the labour force (currently at least 5 million per annum), and especially educated entrants into the labour force will go on increasing until 2030.  It will thereafter still increase, though at a decelerating pace.  By 2040 our demographic dividend — which comes but once in the lifetime of a nation — will be over.  China managed to reduce poverty sharply by designing an employment strategy (underpinned by an education and skills policy) aligned to its industrial strategy.  That is why it rode the wave of its demographic dividend.  It is time India should also devise and align its industrial policy and employment strategy to reap the benefits of its demographic dividend.

12. Is the unemployment crisis for real? DLSC News:  Unemployment Crisis that India is currently facing

158

Analysis: Analysis- I:  The points mentioned here, take the view that employment opportunities, formal jobs and the labour force are all shrinking.  The jobs situation in India does not reflect a crisis, but it is a matter of serious concern.  A crisis is understood as an emergency that demands immediate attention, without which we could see a calamity of sorts. There is no immediate calamity of any kind on hand.  However, having said this, there is a deeply insidious problem at work in the form of shrinking employment opportunities, shrinking formal jobs, and a shrinking labour force.  It is important to note that a populous and demographically young country like India has a lot to gain if the expanding working-age population can join the labour force and be provided with gainful employment.  In essence, more hands at work can ensure greater prosperity and relatively evenly spread growth.

Problems of unemployment:  But if India cannot provide employment to its growing working-age population, it does not just miss a chance to become a prosperous country, but also risks becoming an unmanageable or unruly country.  It is important to note that unemployed youth, beyond a threshold, can lose hope of a job and can easily stray into becoming unsocial elements.  A bigger problem is that those who do get jobs and prosper do not appreciate the plight of those who do not.  It is mistakenly believed that those who do not get good jobs are not worthy of getting them. The blame is placed at the door of the unemployed as if it is entirely their problem.  Critics point out that the macro-economic and social dimension of the problem is not appreciated in India.  It is important to note that statistics give us clues of the brewing problem and its insidious nature. First, we are in the midst of a serious investments deficit.  CMIE’s CapEx database demonstrates the persistent fall in new investment proposals since 2011-12. New investment proposals had peaked at Rs. 25 trillion in 2010-11.  In 2017-18, these were down to Rs. 11 trillion, and in 2018-19, these are unlikely to cross Rs. 10 trillion.  It is important to note that the impact of this fall in investments is visible in shrinking jobs.  In a point-to-point comparison, in 2018, the number of persons employed declined by 11 million.  An estimated 408 million people were employed in December 2017. This fell to 397 million in December 2018. The average employment in 2017 was 406.5 million. This fell to an average of 402.1 million in 2018. This shows a smaller fall of 4.5 million. Either way, we see a very substantial fall in employment. One (11 million) is only much worse than a fairly bad fall of 4.5 million, or 10%. DLSC A Perspective on Labour participation rate:  This fall in jobs is not translating into a proportionate rise in unemployment. But it is showing up in a fall in the labour participation rate.

159

 A rise in unemployment is bad, but a fall in the labour participation rate is worse.  The former reflects a shortage of jobs compared to the number of people looking for jobs. The latter reflects a fall in the number of people looking for jobs.  When we juxtapose this against falling jobs, we see a glimpse of the hopelessness of people who should be looking for jobs.

The crisis is the response:  Some experts point out that our real crisis is in the nature of the government’s response to the situation.  Lastly, critics point out that when the establishment works hard to rubbish sound statistical practices and results of large sample household surveys and instead uses back-of-the- envelope calculations to measure employment, we are headed towards a bigger crisis than the jobs crisis.

Analysis- II:  The points mentioned here, take the view that the methodology used in the surveys is questionable. What India currently has is a wage problem.  Experts opine that the furore around the unemployment issue is ill-founded.  Most of the analysis is based on incomplete representations of the labour market.  Further, the recent surveys that profess spiralling unemployment are either unverifiable or heavily skewed by sampling biases.  This narrative raises questions on the political motivations behind these surveys that may intend to change the perception of India’s growth trajectory, nationally and globally.

What the surveys ignore:  CMIE claimed that the total working population in India declined by 11 million (1.1 crore) in 2018.  Some experts have opined that these preliminary estimates seem opportunistically quoted by the think tank two months ahead of schedule.  CMIE has considered a minuscule sample of 1,40,000 respondents for a nation of more than 1.3 billion citizens.  With regards to the leaked excerpts of the National Sample Survey Office survey, the public has been unduly kept in the dark about the methodology used to compute the claimed 6.1% unemployment rate.  Estimating a macro profile of employment for the country based on a survey of even 2 million participants is not statistically valid without a study of the various components of job creation.  Such surveys have biased weights which have recently been contradicted by more concrete research.  These surveys give higher weight to States with large populations but where less formal jobs are being created.  There is a DLSChigher supply of formal jobs in Maharashtra and in south India than in States like Uttar Pradesh and Bihar.  Another trend which was noticed was that jobs were being created in big cities. However, it is important to note that cities carry less weight in the aforementioned surveys.

160

 A company called Better Place Safety Solutions, which has one of the deepest databases of the formal sector workforce in India, had recently released these revelatory migration trends. Until such biases are removed using actual data, we must reserve judgment.

Creation of formal jobs:  India has been creating formal jobs in large numbers. Further, deliberations based on other proxy databases like vehicle sales, the annual reports of the IT department, and MUDRA loan disbursals help ascertain jobs in large job-creating markets like transport, the professional sector, and small-scale entrepreneurship, respectively.  This provides us with a robust methodology of ascertaining employment.  We have estimated that India requires around 1.5 crore jobs a year.  This is because it has got about 2.5 crore people attaining the age of 21 every year.  We estimate that 40% of this population may not want formal jobs, as they choose agriculture or become homemakers after marriage.  The social security databases point to around 70 lakh jobs created annually (in companies with over 20 employees), the transport sector creates around 30-35 lakh jobs, and the professional sector creates around 6-10 lakh jobs. That’s 1.1 crore jobs from just three sources.  The rest (30-40 lakh jobs) is contributed by people starting their own ventures.  India has not improved on its Ease of Doing Business ranking for nothing, and this sector is expected to generate more employment with support from initiatives like Make in India.  Today, if you talk to employers like shopkeepers and small and large firms, they will tell you that they are not finding enough employees.  This means that there are not enough skilled people in the market.  Lastly, India has a wage problem and not a job problem.  This problem can only be solved by creating higher-quality jobs to meet aspirations.

Analysis- III:  The points mentioned here, take the view that the issue that is more pressing than unemployment is underemployment.  Work is fundamental in determining one’s quality of life.  Indians rely on their jobs to earn a living, to fulfil family obligations, and to satisfy the aspirations that motivate them daily.  Yet jobs that are productive, with fair pay, and that allow citizens to live healthy lives are scarce, and are becoming even more so.

Waiting for a good job:  Leaked data from the National Sample Survey Office’s (NSSO) latest labour force survey suggests that unemployment rose to an all-time high of 6.1% last year (2018).  This is, no doubt, a worrying trend.  Yet the rise in unemployment can largely be explained by the fact that more young people are obtainingDLSC an education.  It is important to note that with education comes the expectation of a ‘better’ job. Those who can afford education also tend to be in a position to wait for a job that meets their requirements.

161

 Those who are not as financially fortunate must find the means to make a living, however poor in quality the work may be.  The data show that unemployment is higher among the educated, and lower among those with less financial means and education.  The need to work to make ends meet also fuels India’s large informal economy.  Over 90% of the employed (farm and non-farm) are informal workers. In the non-farm sector, 66% of those employed are informal workers. The informal economy is characterised by low levels of productivity and low wages because many of these workers are underemployed.  The urgent crisis confronting the economy, then, is underemployment.

Perspective on Underemployment:  Underemployment occurs when workers are unable to find employment that makes use of their qualifications and skills.  For instance, an engineer might be working in a mechanic shop.  Underemployment and/or refers to the sharing of low-productivity work, as is common in agriculture, for example. Or picture a 16-year-old who spends his mornings selling just enough coconuts to make the bare minimum to survive. And these are just examples of visible underemployment.  Persistent underemployment also contributes to the decline in labour force participation rates. As people grow frustrated with their inability to find a good job, they may stop looking for work and drop out of the labour force altogether.  Data from the leaked NSSO labour force survey suggest that the labour force participation rate declined to 49.8% in 2017-18 from 55.9% in 2011-12.  Both underemployment and this form of discouragement are a significant loss of productive potential. This is particularly troubling when it pertains to India’s large and growing youth population.  It is important to note that pathways to productive and high-quality employment are essential to deliver better living standards to citizens, but also for sustainable and inclusive economic growth.

13. Cabinet approves new National Electronics Policy

News:  The Union Cabinet has approved the National Electronics Policy 2019 aimed at achieving a turnover of $400 billion (about ₹26 lakh crore) for the electronics system design and manufacturing sector by 2025, while generating employment opportunities for one crore people.

Analysis:

Need of the policy:DLSC  India is one of the fastest growing economies in the world. But it is lacking in electronics manufacturing sector.

162

 India has a share of about 1.5 per cent in the world in total electronics hardware production. Data for 2014-15 shows that about 58% of domestic consumption is sourced through imports.  India offers the 3 ‘Ds’ for business to thrive— democracy, demography and demand.  A growing middle class, rising disposable incomes, declining prices of electronics and a number of government initiatives have led to a fast-growing market for electronics. The industry has the potential to provide millions of jobs, directly and indirectly.  India has a large domestic market and a number of trained engineers. China, with its rising labour costs, will soon not be the global manufacturing hub. This is an opportunity for India.  GST has reduced the confusion associated with various state and local taxes.  India’s electronics manufacturing has been unable to respond to the rising demand leading to a growing trade deficit.  To help create an ecosystem, the policy has pitched for 2.0 version of the Electronics Manufacturing Cluster Scheme, under which infrastructure support will be provided for a group of industries that are part of the product supply chain rather than individual industries.  It has also proposed a sovereign patent fund to acquire intellectual property.

PRELIMS CARDINAL :

Key features of the Policy  The policy is formed to enable flow of investment and technology, leading to higher value addition in the domestically manufactured electronic products and increased manufacturing of electronics hardware for local use as well as exports  The policy has introduced “easier to implement” incentive schemes, including an interest subvention scheme and credit default guarantee, to replace some of the existing ones under the National Electronics Policy 2012.  It proposes to provide interest subsidy of 4% on loans up to ₹1,000 crore on plant and machinery; in case of larger loans, the subsidy would be limited to ₹1,000 crore.  The government proposes to create a fund to provide default guarantee of up to 75% to banks for plant and machine loans of up to ₹100 crore – this will eliminate the need for small and new investors to provide third-party collateral – the scheme will be on the pattern of credit guarantee being provided by SIDBI for the SME sector

14. Labour Bureau files MUDRA job report

News :  The Labour Bureau has completed its survey on employment generated by the MUDRA loan scheme, giving the Centre a potential data tool to combat other reports showing a dismal scenario on jobs.

Analysis : DLSC Details of the issue  Before stepping down as vice chairman of Niti Aayog in August 2017, Arvind Panagariya, had submitted a report on the recommendations of a task force he had chaired on

163

improving jobs data. One recommendation was to analyse the extent of employment and self-employment generated by MUDRA loans.  In December 2017, faced with mounting criticism on the failure to create job opportunities, the Labour Ministry had asked the Labour Bureau to initiate the survey on jobs created through the MUDRA scheme.  According to reports, a leaked copy of the NSSO’s findings showed that unemployment hit a 45-year high of 6.1% in 2017-18.  Central government ministers and officials have already attempted to use the MUDRA scheme’s performance to combat criticism based on the leaked NSSO job survey report.  Some economists, however, have advised caution in the interpretation of MUDRA data, especially as it relates to jobs. “Every new loan certainly doesn’t imply creation of a new job,” ICRIER fellow Radhicka Kapoor, wrote in a working paper titled ‘Waiting for Jobs’.

NSSO survey  The NSSO’s findings showed that unemployment hit a 45-year high of 6.1% in 2017-18.  Central government ministers and officials have already attempted to use the MUDRA scheme’s performance to combat criticism based on the leaked NSSO job survey report.  Some economists have advised caution in the interpretation of MUDRA data, especially as it relates to jobs.

PRELIMS CARDINAL :

Pradhan Mantri MUDRA Yojana (PMMY) Scheme  The PMMY Scheme was launched in April, 2015. The scheme’s objective is to refinance collateral-free loans given by the lenders to small borrowers.  The scheme, which has a corpus of Rs 20,000 crore, can lend between Rs 50,000 and Rs 10 lakh to small entrepreneurs.  Banks and MFIs can draw refinance under the MUDRA Scheme after becoming member-lending institutions of MUDRA.  Mudra Loans are available for non-agricultural activities upto Rs. 10 lakh and activities allied to agriculture such as Dairy, Poultry, Bee Keeping etc, are also covered.  Mudra’s unique features include a Mudra Card which permits access to Working Capital through ATMs and Card Machines.  There are three types of loans under PMMY: Shishu (up to Rs.50,000); Kishore (from Rs.50,001 to Rs.5 lakh); Tarun (from Rs.500,001 to Rs.10,00,000).

Objectives of the scheme:  Fund the unfunded:DLSC Those who have a business plan to generate income from a non-farm activity like manufacturing, processing, trading or service sector but don’t have enough capital to invest can take loans up to Rs 10 lakh.  Micro finance institutions (MFI) monitoring and regulation: With the help of MUDRA bank, the

164

network of microfinance institutions will be monitored. New registration will also be done.  Promote financial inclusion: With the aim to reach Last mile credit delivery to micro businesses taking help of technology solutions, it further adds to the vision of financial inclusion.  Reduce jobless economic growth: Providing micro enterprises with credit facility will help generate employment sources and an overall increase in GDP.  Integration of Informal economy into Formal sector: It will help India also grow its tax base as incomes from the informal sector are non-taxed.

Labour Bureau  The Labour Bureau is an attached office of Ministry of Labour and Employment  Labour Bureau is responsible for collection and publication of statistics and related information on wages, earnings, productivity, absenteeism, labour turnover, industrial relations, working and living conditions and evaluation of working of various labour enactments etc.  It is a storehouse of important economic indicators like Consumer Price Index Number for Industrial, Agricultural and Rural Labourers;  Wage rate indices and data on industrial relations, social economic conditions in the organized and unorganized sector of industry etc

15. Safety nets – On Unregulated Deposit Schemes Ordinance

News :  The President of India promulgated the Banning of Unregulated Deposit Schemes Ordinance 2019, which bars all deposit schemes in the country that are not officially registered with the government from either seeking or accepting deposits from customers.

Background:  The savings of low-income Indian households have traditionally remained unprotected by the government when compared to those of the more affluent economic groups.  Popular deposit schemes such as chit funds and gold schemes, which as part of the huge shadow banking system usually do not come under the purview of government regulators, have served as important instruments of saving for people in the unorganised sector.  But these unregulated schemes have also been misused by some miscreants to swindle the money of depositors with the promise of unbelievably high returns in a short period of time.

Example:  The Saradha chit fund scam in West Bengal is just one example of such a heinous financial crime against depositors.  The Centre’s latest attempt to curb unregulated deposit schemes through an ordinance reflects a timely recognition of the need for greater legal protection to be offered for those depositors with inadequate financial literacy.

The banning ofDLSC Unregulated Deposit Schemes Bill, 2018:  The banning of Unregulated Deposit Schemes Bill, 2018 was tabled in Parliament on July 18, 2018, and was referred to the Standing Committee on Finance.

165

 The committee submitted its Seventieth Report on the bill to Parliament on January 3, 2019.  The Bill was passed in the Lok Sabha on the last day of the budget session by a voice vote after short discussion, but has not yet been passed by Rajya Sabha.

Editorial Analysis:  The proposed ordinance will immediately tackle the deposit taking activities in the country launched by rapacious operators, which at present are exploiting regulatory gaps and lack of strict administrative measures.  Pursuant to this ordinance now any Individual or group of individuals cannot take any deposit or loan from any person other than relatives, whereas partnership firms can take deposit or loan from relatives or partners only.  Among the provisions is a ban on unregulated deposit taking schemes, punishment and repayment of deposits in cases where such schemes nonetheless manage to raise deposits illegally.  There is a “Substantive Banning” clause that bans the deposit from directly or indirectly promoting, operating, issuing any advertisement soliciting participation or enrolment in or accepting deposits in pursuance of an unregulated deposit scheme.  The law provides for attachment of properties or assets and subsequent realisation of assets for repayment to depositors. Clear-cut timelines have been provided for attachment of property and restitution to depositors  The Ordinance also provides for severe punishment ranging from 1 year to 10 years and pecuniary fines ranging from Rs 2 lakh to Rs 50 crore to act as deterrent.

Benefits of the ordinance:  The ordinance will help in the creation of a central repository of all deposit schemes under operation, thus making it easier for the Centre to regulate their activities and prevent fraud from being committed against ordinary people.  The ordinance allows for compensation to be offered to victims through the liquidation of the assets of those offering illegal deposit schemes.

Challenges in implementation:  The passing of tough laws may just be the easiest of battles in the larger war against illicit deposit schemes.  For one, policymakers will have to make sure that the bureaucrats responsible for the on- ground implementation of the ordinance are keen on protecting the savings of low-income households.  There must also be checks against persons in power misusing the new rules to derecognise genuine deposit schemes that offer useful financial services to customers in the unorganised sector. In fact, in the past there have been several cases of politicians acting in alliance with the operators of fraudulent deposit schemes to fleece depositors of their hard-earnedDLSC money.  Another potential risk involved when the government, as in this case, takes it upon itself to guarantee the legitimacy of various deposit schemes is that it diverts depositors from conducting the necessary due diligence before choosing to deposit their money.

166

Summary:  While the intent of the ordinance, which is to protect small depositors, is indeed commendable, the benefits that depositors will eventually derive from the new legislation will depend largely on its proper implementation.  New rules on unregulated deposit schemes need to be backed up with proper checks.

DLSC

167

INTERNAL SECURITY

DLSC

168

1. Centre bans Kashmir outfit

News :  The Union Home Ministry has banned the Tehreek-ul-Mujahideen (TuM) under the Unlawful Activities (Prevention) Act for promoting terrorism and radicalising and recruiting youth for terrorist activities in India.

Analysis: Tehreek-ul-Mujahideen (TuM)  Set up in the 1990s, TuM claims to be fighting for the “liberation of Kashmir.”  The TuM carried out a number of terrorist attacks besides subversive acts, namely grenade attacks, weapons snatching incidents, supporting other terrorist outfits such as Hizb-ul-Mujahideen (HuM), Lashkar-e-Taiba (LeT), etc. in terms of financial and logistic support in the recent past.”  Objectives :The TuM aims to merge the Indian State of Jammu and Kashmir (J&K) with Pakistan and also promote a pan-Islamist identity. The protection of Asidih community, a small faction of Sunni Muslims, was a prime motivating factor for the outfit in its early days.

PRELIMS CARDINAL :

Unlawful Activities (Prevention) Act (UAPA), 1967  UAPA is anti-terrorist law aimed at effective prevention of unlawful activities associations in India.  Its main objective is to make powers available for dealing with activities directed against integrity and sovereignty of India.  It bans certain terrorist associations, punishes membership and association with such organizations and punishes terrorist activities.  The law been legislated to impose reasonable restrictions in interests of sovereignty and integrity of India on exercise of freedom of speech and expression, to assemble peaceably without arms and to form associations.  Crime under the Act – to support any secessionist movement (is the withdrawal of a group from a larger entity, especially a political entity, but also from any organization, union or military alliance. Threats of secession can be a strategy for achieving more limited goals); to support a foreign power’s claim over Indian territories; threatening economic security of India; raising funds for terrorist activities (including the production and circulation of Fake Indian Currency Notes) DLSC Amends:  1. The Unlawful Activities (Prevention) Amendment Act, 1969  2. The Criminal Law (Amendment) Act, 1972

169

 3. The Delegated Legislation Provisions (Amendment) Act, 1986  4. The Unlawful Activities (Prevention) Amendment Act, 2004  5. The Unlawful Activities (Prevention) Amendment Act, 2008

TuM response:

The ban would be used as an “election plank” by the ruling government. The resolution of Kashmir issue was in India’s interest. It should resolve this issue in the light of UN resolutions. This way this country can get over poverty and hunger.

Summary:  The Ministry said the Jammu and Kashmir Police had in the recent past registered a number of cases, in which it found that the TuM had played a major role in the commission of terrorist acts and a number of its cadres had been arrested.

2. Push for generous rehab scheme for Naga cadres

News:  A Parliamentary panel has recommended the Ministry of Home Affairs (MHA) prepare a detailed and generous rehabilitation-cum-settlement scheme for the cadres of National Socialist Council of Nagaland (Isak-Muivah), the group that signed a Naga Framework Agreement with the Centre in 2015.

Analysis :  A Parliamentary panel on Home Affairs, has urged the Centre to conclude the Naga peace Accord. It has also advocated to formulate a rehabilitation-cum-settlement scheme for the cadres of National Socialist Council of Nagaland Isak-Muivah (NSC-IM).  The NSCN-IM is an insurgent group of Nagas, operating in Nagaland, Assam, Manipur, and Arunachal Pradesh. Its objective is to establish Greater Nagaland (Nagalim) consisting of all Naga inhabited areas in Northeast India and it has spearheaded a rebellion for the same.  The Naga Peace Accord was signed between the Government of India and the Naga armed groups headed by the NSCN-IM in 2015. The accord seeks to end the Naga insurgency.  The parliamentary panel has also raised concerns over Assam government’s decision over the continuance of the Armed Forces (Special Powers) Act (AFSPA) in the state. This is in contrary to the government’s claim that the security situation in Assam has improved.

About NSCM (and historical background):  Nationalist Socialist Council of Nagaland, was formed to advance the Naga cause for sovereignty.DLSC  This organisation has operations in the Naga inhabited regions of India & Myanmar, with easy cross border access.

170

 This group has had major splits. Issac-Muivah faction (NSCN – IM) is currently involved in peace talks with the Indian government, while the Kaplang faction with its major operations in Myanmar is designated as a terror outfit by India.  The NSCN (Isak-Muivah) has been engaged in peace talks with the interlocutor of the Central government since 1997, when it announced a ceasefire agreement after an insurgency movement that started in Nagaland soon after India’s Independence.  The NSCN(K) had signed ceasefire with the Centre in 2001 but unilaterally abrogated (repeal or do away) it in March 2015 when the then chairman of the group, S.S. Khaplang, was alive.  In 2015, the Centre signed a framework agreement with the National Socialist Council of Nagaland-Isak-Muivah (NSCN- IM) to end the long- drawn Naga insurgency after it agreed to give up the demand for sovereignty. Six Naga political groups joined the discussions later.  The Union government has also started separate talks with working committees of six Naga nationalist political groups since 2017.

How different is DAA(Disturbed areas act) from AFSPA?  The DAA is the mini version of the AFSPA; it almost confers the same powers to the armed forces to take control of the state in order to curb the violence.  The only difference is that the DAA is conferred as the power of the state but AFSPA can be invoked either by the Governor of the state or the Central Government.

Current status and issues of AFSPA and DAA in Assam :  Assam was the first state to come under the AFSPA in 1958. The entire state of Assam has been under the Act since November 1990; this was necessitated due to the rise of ULFA’s activities in the region which was at its peak during the 1990’s.  The Union Ministry of Home Affairs has recently expressed its readiness for a partial withdrawal of AFSPA from Assam and Arunachal Pradesh due to the improved security situation in these two states.  According to data obtained from MHA through an RTI in July 2017, 31% of the complaints with regard to human rights violations were received from Assam.

PRELIMS CARDINAL :

Armed Forces (Special Powers) Act (AFSPA)  AFSPA are Acts of the Parliament of India that grant special powers to the Indian Armed Forces and the state and paramilitary forces in areas classified as “disturbed areas”.  It gives powers to the army, state and central police forces to shoot to kill, search houses and destroy any property that is “likely” to be used by insurgents in areas declared as “disturbed”DLSC by the home ministry.  AFSPA is invoked when a case of militancy or insurgency takes place and the territorial integrity of India is at risk.  Security forces can “arrest a person without warrant”, who has committed or even “about

171

to commit a cognizable offence” even based on “reasonable suspicion”.  It also provides security forces with legal immunity for their actions in disturbed areas.  While the armed forces and the government justify its need in order to combat militancy and insurgency, the Act has been associated with several human rights violations including fake encounters, rape, torture, abduction etc.

The salient features of the AFSPA act are:  Governor of a State and the Central Government are empowered to declare any part or full of any state as a disturbed area if according to their opinion that it has become necessary to disrupt terrorist activity or any such activity that might impinge on the sovereignty of India or cause insult to the national flag, anthem or India’s Constitution.  Section (3) of AFSPA provides that, if the governor of a state issues an official notification in The Gazette of India then the Central government has the authority to deploy armed forces for assisting the civilian authorities. Once a region is declared ‘disturbed’ then it has to maintain status quo for a minimum of three months, as per The Disturbed Areas Act of 1976.  Section (4) of AFSPA gives special powers to army officers in disturbed areas to shoot (even if it kills) any individual who violates law / or is suspected to violate law (this includes assembly of five or more people, carrying of weapons) etc. The only condition is that the officer has to give a warning before opening fire.

Violations of the Constitution and International Conventions due to the enactment of the AFSPA  Article 21– Right to life: the power conferred on the army to kill, arrest by force.  Article 22– Protection against arrest and detention: the act has given complete authority to the officers to arrest any person on the said reasonable grounds and there is no stipulated time within which the army has to produce the person before the court.  The violation of the Criminal Procedure Code (CrPC) since the army is not exactly trained to perform the search and seizure operation it is mainly the act of the police which is conferred on the army under AFSPA.  Immunity to the security forces: The members of the armed forces in the whole of the Indian Territory are protected from the arrest for anything done within the line of official duty. The AFSPA provides them with absolute immunity for all the atrocities committed under the AFSPA. If the citizens have to file a suit against a member of the armed forces for the abuses carried out under AFSPA they must first seek the permission of the central government.  AFSPA violates various international conventions such as the . Universal Declaration of Human rights (UDHR), . International Covenant on Civil and Political Rights (ICCPR) . Convention against Torture . UN Code of Conduct for Law Enforcement Officials, . The UNDLSC Body of Principles for Protection of All Persons Under Any Form of Detention, . The UN Principles on Effective Prevention and Investigation of Extra-Legal, Arbitrary and Summary Executions.

172

Summary :  The committee also notes that the State Government of Assam has notified the whole State as disturbed area on the plea that it is not the appropriate time to reduce the area under AFSPA. This is a paradoxical situation that needs to be resolved. The Committee, therefore, recommends that the Central Government and the State Government should hold extensive discussions on the issue and narrow down their perception about the necessity of AFSPA in Assam.

3. Terror monitor keeps Pak. on grey list, seeks action

News :  Condemning the Pulwama February 14 attack, the Financial Action Task Force (FATF), issued a stern statement to Pakistan to comply with an action plan on terror financing or face further action, according to a decision taken at its plenary session in Paris.

Analysis :  The week-long deliberations of the 37-member group decided not to remove Pakistan from the ‘grey list’, as Islamabad had lobbied for, but also did not accept an Indian demand to move Pakistan to the ‘black list’ yet.  Pakistan was put on the ‘grey list’ or watch list of the FATF in June 2018 after a proposal moved by the U.S., the U.K., Germany and France was passed.

What is blacklist and grey list?  FATF maintains two different lists of countries: those that have deficiencies in their AML/CTF regimes, but they commit to an action plan to address these loopholes, and those that do not end up doing enough. The former is commonly known as grey list and latter as blacklist.  Once a country is blacklisted, FATF calls on other countries to apply enhanced due diligence and counter measures, increasing the cost of doing business with the country and in some cases severing it altogether. As of now there are only two countries in the blacklist — Iran and North Korea — and seven on the grey list, including Pakistan, Sri Lanka, Syria and Yemen.  ‘Grey list’ comprises nations that are not doing enough to combat terrorism financing. Blacklist of the FATF that currently features Iran and North Korea – non-cooperative in the global fight against money laundering and terrorist financing, calling them “Non-Cooperative Countries or Territories” (NCCTs).  The ‘grey-listing’ continued despite a last-minute decision by the Pakistan government to put the Jamaat-ud Dawa (JuD) and the Falah-e Insaniat Foundation (FIF), two offshoots of the Hafiz Saeed-led Lashkar-e-Taiba on its ‘schedule-1’ list of banned organisations.

PRELIMS CARDINAL : DLSC Financial Action Task Force (FATF):  The Financial Action Task Force (FATF) is an inter-governmental body established in 1989 on the initiative of the G7. It is a “policy-making body” which works to generate the

173

necessary political will to bring about national legislative and regulatory reforms in various areas. The FATF Secretariat is housed at the OECD headquarters in Paris.  Objectives: The objectives of the FATF are to set standards and promote effective implementation of legal, regulatory and operational measures for combating money laundering, terrorist financing and other related threats to the integrity of the international financial system.  Functions: The FATF monitors the progress of its members in implementing necessary measures, reviews money laundering and terrorist financing techniques and counter- measures and promotes the adoption and implementation of appropriate measures globally.  In collaboration with other international stakeholders, the FATF works to identify national- level vulnerabilities with the aim of protecting the international financial system from misuse.

Summary :  The FATF criticised Pakistan for not demonstrating “a proper understanding” of the terror financing risks posed by “Da’esh (Islamic State), al Qaeda, Jamaat-udDawa, Falah-e- Insaniat Foundation, Lashkar-e-Taiba, Jaish-e-Mohammad, Haqqani Network, and persons affiliated with the Taliban.”  The FATF must impress upon Pakistan the need to take meaningful action.  The world community must make it clear to the Pakistan government the possible international and financial repercussions of ignoring the FATF’s timeline.

4. Pulwama attack and the subsequent India’s Non-military, Preemptive Strikes on terrorist training camps in Pakistan

News :  At least 37 CRPF personnel were killed on February 14th when a convoy in which they were travelling was attacked by a Jaish-e-Mohammed (JeM) suicide bomber, who rammed his explosives-laden vehicle into one of the convoy’s buses near Awantipora on the - Jammu Highway.  Twelve days after the Pulwama attack, the Indian Air Force bombed the Jaish-e- Mohammad’s “biggest” terror training camp in Pakistan’s Balakot.

Analysis :  The bombing in the Lethpora area of Pulwama district also left at least eight jawans critically injured and was the deadliest attack in terms of casualties in the last three decades of militancy in Jammu and Kashmir.  The attack raises questions over security on the national highway, which is patrolled three agencies — the local police, the CRPF and Army — on a daily basis  Immediately after the attack, the JeM claimed responsibility and released a picture of its local operativeDLSC who had carried out the attack. He was identified as Adil Ahmad Dar alias ‘Waqas Commando’, a resident of Pulwama’s Kakapora. According to the police, Dar joined the outfit in 2018 and was a Class 10 dropout.

174

Investigation:  The National Investigation Agency dispatched a 12-member team to probe the attack, working with the Jammu and Kashmir Police.  Initial investigations suggested the car was carrying more than 300 kilograms (660 lb) of explosives including 80 kilograms (180 lb) of RDX, a high explosive and ammonium nitrate.  explosives might have been stolen from a construction site.it was not possible that they were smuggled from across the border, but we could not rule it out  This organization, which is proscribed by the UN, has been responsible for a series of terrorist attacks including on the Indian Parliament in December 2001 and the Pathankot airbase in January 2016.  Information regarding the location of training camps in Pakistan and PoJK has been provided to Pakistan from time to time. Pakistan, however, denies their existence. The existence of such massive training facilities capable of training hundreds of jihadis could not have functioned without the knowledge of Pakistan authorities.  India has been repeatedly urging Pakistan to take action against the JeM to prevent jihadis from being trained and armed inside Pakistan. Pakistan has taken no concrete actions to dismantle the infrastructure of terrorism on its soil.  Credible intelligence was received that JeM was attempting another suicide terror attack in various parts of the country, and the fidayeen jihadis were being trained for this purpose.  In the face of imminent danger, a preemptive strike became absolutely necessary.  In an intelligence led operation in the early hours of the 26th of February, 2019, India struck the biggest training camp of JeM in Balakot. In this operation, a very large number of JeM terrorists, trainers, senior commanders and groups of jihadis who were being trained for fidayeen action were eliminated. This facility at Balakot was headed by MAULANA YOUSUF AZHAR (alias USTAD GHOURI), the brother-in-law of MASOOD AZHAR, Chief of JeM.  The operation was carried out by 12 Mirage-2000 fighter jets, which unleashed five one- tonne bombs on the camp, based 70 km inside the Line of Control (LoC), in the Pakistani province of Khyber Pakthunkhwa.

Details of the attack:  Senior officials citing intelligence inputs said the JeM facility was particularly crowded with 200-325 militants as many had abandoned launch pads and training camps closer to the LoC after the Pulwama attack in the expectation that India would not target Balakot.  The aerial attack on a target inside Pakistani territory marks a major shift in India’s counter- terror responses, which have thus far been restricted to ground operations across the LoC in Pakistan-occupied Kashmir  The Government of India is firmly and resolutely committed to taking all necessary measures to fight the menace of terrorism. Hence this non-military preemptive action was specifically targeted at the JeM camp. The selection of the target was also conditioned by our desire to avoid civilian casualties. The facility is located in thick forest on a hilltop far away fromDLSC any civilian presence.  The Government of Pakistan had made a solemn commitment in January 2004 not to allow its soil or territory under its control to be used for terrorism against India. India expects that

175

Pakistan lives up to its public commitment and takes follow up actions to dismantle all JeM and other camps and hold the terrorists accountable for their actions.

Editorial Analysis:  Experts opine that the Indian Air Force’s strike on a Jaish-e-Mohammad terror training camp in Pakistan’s Balakot delivers a robust but calibrated message.  In effect, New Delhi’s line is that the operation was an intelligence-driven counter-terror strike rather than escalatory military aggression.  The government said all other options had been exhausted in making Islamabad keep its commitments since 2004 on curbing the activities of groups like the JeM.  There is no denying that the decision to send Mirage jets across the Line of Control (LoC) to fire missiles 70 km inside Pakistan represents a major shift.  During the Kargil war in 1999, Prime Minister Atal Bihari Vajpayee had drawn a red line over the IAF crossing the LoC, to avoid international recrimination.

Has the JeM been set back?  It is still to be determined how far the JeM has been set back, but the strikes mark a new chapter with India’s willingness to push the war against terror into Pakistan territory.  The government has judged, perhaps correctly, that global opinion has shifted and there is little tolerance today for terror groups that continue to find shelter on Pakistan soil.  Significantly, with the exception of the Organisation of Islamic Cooperation, there has been no global criticism of India’s statement on the strikes, and most have just counselled restraint to both countries.

Reaction in Pakistan:  In Pakistan, Prime Minister Imran Khan has called for a joint session of Parliament and for its diplomats to raise the matter at international fora.  He has convened a meeting of the National Command Authority that oversees Pakistan’s nuclear policy.  However, Pakistan’s options are limited. It could continue to deny that the Indian strike caused any damage on the ground, and obviate the need for retaliatory strikes; or it could escalate the situation with a military response.  It could also make a break from its past, and begin to shut down the terror camps on its soil, which would win friends internationally and ensure peace in the region.

International community:  The United States condemned the attack and added it would work with India in counterterrorism efforts; it singled out Pakistan for its alleged role in the attack. It urged Pakistan to cooperate with the investigation and punish those responsible.  Pakistan said it was ready to cooperate with such an investigation. A statement from the US Department of State noted that Pakistan-based Jaish-e-Mohammed had claimed responsibilityDLSC for the attack and asked all countries to refrain from supporting terrorists.  Bangladesh, Bhutan, France, Hungary, Israel, Maldives, Nepal, Russia, Singapore, Sri Lanka, Turkey, and the United Arab Emirates, condemned the attack, as did the United Nations Secretary-General.

176

 Iran's Deputy Foreign Minister Abbas Araghchi met with India's External Affairs Minister Sushma Swaraj and referring to both the 2019 Pulwama attack and the 2019 Khash– Zahedan suicide bombing, he stated that Iran and India would work together to prevent future attacks.

Use of Air power for the first time  The first time India has used airpower, and its first venture this deep inside Pakistan. The precedent also raises new challenges before the two countries in responding to each other.  First, the recent airstrikes by the Indian Air Force establishes a new threshold between the two nuclear neighbours for an Indian response to a terror attack. So far, India has either chosen to put diplomatic pressure on Pakistan (after the 26/11 Mumbai terror attack), mobilise its armed forces (after the 2001 Parliament attack) or conducted limited ground- based operations (after the 2016 Uri attack) but has never used the Air Force, that too inside Pakistan.  The use of airpower has been taboo between the two countries, especially after both became declared nuclear powers in 1998, because of the dangers of escalation.  While Pakistan has threatened retaliatory action, the fact remains that a major red-line about use of airpower has been crossed by India now.  Restrictions around the use of airpower are best illustrated by the Kargil War, when the Vajpayee government allowed the IAF to be used, but did not allow it to cross the LoC. As much as it was about respecting the LoC and highlighting Pakistani incursions, it was also about the escalatory dangers of using airpower.  A more important reason making it a watershed is the extent of incursion. Indian operations after the 1971 War have always been limited to the Line of Control and Pakistan-occupied Kashmir, never venturing into mainland Pakistan.

What is the legality of the Indian action? Is it tantamount to war?  International law gives countries the right of self-defence but there is less clarity about preemptive self-defence. Countries like the United States and Israel have invoked this right. This is the first time India has formally spoken of it.  The official statement after the September 2016 surgical strikes also spoke of “very credible and specific information which we received yesterday that some terrorist teams had positioned themselves at launch pads along the Line of Control with an aim to carry out infiltration and terrorist strikes in Jammu & Kashmir and in various other metros in our country”.

Summary:  Experts opine that the government would do well to continue the restrained approach it has adopted after the latest operation, and avoid the triumphalism that clouded the ‘surgical strikes’ of September 2016.  With a response to Pulwama duly executed, it must reach out to residents of J&K who have borne the bruntDLSC of the jingoism unleashed after Pulwama.  In the long term, building strong counter-terror defences, partnering with its own citizens to gather intelligence, and creating deterrents will be key.

177

PRELIMS CARDINAL :

Central Reserve Police Force (CRPF)  CRPF is the largest of India’s Central Armed Police Forces. It functions under the aegis of Ministry of Home Affairs (MHA) of the Government of India.  The CRPF’s primary role lies in assisting the State/Union Territories in police operations to maintain law and order and counter insurgency.  It came into existence as the Crown Representative’s Police on 27 July 1939. After Indian Independence, it became the Central Reserve Police Force on enactment of the CRPF Act on 28 December 1949.  Besides law and order and counter-insurgency duties, the CRPF has played an increasingly large role in India’s general elections. This is especially true for the states of Jammu and Kashmir, Bihar and in the North East, with the presence of unrest and often violent conflict.  During the Parliamentary elections of September 1999, the CRPF played a major role in the security arrangements. Of late, CRPF contingents are also being deployed in UN missions.  With 239 battalions and various other establishments, the CRPF is considered India’s largest paramilitary force and has a sanctioned strength of 313,678 personnel.

Jaish-e-Mohammed (JeM)  JeM is a Deobandi jihadist terrorist group active in Kashmir. The group’s primary motive is to separate Kashmir from India and merge it into Pakistan.  It has carried out several attacks primarily in the Indian state of Jammu and Kashmir. It also maintained close relations with Taliban and Al-Qaeda in Afghanistan and continues to be allied to them.  Jaish-e-Mohammed is viewed as the “deadliest” and “the principal terrorist organisation in Jammu and Kashmir”.  In 2001, 38 people were killed when a three-member JeM squad blew up a car outside the J&K Assembly.  In 2016, Jaish was suspected of being responsible for an attack on the Pathankot airbase in India. The Indian government, and some other sources, accused Pakistan of assisting Jaish in conducting the attack. Pakistan denied assisting Jaish, and arrested several members of Jaish in connection with the attack, who were then released by the security establishment.

DLSC

178

SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY

DLSC

179

1. India’s 40th Communication Satellite, GSAT-31, Launched

News:  The Indian Space Research Organisation (ISRO) has launched its 40th communication satellite GSAT-31 by an Ariane 5 rocket from the spaceport in kourou in French Guiana on February 6.

Analysis: Purpose:  As per ISRO, the GSAT-31 will be used for supporting VSAT networks, television uplinks, digital satellite news gathering, DTH television services, cellular back haul connectivity and many such applications.  It will also provide wide beam coverage to facilitate communication over large oceanic region comprising vast swathes of the Arabian Sea, the Bay of Bengal and the Indian Ocean using wideband transponder.  Besides, two Ku-band beacon downlink signals are transmitted for ground tracking purpose. Launch:  GSAT-31 is configured on ISRO’s enhanced I-2K Bus, utilising the maximum bus capabilities of this type. This satellite will augment the Ku-band transponder capacity in Geostationary Orbit.  GSAT-31 will provide continuity to operational services on some of the in-orbit satellites.  The satellite derives its heritage from ISRO’s earlier INSAT/GSAT satellite series. . Launch Mass: 2536 kg . Mission Life : 15 Years . Launch vehicle: Ariane-5 VA-247 . Type of Satellite: Communication . Manufacturer: ISRO . Owner: ISRO . Application: Communication . Orbit Type: GTO

Summary:

 ISRO has launched its 40th communication satellite GSAT-31 by an Ariane 5 rocket from the spaceport in kourou in French Guiana on February 6 which will be used for supporting VSAT networks, television uplinks, digital satellite news gathering, DTH television services, cellular back haul connectivity and many such applications.  Its high time India depends upon other countries for launch vehicles as ISRO has developed its own GSLV Mk III designed to carry 4 ton class of satellites into GeosynchronousDLSC Transfer Orbit (GTO) or about 10 tons to Low Earth Orbit (LEO)

180

PRELIMS CARDINAL : Ariane flight VA247  Ariane flight VA247 is an Ariane 5 space launch of two geosynchronous satellites that took place on 5 February 2019. Payload:  The total payload mass was approximately 10,018 kilograms (22,086 lb), including the adapters. . Saudi Geostationary Satellite 1/Hellas Sat 4 (SGS-1) . GSAT-31(It is ISRO's 22nd spacecraft orbited by Arianespace).  A European heavy-lift launch vehicle that is part of the Ariane rocket family, an expendable launch system designed by the Centre national d'études spatiales (CNES).  It is used to deliver payloads into geostationary transfer orbit (GTO) or low Earth orbit(LEO).  Manufactured under the authority of the European Space Agency (ESA) and the French spatial agency CNES .  Airbus Defence and Space is the prime contractor for the vehicles, leading a consortium of other European contractors.  Operated and marketed by Arianespace as part of the Ariane programme.  The rockets are launched by Arianespace from the Guiana Space Centre in French Guiana.

Geocentric orbit  An orbit around the planet Earth, such as the Moon or artificial satellites. Currently there are approximately 1,886 artificial satellites orbiting the Earth.

Geostationary orbit  A geostationary orbit, often referred to as a geosynchronous equatorial orbit (GEO), is a circular geosynchronous orbit 35,786 km (22,236 mi) above Earth's equator and following the direction of Earth's rotation.  An object in such an orbit appears motionless, at a fixed position in the sky, to ground observers.  Communications satellites and weather satellites are often placed in geostationary orbits, so that the satellite antennae (located on Earth) that communicate with them do not have to rotate to track them, but can be pointed permanently at the position in the sky where the satellites are located.  Using this characteristic, ocean-color monitoring satellites with visible and near-infrared light sensors (e.g. GOCI) can also be operated in geostationary orbit in order to monitor sensitive changes of ocean environments.  A geostationary orbit is a particular type of geosynchronous orbit, which has an orbital period equalDLSC to Earth's rotational period, or one sidereal day (23 hours, 56 minutes, 4 seconds).  Thus, the distinction is that, while an object in geosynchronous orbit returns to the same point in the sky at the same time each day, an object in geostationary orbit

181

never leaves that position.  Geosynchronous orbits move around relative to a point on Earth's surface because, while geostationary orbits have an inclination of 0° with respect to the Equator, geosynchronous orbits have varying inclinations and eccentricities.

Geostationary transfer orbit (GTO)  A geosynchronous transfer orbit or geostationary transfer orbit (GTO) is a Hohmann transfer orbit—an elliptical orbit  used to transfer between two circular orbits of different radii in the same plane.Used to reach geosynchronous or geostationary orbit using high-thrust chemical engines.

Low Earth orbit (LEO):  Geocentric orbits ranging in altitude from 180 km – 2,000 km (1,200 mi)

A very small aperture terminal (VSAT)  A two-way satellite ground station with a dish antenna that is smaller than 3.8 meters. The majority of VSAT antennas range from 75 cm to 1.2 m. Data rates, in most cases, range from 4 kbit/s up to 16 Mbit/s.  VSATs access satellites in geosynchronous orbit or geostationary orbit to relay data from small remote Earth stations (terminals) to other terminals (in mesh topology) or master Earth station "hubs" (in star topology).  VSATs are used to transmit narrowband data (e.g., point-of-sale transactions using credit cards, polling), or broadband data (for the provision of satellite Internet access to remote locations, or video). VSATs are also used for transportable, on-the-move (utilising phased array antennas) or mobile maritime communications.

I-2K  A satellite bus developed by Indian Space Research Organisation (ISRO), and marketed by Antrix Corporation.  It is a standard bus for 2,000 kg class satellites.  The 'I' in I-2K stands for INSAT(Indian National Satellite System), a group of communication satellites developed and launched by ISRO.  The satellite buses developed by ISRO are specifically developed for small and medium weight satellites.  I-2K spacecraft bus can supply DC power up to 3000 watts.  I-2K platform is targeted towards satellites in liftoff mass in range of 1500–2500 kg

The NATO K bandDLSC  The obsolete designation given to the radio frequencies from 20 to 40 GHz (equivalent to wavelengths between 1.5 and 0.75 cm) during the cold war period. Since 1992 frequency allocations, allotment and assignments are in line to NATO Joint Civil/Military

182

Frequency Agreement (NJFA).  However, in order to identify military radio spectrum requirements, e.g. for crises management planning, training, electronic warfare activities, or in military operations, this system is still in use.  The Radio Regulations of the International Telecommunication Union allow amateur radio and amateur satellite operations in the frequency range 24.000 GHz to 24.250 GHz, which is known as the 1.2-centimeter band. It is also referred to as the K band by AMSAT

Ku band  The Ku band is the portion of the electromagnetic spectrum in the microwave range of frequencies from 12 to 18 gigahertz (GHz).  The symbol is short for "K-under" ,because it is the lower part of the original NATO K band, which was split into three bands (Ku, K, and Ka) because of the presence of the atmospheric water vapor resonance peak at 22.24 GHz, (1.35 cm) which made the center unusable for long range transmission.  In radar applications, it ranges from 12-18 GHz according to the formal definition of radar frequency band nomenclature in IEEE (The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers)Standard .  Ku band is primarily used for satellite communications, most notably the downlink used by direct broadcast satellites to broadcast satellite television, and for specific applications such as NASA's Tracking Data Relay Satellite used for both space shuttle and International Space Station (ISS) communications,terrestrial microwave communications, and radar, especially police traffic-speed detectors.

The Ka band  A portion of the microwave part of the electromagnetic spectrum defined as frequencies in the range 26.5–40 gigahertz (GHz), i.e. wavelengths from slightly over one centimeter down to 7.5 millimeters.The band is called Ka, short for "K-above" because it is the upper part of the original NATO K band.  The 30/20 GHz band is used in communications satellite uplinks in either the 27.5 GHz and 31 GHz bands and high-resolution, close-range targeting radars aboard military airplanes.  Some frequencies in this radio band are used for vehicle speed detection by law enforcement.  The Kepler Mission used this frequency range to downlink the scientific data collected by the space telescope.  The designation "Ka-band" is from Kurz-above, which stems from the German word "kurz" meaning short.  In satellite communications, the Ka band allows higher bandwidth communication.  It is used in the Inmarsat I-5 system[6] and will be used in the Iridium Next satellite series, as well as the James Webb Space Telescope.  The Ka bandDLSC is more susceptible to rain attenuation than is the Ku band, which in turn is more susceptible than the C band.  The frequency is commonly used by cosmic microwave background experiments.

183

 The 5th generation mobile networks will also partially overlap with Ka band (28, 38, and 60 GHz).  mainly used for radar and experimental communications.

K-band  18–27 GHz: Due to the 22 GHz water vapor absorption line this band has high atmospheric attenuation and is only useful for short range applications.

Indian heavy payload launcher  GSLV Mk III is a three-stage heavy lift launch vehicle developed by ISRO. The vehicle has two solid strap-ons, a core liquid booster and a cryogenic upper stage.  GSLV Mk III is designed to carry 4 ton class of satellites into Geosynchronous Transfer Orbit (GTO) or about 10 tons to Low Earth Orbit (LEO)  This is in developmental stage.

2. In a first, Air Force commissions aerial surveillance

News:  The Indian Air Force (IAF) has commissioned the development of an aerial surveillance system for monitoring suspicious movements under dense foliage cover along the international border and some parts within the country.

Analysis: Features:  To locate and identify suspicious movements a hyper spectral imagery programme, a first for the country is expected to be operational in the next two years.  India will have multi-sensor data fusion that will help identify an adversary for the first time.  The programme is meant for data gathering from aerial sources which will be processed within minutes and researchers would be able to tell security forces on the ground of “unwanted” human presence in the area, their numbers and locations, among other inputs.  This unique patent application will help identify the presence of a human below trees, dense foliage, shrubs or inside a structure, whether it is day or night. It can detect human presence from air even if there a cloud cover, dense fog or snow cover.  Data/images will be captured through optical and infra-red sensors to be most likely mounted on an unmanned aerial vehicle and processed through deep learning algorithms.  The IAF is spending ₹13 crore for the programme in which human resources from premier research and education institutions across the country are being put together.

Indigenisation in IAF:  India is one of the largest importers of defence equipment with almost seventy percent of our requirements being procured from foreign OEM(original equipment manufacturer)s.  Even for theDLSC defence equipment and systems that are produced within the country, there is a sizeable dependency on foreign OEMs for their sub systems and components.  The Indian Air Force constantly endeavours to modernise and expand to effectively address emerging threat perception.

184

 IAF has a well-established indigenisation organization in place with the Directorate of Indigenisation as the nodal agency for all aspects related to indigenisation.  HQ Maintenance Command at Nagpur spearheads most of our indigenisation activities through various Base Repair Depots (BRDs) spread across the country. The focus of indigenisation in the IAF has so far been limited to addressing the requirement of spares for first line to fourth line maintenance of aircraftand systems.  As a result of concerted efforts over the last decade or so, IAF has been able to achieve indigenisation of more than 90% mandatory and Automatic Replenishment System (ARS)spares for a significant proportion of its fleets.  Having achieved a satisfactory level of indigenisation of spares required for first line tofourth line maintenance of aircraft, IAF has shifted its focus to indigenisation of complex and high end spares to achieve the desired serviceability of various weapon platforms and systems.  There is a huge potential in Indian private industry that needs to be tapped for meeting the indigenisation requirements of IAF with an aim to reduce our dependence on foreign OEMs.  India is developing UAVs that are capable of flying on solar power. Developed by DRDO (Defence Research and Development Organisation, New Delhi and Hindustan Aeronautics Limited, Bangalore)

Summary:  Following recent horrifying suicide bomber attack leading to martyrdom of 40 proud Indian soldiers,humiliation faced by Indian defence before the InterNational community due to the failing of our IAF strategies,Pakistan taking in to its custody one of the IAF’s operational crew and further GOI getting him back in to the country at the mercy of Pakistan,deploying advanced technologies in to Indian defence is the need of the hour.  IAF is spending ₹13 crore for the programme in which human resources from premier research and education institutions across the country are being put together for the development of an aerial surveillance system for monitoring suspicious movements under dense foliage cover along the international border and some parts within the country.

PRELIMS CARDINAL : Existing UAVs in Indian Defence:  DRDO Abhyas  Gagan UAV Israeli model  DRDO AURA  IAI-HAL NRUAV Israeli model  DRDO Fluffy  NAL Slybird  DRDO Imperial Eagle  NAL / ADE Black Kite  DRDO Kapothaka  NAL / ADE Golden Hawk  DRDO Lakshya  NAL / ADE Pushpak  DRDO Netra  Dhaksha  DRDO Nishant  Pawan UAV  DRDO Rustom  ADE Nishant  DRDO UlkaDLSC  Maraal

185

3. The Table that defines chemistry turns 150

News:  The majestic table of elements that hangs on the walls of chemistry classrooms across the world has turned 150 years old in 2019.  The United Nations General Assembly and UNESCO have decided to celebrate 2019 as the “International Year of the Periodic Table of Chemical Elements (IYPT2019)”.

Analysis:

Periodic Table and Mendeleev  The Periodic Table of Elements was written by Dmitri Ivanovich Mendeleev on 17th February 1869.  Mendeleev was not the first one to create a table of elements. Earliest of such efforts was due to the father of modern chemistry, Antoine Lavoisier in 1789 who classified them in terms of their properties.  John Newlands introduced the concept of octaves in chemistry, wherein properties repeat for every eighth element. There were other attempts too. However, the proposal of Mendeleev was unique.  Mendeleev’s finding was that the elements, if arranged according to their atomic weights, exhibit an evident stepwise variation of properties. Today, all the 118 elements are put in the periodic table based on the periodic law.  Modern periodic law states that,“the properties of the elements are periodic functions of their atomic numbers.”This restatement is due to Moseley who worked on the topic in 1913.Here,we must note that Mendeleev related the properties to atomic weights at a time when atomic numbers, or number of protons in the atomic nucleus was unknown.  While putting together all the 63 elements known at that time, his periodic table placed four slots between the known ones with question marks. He labeled them with a prefix, eka. All eka elements were discovered subsequently: eka-aluminum (gallium) in 1875; eka-boron (scandium) in 1879; eka-silicon (germanium) in 1886 and eka-manganese (technitium) in 1937. Periodic table predicted the properties such as metallicity, density, melting point, etc., of the eka elements.  Mendeleev put emphasis on chemical properties. As a result, in a few cases systematically increasing atomic weights did not match well with chemical properties.  He hesitatingly placed tellurium before iodine with a question mark, although tellurium is heavier than iodine. Today we know that his placing was indeed justified.  Mendeleev had a compelling reason to discover the periodic table. He was deeply concerned about the prevailing systematization of chemical knowledge and decided to write textbooksDLSC (Principles of Chemistry, Vol. I & II). He could cover only eight elements in his first volume of the book, which was finished in January 1869 and wanted to condense information in the form of a table for the second volume. It is said that the first version of the Table appeared in his dream.

186

 The element 101 is named as Mendelevium (Md). Although narrowly missed the Nobel Prize of 1906, he became one of the 15 scientists to be remembered with an element, a more illustrious recognition considering that 181 have won a Nobel Prize in chemistry so far.

PRELIMS CARDINAL ::

United Nations General Assembly  The United Nations General Assembly (UNGA or GA;AG) is one of the six principal organs of the United Nations (UN),the only one in which all member nations have equal representation,and the main deliberative, policy-making,and representative organ of the UN.  Formation:4 November 1946; 72 years ago  Type:United Nations specialised agency  Legal status:Active  Headquarters:Paris, France  Head:Director-General Audrey Azoulay  Parent organization:United Nations Economic and Social Council

Its powers are: 1) to oversee the budget of the UN, 2) appoint the non-permanent members to the Security Council, 3) appoint the Secretary-General of the United Nations, 4) receive reports from other parts of the UN, 5) make recommendations in the form of General Assembly Resolutions. It has also established numerous subsidiary organs.  The General Assembly currently meets under its president or secretary-general in annual sessions at the headquarters of the United Nations in New York City, the main part of which lasts from September to December and part of January until all issues are addressed.  It can also reconvene for special and emergency special sessions. Its composition, functions, powers, voting, and procedures are set out in Chapter IV of the United Nations Charter.  The first session was convened on 10 January 1946 in the Methodist Central Hall in London and included representatives of 51 nations.

Voting:  Voting in the General Assembly on certain important questions, namely, recommendations on peace and security, budgetary concerns, and the election, admission, suspension or expulsion of members is by a two-thirds majority of those present and voting.  Other questionsDLSC are decided by a straight forward majority.  Each member country has one vote. Apart from approval of budgetary matters, including adoption of a scale of assessment, Assembly resolutions are not binding on the members.

187

 The Assembly may make recommendations on any matters within the scope of the UN, except matters of peace and security under Security Council consideration. The one state, one vote power structure potentially allows states comprising just five percent of the world population to pass a resolution by a two-thirds vote.  It now has 193 member states,of which more than two-thirds are developing countries.  Because of their numbers, developing countries are often able to determine the agenda of the Assembly (using coordinating groups like the G77), the character of its debates, and the nature of its decisions. For many developing countries, the UN is the source of much of their diplomatic influence and the principal outlet for their foreign relations initiatives.  Although the resolutions passed by the General Assembly do not have the binding forces over the member nations (apart from budgetary measures), pursuant to its Uniting for Peace resolution of November 1950,the Assembly may also take action if the Security Council fails to act,owing to the negative vote of a permanent member, in a case where there appears to be a threat to the peace, breach of the peace or act of aggression.  The Assembly can consider the matter immediately with a view to making recommendations to Members for collective measures to maintain or restore international peace and security.

The United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organization(UNESCO)  A specialized agency of the United Nations (UN) based in Paris.  Its declared purpose is to contribute to peace and security by promoting international collaboration through educational, scientific, and cultural reforms in order to increase universal respect for justice, the rule of law, and human rights along with fundamental freedom proclaimed in the United Nations Charter.  It is the successor of the League of Nations' International Committee on Intellectual Cooperation.  UNESCO has 193 member states and 11 associate members.Most of its field offices are "cluster" offices covering three or more countries; national and regional offices also exist.  UNESCO pursues its objectives through five major programs: education, natural sciences, social/human sciences, culture and communication/information.  Projects sponsored by UNESCO include literacy, technical, and teacher-training programs, international science programs, the promotion of independent media and freedom of the press, regional and cultural history projects, the promotion of cultural diversity, translations of world literature, international cooperation agreements to secure the world's cultural and natural heritage (World Heritage Sites) and to preserve human rights, and attempts to bridge the worldwide digital divide.  It is also a member of the United Nations Development Group.  UNESCO's aim is "to contribute to the building of peace, the eradication of poverty, sustainableDLSC development and intercultural dialogue through education, the sciences, culture, communication and information".Other priorities of the organization include attaining quality Education For All and lifelong learning, addressing emerging social and ethical challenges, fostering cultural diversity, a culture of peace and building

188

inclusive knowledge societies through information and communication.  The broad goals and objectives of the international community—as set out in the internationally agreed development goals, including the Millennium Development Goals (MDGs)—underpin all UNESCO strategies and activities.

 Below is the list of people whose names are used in chemical element names. Of the 118 chemical elements, 19 are connected with the names of 20 people. 15 elements were named to honor 16 scientists. Four other elements have indirect connection to the names of non-scientists. Only gadolinium and samarium occur in nature; the rest are synthetic.  Samarium, Gadolinium, Americium, Curium, Berkelium, Einsteinium, Fermium, Mendelevium,Nobelium, Lawrencium, Rutherfordium, Seaborgium, Bohrium, Meitnerium, Roentgenium, Copernicium, Flerovium, Livermorium, Oganesson

4. Antibiotic-resistant NDM-1 gene found in pristine Arctic

News:  The recent detection of the antibiotic resistant (AR) gene NDM-1, first isolated in India, in the Arctic region is a further indication of the globalisation of antimicrobial resistance, said a study.

Analysis:  The World Health Organization (WHO) is afraid of a post-antibiotic world, where loads of bacteria are superbugs.  A post-antibiotic era – in which common infections and minor injuries can kill – far from being an apocalyptic fantasy, is instead a very real possibility for the 21st Century.  Already, infections like tuberculosis, gonorrhea, and pneumonia are becoming harder to treat with typical antibiotics.  The discovery of antibiotics less than a century ago was a turning point in public health that has saved countless lives. Although antibiotic resistance develops naturally with normal bacterial mutation,DLSC humans are speeding it up by using antibiotics improperly.  According to a research, now, 2 million people a year in the US develop antibiotic-resistant infections, and 23,000 of them die of those infections.

189

Combating Antimicrobial Resistance in India  “WHO’s ﬁrst global report on antimicrobial resistance (AMR) in 2014 reveals that it is no longer a prediction for the future. AMR is happening right now, it is not a country specific issue but a global concern that is jeopardizing global health security.  AMR is of particular concern in developing nations, including India, where the burden of infectious disease is high and healthcare spending is low. The country has among the highest bacterial disease burden in the world. Antibiotics, therefore, have a critical role in limiting morbidity and mortality in the country.  governments, medical associations, and hospitals must also commit to tackling the antibiotic crisis together. That is what the health-care community in India is doing.  Still, the AMR threat remains real;containing it will require concerted effort. In India, for example, we must implement the regulation, formulated by the Indian Health Ministry, controlling over-the-counter sales of antibiotics.  The WHO’s advice should strengthen support for this move.  In 2012, India’s medical societies adopted the Chennai Declaration, a set of national recommendations to promote antibiotic stewardship.  Last year, Prime Minister Narendra Modi used his monthly radio address to urge doctors to join the effort.

Suggestions:  First step would be to limit antibiotic use.  If a patient has a virus, for instance, an antibiotic won’t work, so doctors shouldn’t prescribe antibiotics even if the patient insists.  When patients do need antibiotics, it’s important to make sure they take the full course to kill off every last infection-causing germ.  Otherwise the strong survive, mutate, and spread.  As a society, curbing antibiotic use in healthy animals used in human food production is another important step.  “AMR has huge implications for India. There is a need to have in place a good comprehensive AMR National Action Plan in line with the Global AMR action plan,”

Summary:  Technology is always a boon to the community until its usage is known and is used optimally.  Every launch of new technology should also be associated with awareness programmes regarding DLSCits benefits and the harm to avoid the negativity taking over the benefits.  Evolution of multi drug resistant microbes widely is a matter of concern and would time travel us to the preantibiotic era if not addressed soon.

190

PRELIMS CARDINAL : Antibiotic  An antibiotic is a type of antimicrobial substance active against bacteria and is the most important type of antibacterial agent for fighting bacterial infections.  It cant be used against viral,fungal,other infections except bacteria.

AMR,ABR,MDR,XDR,TDR,SUPER BUG  Antimicrobial resistance (AMR or AR) is the ability of a microbe to resist the effects of medication that once could successfully treat the microbe.  The term antibiotic resistance (AR or ABR) is a subset of AMR, as it applies only to bacteria becoming resistant to antibiotics.  Resistant microbes are more difficult to treat, requiring alternative medications or higher doses of antimicrobials.  These approaches may be more expensive, more toxic or both. Microbes resistant to multiple antimicrobials are called multidrug resistant (MDR).  Those considered extensively drug resistant (XDR) or totally drug resistant (TDR) are sometimes called "superbugs".

New Delhi metallo-beta-lactamase 1 (NDM-1)  New Delhi metallo-beta-lactamase 1 (NDM-1) is an enzyme that makes bacteria resistant to a broad range of beta-lactam antibiotics.  It transforms some bacteria found in the gut, like Escherichia coli and Klebsiella pneumoniae, into superbugs.

The World Health Organization  The World Health Organization (WHO) is a specialized agency of the United Nations that is concerned with international public health.It was established on 7 April 1948, and is headquartered in Geneva, Switzerland. The WHO is a member of the United Nations Development Group. Its predecessor, the Health Organisation, was an agency of the League of Nations.  Since its establishment,it has played a leading role in the eradication of smallpox.  Its current priorities include communicable diseases, in particular HIV/AIDS, Ebola, malaria and tuberculosis; the mitigation of the effects of non-communicable diseases such as sexual and reproductive health, development, and aging; nutrition, food security and healthy eating; occupational health; substance abuse; and driving the development of reporting, publications, and networking.  The WHO is responsible for the World Health Report, the worldwide World Health Survey, and World Health Day.  The current Director-General of the WHO is Tedros Adhanom, who started his five-year term on 1 July 2017.

WHO classificationDLSC of antibiotics2017  In 2017, the World Health Organization, in an effort to address these challenges, classified antibiotics into three groups and issued guidance for how each class of drugs

191

should be used to treat 21 of the most common infections. . The first of these groups consists of medicines that should always be available to patients, preferably by prescription. . The second tier includes which are increasingly ineffective. . The third group, “last resort” antibiotics, are drugs that must be used sparingly and only for medical emergencies. . Overall Economic Impact Much Higher AMR Costs Societal Costs Medical Costs Source: Roberts et al CID 2009; 49:1147-84. . Reduced consumer income, employment, savings . Increased national investment, spending, healthcare delivery . Reduced gross domestic product (GDP): 1.4% to 1.6%

WHO Antimicrobial resistance: global report on surveillance 2014  The report is the most comprehensive picture to date, with data provided by 114 countries High levels of resistance found in all regions of the world Significant gaps exist in tracking of antibiotic resistance Looking at 7 common bacteria that cause serious diseases from bloodstream infections to gonorrhoea  How can infections be prevented in the first place to reduce the need for antibiotics? . Better hygiene . Access to clean water and sanitation . Infection control in healthcare facilities . Vaccination  Summary:Antibacterial Resistance 1. High proportions of resistance were reported in all regions to common treatments for bacteria causing infections in both healthcare settings and in the community 2. Antibacterial resistance has a negative effect on patient outcomes and health expenditures 3. Treatment options for common infections are running out 4. Despite limitations, the report demonstrates worldwide magnitude of ABR and surveillance gaps  Summary:Surveillance of Antibacterial Resistance 1. Gaps are largest where health systems are weak 2. There is no on surveillance standards: • What samples and information to collect • How to agreement analyse samples • How to compile and share data 3. Obtained national data was usually based on proportions of resistant bacteria rather than proportions of resistant bacteria causing specific diseases or affecting defined populations 4. The report provides a benchmark for future surveillance progress  AMR in Food-ProducingDLSC Animals and Food Chain 1.Major gaps exist in surveillance and data sharing

192

2. Integrated surveillance systems would enable data comparison from food- producing animals, food products and humans 3. Surveillance is hampered by lack of implemented global standards 4. WHO is pursuing a multi-sectoral approach by collaborating with the Food and Agriculture Organization (FAO), the World Organisation for Animal Health (OIE) and other stakeholders  Surveillance of Antimicrobial Resistance: Needs and Next Steps Vision: “To achieve a monitoring capacity that will capture the global situation of antimicrobial resistance, and inform decision-making.” Towards integrated surveillance of AMR In humans and animals and in disease specific programs Immediate steps will focus on ABR Standards for global surveillance Collaborative platform for surveillance. World Health Assembly May 2014 In January 2014, the Executive Board approved a draft resolution co-sponsored by several Member States: “Combating antimicrobial resistance, including antibiotic resistance”

5. India to have own DNS for safe browsing

News:  The government will soon roll out a public Domain Name Server, or DNS, for India aimed at providing a faster and more secure browsing experience for Internet users in the country, while ensuring that citizens’ data is stored locally. Analysis:  Reports suggest that cross-border data flows contributed $2.8 trillion to the global economy in 2014, which is expected to touch $11 trillion by 2025. Data has often been referred to as the new oil, an economic resource, that is fuelling the fourth industrial revolution.

Summary: The currency of the modern age is personal information. The battles would be over who controls data,Vying against each other are those societies that believe that individuals have an absolute right to control their personal data—to exercise the same kind of dominion over data that they do over their bodies or their personal property.

PRELIMS CARDINAL : DNS  A DNS is a like a phonebook for the Internet.  Humans access information online through domain names, like abcd.com or pqrs.co.in etc.  Web browsers interact through Internet Protocol (IP) addresses.  DNS translates domain names to IP addresses so browsers can load Internet resources. DLSC Indian DNS  The roll-out will be executed by the National Informatics Centre – the technology arm of the government.

193

 NIC is already using the public DNS within the government network.  The users are not mandated to shift to India public DNS. A user is free to choose any DNS.  If you use any public DNS, they access and use all your data.  The government’s public DNS, Indian users’ data would be stored within the country, thereby creating a move for Data Localization.

Utility  The main aim of bringing our own public DNS is to ensure availability, particularly for smaller Interest Service Providers (ISPs) who don’t have credible DNS.  Bigger ones usually have their own DNS..  There are other open DNS servers, including Google Public DNS.  The government’s DNS would prevent users from visiting malicious websites.  If the government wants to block a website, there is a mechanism in place.  The Govt can send a list to the ISPs for reasons such as child porn or fake news, and they have to comply with the order.  The ministry, as part of its ongoing awareness campaign for safer Internet, also plans to reach out to end-users to educate them on DNS and how they could shift to an Indian public DNS if they desired.

National Informatics Centre (NIC)  National Informatics Centre (NIC) was established in 1976, and has since emerged as a “prime builder” of e-Government / e-Governance applications up to the grassroots level as well as a promoter of digital opportunities for sustainable development.  NIC, through its ICT Network, “NICNET”, has institutional linkages with all the Ministries /Departments of the Central Government, 36 State Governments/ Union Territories, and about 708 District Administrations of India.  Facilitating improvement in government services, wider transparency, promoting decentralized planning and management, resulting in better efficiency and accountability to the people of India.  “Informatics-led-development” programme of the government has been spearheaded by NIC to derive competitive advantage by implementing ICT applications in social & public administration. DLSC Data localization  Data localization or data residency law requires data about a nations' citizens or residents be collected, processed, and/or stored inside the country, often before being

194

transferred internationally, and usually transferred only after meeting local privacy or data protection laws, such as giving the user notice of how the information will be used and obtaining their consent.  In some cases, data about a nation's citizens or residents must also be deleted from foreign systems before being removed from systems in the data subject's nation. concerns  Technology companies and multinational organizations often oppose data localization laws because they impact efficiencies gained by regional aggregation of data centers and unification of services across national boundaries.  Some vendors, such as Microsoft, have used data storage locale controls as a differentiating feature in their cloud services.

International treaties and laws  While the Trans-Pacific Partnership included language that would have prohibited data localization restrictions among participants,the treaty was abandoned and never took effect.  After Germany and France either passed or nearly passed data localization laws, the European Union was considering restrictions on data localization laws in 2017.  Data localization laws are often seen as protectionist and would thus violate European Union competition law.

National security  Most nations restrict foreign transfer of information that they consider related to national security, such as military technology.

Reserve Bank of India’s notification on Payment Data Storage 2018,  In recent times, there has been considerable growth in the payment ecosystem in the country. Such systems are also highly technology dependent, which necessitate adoption of safety and security measures, which are best in class, on a continuous basis.  It is observed that not all system providers store the payments data in India. In order to ensure better monitoring, it is important to have unfettered supervisory access to data stored with these system providers as also with their service providers / intermediaries/ third party vendors and other entities in the payment ecosystem. It has, therefore, been decided that:  All system providers shall ensure that the entire data relating to payment systems operated by them are stored in a system only in India. This data should include the full end-to-end transaction details / information collected / carried / processed as part of the message / payment instruction. For the foreign leg of the transaction, if any, the data can also be stored in the foreign country, if required.  System providers shall ensure compliance of (i) above within a period of six months and report complianceDLSC of the same to the Reserve Bank latest by October 15, 2018.  System providers shall submit the System Audit Report (SAR) on completion of the requirement at (i) above. The audit should be conducted by CERT-IN empaneled auditors certifying completion of activity at (i) above. The SAR duly approved by the

195

Board of the system providers should be submitted to the Reserve Bank not later than December 31, 2018.  The directive is issued under Section 10(2) read with Section 18 of Payment and Settlement Systems Act 2007,  RBI’s diktat has followed the draft data protection law recommended by Srikrishna committee in July/August.  This covered not only card payment services by Visa and MasterCard but also of companies such as Paytm, WhatsApp and Google which offer electronic or digital payment services.  Many companies are yet to comply with this rule and the RBI has not specified any fines or penalties for the delay.

NDCP-2018  National Digital Communications Policy-2018 (NDCP-2018) and re-designation of the Telecom Commission as the "Digital Communications Commission”. Impact:  The NDCP-2018 envisions supporting India's transition to a digitally empowered economy and society by fulfilling the information and communications needs of citizens and enterprises by establishment of a ubiquitous, resilient and affordable digital communications infrastructure and services.  The ‘Customer focused’ and ‘application driven’ NDCP-2018 shall lead to new ideas and innovations, after the launch of advanced technology such as 5G, IOT, M2M, etc. which shall govern the telecom sector of India.

Guidelines for Government Departments for Contractual Terms related to Cloud Storage 2017  The ministry of electronics and IT issued guidelines on setting up of IT infrastructure by government departments using cloud computing technology with a clause mandating that all data must be stored within the country.  The guidelines for government departments on contractual terms related to cloud services said since the data can be located in one or more discrete sites in foreign countries, therefore, the condition for data location has to be specifically mentioned in the agreement with the service provider.  The cloud computing service enables its user to hire or use software, storage, servers as per requirement instead of purchasing the whole system.  Cloud computing can help government departments expand capacity of their IT system as per need and even for short period and quickly start any online service.  The cloud computing system can be of help to departments specially in handling sudden load of web traffic generated to access their websites like in case of train ticket booking, form filling or tax submission on a last date etc. “...the department is required to move away from the traditional fixed payment model to a variable pricing / utility pricing model where the DLSCdepartment pays for the resources it actually uses during that period.  The guidelines on cloud computing follows MeghRaj Policy (cloud policy) to provide strategic direction for adoption of cloud services by the government.

196

Justice Sri Krishna Committee

Justice Srikrishna said data privacy is a burning issue and there are three parts to the triangle. “The citizen’s rights have to be protected, the responsibilities of the states have to be defined but the data protection can't be at the cost of trade and industry.” The report has proposed penalities for violations, criminal proceedings, setting up of a data authority, provision of withdrawal of consent and concept of consent fatigue.

DLSC

197

ENVIRONMENT

DLSC

198

1. Fundraiser to secure 96 elephant corridors News:  At a time when a recent survey found seven elephant corridors in the country impaired, the Asian Elephant Alliance, an umbrella initiative by five NGOs, has come together to secure 96 out of the 101 existing corridors used by elephants across 12 States in India.  The joint venture is aiming at raising £20 million (₹16 crore) to secure the 96 remaining elephant corridors, old and new, in the next ten years. The alliance joined hands to raise the mammoth sum.as money was the main constraint in securing the land.  NGOs Elephant Family, International Fund for Animal Welfare, IUCN Netherlands and World Land Trust have teamed up with WTI in the alliance.

Analysis:  Nearly 40% of elephant reserves are vulnerable, as they are not within protected parks and sanctuaries. Also, the migration corridors have no specific legal protection.  According to report titled “Right of Passage”, published by the Wildlife trust of India, 7 elephant corridors in Jharkhand, Uttar Pradesh, Assam, West Bengal, Meghalaya, Arunachal Pradesh and Uttarakhand have been impaired due to land use changes.  Out of 101 elephant corridors identified by the WTI in its 2012-15 study, five of them — two in Meghalaya and one each in Assam, Kerala and Karnataka — have already been secured by the WTI with the help of conservation partners and the support of State governments.  Elephant Corridor Consultative Workshops were conducted in all the States where the 101 corridors are located. The land will be handed over to the State governments after the securement. “Almost all the land owners close to the elephant corridors are cooperating since they are severe human-elephant conflict zones. It took 11 years to secure the lands of the Thirunelli-Kudrakote corridor. WTI undertakes rehabilitation services for land owners,”  In January 2019, the Supreme Court of India held that elephants have the first right on the forest and added that humans cannot encroach upon elephant habitats and corridors Elephant Corridors and the problem  Elephant corridors are narrow strips of land that connect two large habitats of elephants.  The movement of elephants is essential to ensure that their populations are genetically viable. It also helps to regenerate forests on which other species, including tigers, depend.  Elephant corridors are also crucial to reduce animal fatalities due to accidents and other reasons. So fragmentation of forests makes it all the more important to preserve migratory corridors.  Forests that have turned into farms and unchecked tourism are blocking animals’ paths. Animals are thus forced to seek alternative routes resulting in increased elephant-human conflict.  Weak regulation of ecotourism is severely impacting important habitats. It particularly affects animals that have large home ranges, like elephants. Suggestions:  Ending humanDLSC interference in the pathways of elephants is more a conservation imperative.  Efforts should be to expand elephant corridors, using the successful models within the country. This includes acquisition of lands using private funds and their transfer to the government.

199

Summary:  Every year, India loses nearly 400 people and about 50 elephants to man-animal conflict due to ever shrinking habitat of animal. While most of tiger habitat falls within protected area, only 22% of elephant habitat has some kind of protection. Majority of elephant population in country is living around human dominated landscapes which have become hotbeds of human elephant conflict. Besides, elephants are also facing threat of extinction form habitat loss, along with ivory poaching.  In this deteriorating scenario, Asian Elephant Alliance has come up with a hope giving initiative for conserving the national heritage animal of India.

PRELIMS CARDINAL : Elephant Family  Elephant Family is an international NGO dedicated to protecting the Asian elephant from extinction in the wild. It funds pioneering projects across Asia to reconnect forest fragments, prevent conflict and fight wildlife crime. Founded in 2002, Head quarterd in United Kingdom.

The International Fund for Animal Welfare (IFAW)  IFAW is one of the largest animal welfare and conservation charities in the world. The organization works to rescue individual animals, safeguard populations, preserve habitat, and advocate for greater protections. Founded in 1969, New Brunswick, Canada. Headquartered in Washington, D.C., United States

International Union for Conservation of Nature (IUCN)  IUCN; officially International Union for Conservation of Nature and Natural Resources is an international organization working in the field of nature conservation and sustainable use of natural resources. It is involved in data gathering and analysis, research, field projects, advocacy, and education. IUCN's mission is to "influence, encourage and assist societies throughout the world to conserve nature and to ensure that any use of natural resources is equitable and ecologically sustainable".  Over the past decades, IUCN has widened its focus beyond conservation ecology and now incorporates issues related to sustainable development in its projects.  The organization is best known to the wider public for compiling and publishing the IUCN Red List of Threatened Species, which assesses the conservation status of species worldwide.

World Land Trust (WLT)  WLT(formerly the World Wide Land Conservation Trust) is a UK-based non- profit environmental organization established in 1989. Its primary aims are to ensure conservation of plants, animals and natural communities in areas at risk. For this purpose, it privately funds the purchase of large tracts of land by local NGOs for the purposesDLSC of protecting it.  WLT also seeks to help in-situ conservation measures by providing training, capital and equipment for environmental stewardship in economically backward areas. World Land

200

Trust also provides a service to offset the carbon emissions of individuals and businesses and runs a widespread tree planting operation. It is affiliated to the World Conservation Union.

Wildlife Trust of India (WTI)  The WTI is an Indian nature conservation organisation to conserve wildlife and its habitat and to work for the welfare of individual wild animals. WTI has been credited for achieving conservation milestones such as Recovering population of critically endangered species, Translocation of Species, Reducing Human-Animal Conflict, Rescue and Rehabilitation of Animals including Elephants, Tigers, Leopards, One-horned Rhino and Bears.  WTI was formed in November 1998 in response to the rapidly deteriorating condition of wildlife in India. WTI is a registered charity in India (under Section 12A of the Income Tax Act, 1961).

Efforts for the conservation of the Elephant : Madras Wild Elephant Preservation Act, 1873  Efforts for the conservation of the Elephant in India were initiated in 1873 with the promulgation of the Madras Wild Elephant Preservation Act, 1873.

Schedule I of the Wildlife (Protection) Act, 1972  The elephant has been accorded the highest possible protection under the Indian wildlife law through its listing under Schedule I of the Wildlife (Protection) Act, 1972 of India. This means that hunting/trading this species can attract rigorous imprisonment of up to seven years and a minimum fine of 25000 INR.

Endangered on the IUCN Red List  Since 1986, the Asian elephant has been listed as Endangered on the IUCN Red List as the wild population has declined by at least 50% since the 1930s to 1940s, i.e. three elephant generations. The Asian elephant is threatened by habitat loss, degradation and fragmentation.

CITES Appendix I  Listed on CITES (Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species) Appendix I (about 1200 species, are species that are threatened with extinction and are or may be affected by trade) prohibits all commercial international trade of the species.

National Heritage Animal  October 22, 2010 - India's Environment Ministry has declared the elephant a National Heritage Animal in order to increase protective measures.

“World ElephantDLSC Day”  On 12 August 2016, India formally adopted the “World Elephant Day” to help conserve and protect elephants in India and improve their welfare.

201

 The World Elephant Day was launched on 12 August 2012 globally to mobilize attention and support for conservation of Asian and African elephants.

Project Elephant  “Project Elephant, Division in the M0EFCC, was established in the year 1992, to promote conservation and welfare of elephants in the country. Since then it has been dealing with four major issues that is destruction, fragmentation and degradation of elephant habitats, poaching of elephants for tusks to meet demand of ivory in national and international markets; human-elephant conflicts and issues relating to captive elephants  Provides financial and technical support of wildlife management efforts by states for their free ranging populations of wild Asian Elephants.  It’s a centrally sponsored scheme.

Aim:  The project aims to ensure long-term survival of viable conservation reliant populations of elephants in their natural habitats by protecting the elephants, their habitats and migration corridors.  Other goals of Project Elephant are supporting research of the ecology and management of elephants, creating conservation awareness among local people, providing improved veterinary care for captive elephants.

Objectives:  To protect elephants, their habitat & corridors  To address issues of man-animal conflict  Welfare of captive elephants  Project Elephant has also established the MIKE (Monitoring of Illegal Killing of Elephants) programme of CITES

2. Human-elephant conflict kills 1,713 people, 373 pachyderms in 3 years

News:  In a response to Parliament, Dr. Mahesh Sharma, Minister of State in the Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change (MoEFF), said damage to houses and crops had been reported in several States. Data presented by him showed that the highest numbers of human casualties had occurred in West Bengal (307 deaths), followed closely by Odisha (305).  In the three years between 2015 and 2018, human-elephant conflict caused 1,713 human and 373 elephant deaths by unnatural causes, including electrocution and poaching. Experts say various factors, including habitat disturbance and urbanization, could be the cause of the alarming rise in unnatural human and animal casualties.  In 2018 alone, Dr. Sharma said, 227 people were killed by wild elephants in 16 States, with Assam reportingDLSC the highest number (86).

202

Analysis:

West Bengal  human-elephant conflict in West Bengal dates back three decades. “In the 1980s, elephants in the Dalma Wildlife Sanctuary would be confined to the Dalma hills, as food and water was available for them. When cultivation of paddy began in the plains near the hills, elephants began moving downwards to raid crops. Villagers chased them away and elephants began moving all the way to the southern portion of West Bengal.Since elephants were not confined to a restricted environment, widespread conflict between humans and animals increased.The fragmented landscape in West Bengal makes it difficult to prevent elephant or human deaths.

Odisha  the growing number of mines would continue to be a problem for elephants there.Elephants move from Odisha and Jharkhand to Chattisgarh.The Chhattisgarh population, however, is unaccustomed to the presence of elephants in their midst.This leads to many accidents. Key Causes of Elephant and Human deaths  Deaths caused by electrocution stood at 226, contributing to 60.6% of deaths since 2015, according to the data.  In comparison, elephant deaths by all other causes, including train accidents, poaching and poisoning,added up to 147.  The data showed that the mean number of elephant deaths per year would be 56.6 — a worrying statistic  presence of low hanging wires.  Some are retaliatory in nature.  rise in elephant population in certain parts of the country.  Habitat degradation is a major cause of elephant deaths. While compact landscapes like ones in the Nilgiris provide little space for interaction between wild elephants and people, disturbed landscapes, like Thevaram in Tamil Nadu’s Theni district,are linear forests and hence lead to issues such as crop raiding and human deaths.

Solutions:  Localised solutions need to be made for elephant-related problems.  Policy shouldDLSC be formed to provide solutions suited to the particular geography.  Ecological restoration of existing natural habitats and migratory routes of elephants.  Development of scientific and planned management for conservation of elephant habitats and viable population of Wild Asiatic elephants in India

203

 Promotion of measures for mitigation of man elephant conflict in crucial habitats and moderating pressures of human and domestic stock activities in crucial elephant habitats.  Strengthening of measures for protection of Wild elephants form poachers and unnatural causes of death.  Eco-development and Veterinary care.  Community participation in the protection of crop lands and elephants.  Recognising problems like deforestation.  Construction of physical barriers such as barbed wire fences, solar powered electric fences, and bio-fencing using cactus and boundary walls, to prevent the entry of elephants into agricultural land.  Situation analysis of each death must be done by the Forest Department to ascertain the cause of the death.

3. Caught down the wire: Punjab’s blackbuck fight for existence

News: According to the Punjab State government data as many as 25 blackbucks died in 2018.

Analysis:  The recent incidents of death of Blackbucks have raised concern among the civil society and Punjab government.  Blackbuck was notified as the state animal of Punjab in 1989 and its presence in the state is confined only to Abohar Wildlife Sanctuary, Fazilka.  The antelope is native to and found mainly in India,while it is extinct in Bangladesh.Formerly widespread Blackbucks used to cover the entire subcontinent of India except for the Western coast,only small, scattered herds are seen today, largely confined to protected areas.During the 20th century, blackbuck numbers declined sharply.  In the late 1800s, groups as large as 8000-10,000 in number could be seen in the East Punjab savannas, whereas now, it is rare to see blackbuck herds larger than 30-50.While in 1947, there were around 80,000 blackbucks, in less than 20 years, it had fallen to 8,000 by 1964.  By the 1970s, blackbuck was locally extinct in several areas. Nevertheless, populations in India have increased to 50,000 in 2001

PRELIMS CARDINAL :

The blackbuck  The blackbuck (Antelope cervicapra) is an antelope indigenous to the India plains hence also known as the Indian antelope.  It is also found in India, Nepal and Pakistan.  The blackbuckDLSC has been introduced in Argentina and the United States.  it stands out of all due to the adult male horns which are spirally twisted, V-shaped, and covered with pronounced ridges nearly to the tips.  The Females are generally hornless.

204

 It is considered to be the fastest animal next to Cheetah.  Blackbucks are primarily grazers. HABITAT  semi-arid plains consisting agricultural fields, intermittent fallow/barren lands, scattered sand dunes, sand mounds and ridges and frequent open short grassland, but they can survive in semi-desert where there is sufficient vegetation, and they often frequent nearly barren salt pans. However, they avoid woodland and shrubland.  Blackbuck has significance in Hinduism; Indian and Nepali villagers do not harm the antelope.

Reasons why the blackbuck is endangered:  HUNTING  Until India's independence in 1947, blackbuck was hunted in many princely states with specially trained captive Asiatic cheetahs.  Bollywood actor Salman Khan was just convicted in his infamous blackbuck poaching from 1998 and was sentenced to five years in jail. Sonali Bendre, Saif Ali Khan, Tabu, and Neelam -- the others who were accused -- have been acquitted of all charges.  DEFORESTATION AND HABITAT DEGRADATION  Open areas are a primary requirement for the growth of the blackbuck population as the mothers need space and safety to give birth and nurse the young ones till they are strong enough. As more and more open areas are taken in for construction or are fenced, there is a severe lack of space.  When native grass, herbs and plants are destroyed or annually cleared, the animal species depending on these floras also get endangered. Moreover, species of grass which are exotic or sprayed with pesticides are also a big problem.  CONSTRUCTION WORK  creates massive ruckus in habitable zones of the blackbuck which disturbs the animal population.  STRAY DOGS  Another danger zone is the substantial rise in the population of stray dogs, leading to organised hunting by them in packs like feral dogs, targeting fawns(that need to hide among tall grass till they are nursed to strength)/sub-adults and expecting females. Keeping the number of dogs in check is a necessity to protect blackbucks.  AUTOMOBILES  and the increasing number of the same is another problem for the animals as they can get killed by speeding cars.  STRAY CATTLE  Population of stray cattle in the sanctuary areas is rising as farmers from nearby districts prefer to abandon their unproductive cattle due to the protective behaviour of community towards all animals. The growing population of stray animals also competes with blackbucksDLSC for the already shrinking open grass lands, resulting in their migration to adjoining areas outside the sanctuary.  BARBED WIRES AND NETS o Fencing agricultural fields, especially with cobra wires that have blade-edged iron wire

205

mesh, has been a major cause of worry, and a key reason behind causing fatal injuries to blackbucks during dog attacks. o locals trying to save their crops from stray cattle put up barbed wires and nets. o This restricts the free movement of blackbucks, putting them under stress, besides causing severe and fatal injuries especially from cobra wires during dog chase incidents. o The injured animals are very easily predated upon by dogs. o The district administration recently issued a notification for banning the sale and use of Cobra Wires in the district under section 144 of CrPC for protecting the wild animals in the Abohar Wildlife Sanctuary.  Other unnatural reasons for blackbuck deaths include falling into water storage tanks and concrete drains.

Conservation Least Concern according to the IUCN red list. The International Union for Conservation of Nature (IUCN)

 IUCN is a membership Union uniquely composed of both government and civil society organisations. It provides public, private and non-governmental organisations with the knowledge and tools that enable human progress, economic development and nature conservation to take place together.  Created in 1948, IUCN has evolved into the world’s largest and most diverse environmental network. It harnesses the experience, resources and reach of its 1,300 Member organisations and the input of some 13,000 experts.  IUCN is the global authority on the status of the natural world and the measures needed to safeguard it. Its experts are organised into six commissions dedicated to species survival, environmental law, protected areas, social and economic policy, ecosystem management, and education and communication.  The IUCN Red List of Threatened Species is the world's most comprehensive inventory of the global conservation status of plant and animal species.  It uses a set of quantitative criteria to evaluate the extinction risk of thousands of species. These criteria are relevant to most species and all regions of the world  With its strong scientific base, The IUCN Red List is recognized as the most authoritative guide to the status of biological diversity. IUCN Red List of Threatened Species

The IUCN Red List Categories

 The IUCNDLSC Red List Categories define the extinction risk of species assessed. Nine categories extend from NE (Not Evaluated) to EX (Extinct).  Critically Endangered (CR), Endangered (EN) and Vulnerable (VU) species are considered to be threatened with extinction.

206

Appendix III of CITES CITES (the Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora)  an international agreement between governments. Its aim is to ensure that international trade in specimens of wild animals and plants does not threaten their survival.  CITES was drafted as a result of a resolution adopted in 1963 at a meeting of members of IUCN (The World Conservation Union). The text of the Convention was finally agreed at a meeting of representatives of 80 countries in Washington, D.C., the United States of America, on 3 March 1973, and on 1 July 1975 CITES entered in force.  The original of the Convention was deposited with the Depositary Government in the Chinese, English, French, Russian and Spanish languages, each version being equally authentic.  States and regional economic integration organizations adhere voluntarily. States that have agreed to be bound by the Convention are known as Parties. Although CITES is legally binding on the Parties – in other words they have to implement the Convention – it does not take the place of national laws. Rather it provides a framework to be respected by each Party, which has to adopt its own domestic legislation to ensure that CITES is implemented at the national level.

Schedule I of the Wildlife Protection Act of 1972 The Wildlife Protection Act, 1972 of the Parliament of India enacted for protection of plants and animal species. Among other reforms, the Act established schedules of protected plant and animal species; hunting or harvesting these species was largely outlawed. The Act provides for the protection of wild animals, birds and plants; and for matters connected there with or ancillary or incidental thereto. It extends to the whole of India, except the State of Jammu and Kashmir which has its own wildlife act. It has six schedules which give varying degrees of protection.  Schedule I and part II of Schedule II provide absolute protection - offences under these are prescribed the highest penalties.  Species listed in Schedule III and Schedule IV are also protected, but the penalties are much lower.  Schedule V includes the animals which may be hunted.  The specified endemic plants in Schedule VI are prohibited from cultivation and planting. The hunting to the Enforcement authorities have the power to compound offences under this Schedule (i.e. they impose fines on the offenders).

Protected areas in India  in Gujarat: Velavadar Wildlife Sanctuary, Gir Forest National Park;  in Bihar: Kaimur Wildlife Sanctuary;  in Maharashtra: Great Indian Bustard Sanctuary;  in MadhyaDLSC Pradesh: Kanha National Park  in Rajasthan: Tal Chhapar Sanctuary, National Chambal Sanctuary, Ranthambhore National Park  in Karnataka: Ranibennur Blackbuck Sanctuary;

207

 in Tamil Nadu: Point Calimere Wildlife and Bird Sanctuary, Vallanadu Wildlife Sanctuary, Guindy National Park

4. Vet institute, ambulances mooted in ₹98 crore lion conservation plan

News:  Three months after at least 20 lions in Gujarat succumbed to a virus, the Centre and the Gujarat governments have announced a Asiatic Lion Conservation Project.

Analysis: Need for the project  Asiatic Lion, a pantherine cat, is listed as ‘Endangered’ under the IUCN Red List  It is exposed to severe threats in the Gir region like . growing lion population, . shrinking habitat, . vulnerability to diseases, . death from linear infrastructure such as road, rail and electric fences . man-animal conflict.

Details of the project  The Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change, Government of India has launched the “Asiatic Lion Conservation Project” with an aim to protect and conserve the world’s last ranging free population of Asiatic Lion and its associated ecosystem.  The conservation project which has a “Species Conservation over a large landscape” focuses on . disease management, . habitat improvement and eco-development, . making more sources of water available . robust wildlife health service with a dedicated veterinary institute, . lion ambulances”, . back-up stocks of vaccines . addressing to man-wild animal conflict issues, . voluntary relocation of Protect Area inhabitants (Maldhari tribe), . monitoring and tracking of animals, . creating a wildlife crime cell, . ecotourism. . a task force for the Greater Gir region  It would also involve having in place a GPS-based tracking system, which would look at surveillance tracking, animal and vehicle tracking.  There would also be an automated sensor grid that would have magnetic sensors, movement sensors and infra-red heat sensors.  The projectDLSC also seeks to divide The Greater Gir Region that includes, area other than the existing Gir National Park, sanctuaries in Girnar, Pania and Mitiyala, into various zones and formulate various “zone plans and theme plans” for their management.

208

Funding:  Total budget of the project for 3 years that amounts to nearly Rs. 9784 lakh will be funded from the Centrally Sponsored Scheme- Development of Wildlife Habitat (CSS-DWH) with the contributing ratio being 60:40 of Central and State share.

Translocation of lions  The big cat population in Gujarat is the last of the Asiatic lions in the wild.  In 2013, the Supreme Court had issued an order in this regard. Under this, lions from Gujarat are to be relocated to the Kuno sanctuary in Madhya Pradesh.

Reason for translocation:  This was ordered as a check against the threat of epidemic.  A smaller population with limited genetic strength are more vulnerable to diseases and calamities than a large and widespread population.  The court noted how 30% of the lion population in Tanzania’s Serengeti was killed due to an outbreak of a viral disease. Asiatic lion has been restricted to only one single habitat i.e. the Gir National Forest and its surrounding areas.  So an outbreak of possible epidemic or natural calamity might wipe off the entire species. Very recently, after the series of deaths, the Supreme Court has asked the Central government to look into it.

Gujarat unwilling to relocate  Gujarat has been unwilling to relocate its lions, calling them “its pride”. Gujarat has responded that lions are now spread over the Greater Gir region and this reduces the threat.  When ill, lions are routinely picked up, medically treated, and then released. It thus said that good conservation practices and intensive wildlife healthcare had lead to epidemic free regime.  It has also said that the lions there are metapopulations in the State, which may be geographically separate but have interactions and an exchange of individuals. So the current Asiatic lion population is not a single population confined to one place. It consists of “metapopulation spread over several locations within the Greater Gir Region”.

Issues with conservation in protected areas  When wild animals go extinct locally, they are reintroduced as in the case of tigers in Sariska, Rajasthan.When hungry, they are fed artificially, and even provided salts as supplements. In other parts of India, wild animals are funnelled through artificial trenches, barriers and fences.  But this is wildlife conservation in the age of man, where protected areas sometimes resemble zoos. In nature, wildlife conservation concerns itself with maintaining ecological processes and reducing threats to endangered species.  This does DLSCnot entail treating wild animals for disease as done for domestic animals. As it is not conducive to the ‘natural’ process of life and death, goes against the natural selection processes, and ultimately compromises immunity. So intensive artificial medical treatment of wild animals does not augur well for long-term sustainability.

209

Status of translocation  There is a committee of experts from both States examining the suitability of Madhya Pradesh as a potential lion reserve. Secondly, we also have to comply with certain guidelines of the International Union for Conservation of Nature (on selecting suitable habitat, translocation),”  The Kuno-Palpur Wildlife Sanctuary in Madhya Pradesh was identified to be the most suitable for reintroducing the species, according to a Supreme Court-appointed technical expert committee, but there has been no progress on the proposal.

Summary: “The Asiatic Lion Conservation Project” will strengthen the ongoing measures for conservation and recovery of Asiatic Lion with the help of state-of-the –art techniques/ instruments, regular scientific research studies, disease management, Modern surveillance/ patrolling techniques.

PRELIMS CARDINAL :

Gir Protected Area Network.  1648.79 sq. km. that includes Gir National Park, Gir Sanctuary, Pania Sanctuary, Mitiyala Sanctuary adjoining reserved forests, Protected Forests, and Unclassed Forests.

Metapopulation  A group of populations that are separated by space but consist of the same species. These spatially separated populations interact as individual members move from one population to another.

Conservation DLSCefforts for Asiatic Lion  Sheopur introduction of 1904 The Maharaja of Gwalior, on being encouraged by Lord Curzon in 1904, imported cubs

210

of African lions and attempted to introduce them in the wild in the forests near Sheopur. The introduced lions took to raiding livestock and some even turned to man-eating, subsequent to which they were all eventually tracked down and shot.  Nawab of Junagadh imposed a ban 1910 For the first time in the year 1910. The Nawab of Junagadh imposed a ban on the hunting of lions within the boundaries of his province. The ban was continued even when India gained independence in 1944.  The Chandraprabha relocation of 1957 The concept of reintroduction for purposes of conservation was accepted in 1956 by the Indian Wildlife Board during a meeting of their executive committee at Sasan Gir and the offer by the state government of Uttar Pradesh to host a second population in the Chakia forests was accepted. In 1956 one lion and two lionesses were captured from Gir, placed in the Sakkarbuagh Zoo in Junagadh for nine months and translocated in 1957 to the 96 square kilometres (37 sq mi) Chandra Prabha Sanctuary, newly established for the reintroduction, near Varanasi in Uttar Pradesh. An enclosure was created with a 3 metres (9.8 ft) high barbed wire fence within the sanctuary in which the lions were temporarily housed before being released in the sanctuary. Initially the lions prospered increasing in number to four in 1958, five in 1960, seven in 1962 and eleven in 1965 after which the population died out inexplicably.  The Wildlife Institute of India initiative The WII began studying the Asiatic lion in its habitat in from 1986 onwards and collected fundamental data about the lion, its feeding, use of habitat and ranging habits. Key findings of the study were that the lions largely preyed upon the wild herbivores such as sambar (Rusa unicolor) and chital (Axis axis) and that the size of home range was 70 square kilometres (27 sq mi) for females and 140 square kilometres (54 sq mi) for the males. In 1990, the WII proposed the creation of a second wild population of Asiatic lions to safeguard the species against potential calamities in Gujarat's Gir National Park.  1993 PHVA report(Population and Habitat Viability Assessment) In 1993, a workshop was held on the Population and Habitat Viability Assessment (PHVA) of Asiatic lion and the report was presented to the state forest departments in Vadodara, Gujarat. State forest departments were asked to suggest suitable sites for reintroduction and provide the basic ecological data. During the workshop, a number of teams were formed to focus on varied aspects of the conservation biology of the Asiatic lion such as monitoring, habitat (further subdivided into Gujarat, Madhya Pradesh and Rajasthan sub-groups), population modelling, prey-base requirements, lion-human interactions, translocation, captive zoo animals, public education, veterinary, reproductive and genetic aspects etc The sites were assessed and ranked for suitability as follows:  Kuno Wildlife Sanctuary - found most suitable for reintroduction.  Sita Mata DLSCWildlife Sanctuary - later rejected due to human interference and inadequate prey population.  Darrah - Jawahar Sagar Wildlife Sanctuary - later rejected due to degraded habitat and unsuitable geography.

211

 Kumbhalgarh Wildlife Sanctuary - assessed as having limited area, unsuitable terrain, limited water and prey base as well as disturbance.  Barda Wildlife Sanctuary - assessed as having scarcity of water, prey and forage, as well as encroachment and disturbance.  The PHVA report strongly favoured the scientific management of reintroduction of Asiatic lions to another site.  The PHVA deliberations were followed by visits to the three most promising site, viz Kuno, Darrah-Jawaharsagar and Sitamata WLS.  The team evaluated sites over various parameters and compared the same with respect to Gir Forest for determining the suitability of sites.  They presented their findings in 1995 to the Government of India and the state forest departments.  WII researchers confirmed that the Palpur-Kuno Wildlife Sanctuary was the most promising location to re-establish a free ranging population of the Asiatic lions and in 2007 certified it ready to receive its first batch of translocated lions.

Project framework  The framework of the Lion Introduction Project emerged from the transformation of a Monitoring Committee, set up by the Government of India, which met on 10 March 2004 for effective implementation of the reintroduction at Kuno.  At the meeting the WII Site Survey was examined and it was understood that Kuno Palpur Sanctuary was the most suitable site for reintroduction. The Committee formulated a three phase framework for the conservation project to last for two decades as follows :  During the first phase, slated from 1995-2000, the 24 villages would be shifted out of the sanctuary and the habitat would be improved.  The second phase would last from 2000 to 2005 and would include fencing off of the lion reintroduction site, the actual trans-location, as well as research and monitoring.  The final phase III would last from 2005 to 2015 and would focus on eco-development of the region.  At that point in time, the project was in Phase II and 18 of the 24 villages had been rehabilitated from Kuno.  The refusal of Gujarat state to provide lions was mentioned during this meeting by the Chief Wildlife Warden of Gujarat.  A number of steps were approved with consensus which included the engaging of the Gujarat State Government as to the necessity of the project, preparation of a translocation road map, fresh assessment of prey base of Kuno by WII and continued funding support for welfare measures and habitat improvement for the existing fauna at Kuno.  In 1960s and 1970s, Gir forest, the home of the last surviving Indian lions, was converted into a National Park and Sanctuary.  The conservation of Asiatic Lions has always been a priority of Government of India. The Ministry in the past has supported Asiatic Lion in Gujarat by including it in list of 21 critically endangeredDLSC species for recovery programme and financial assistance under the species recovery component of CSS-DWH. Presently, Kuno Project is being undertaken with a view to reduce the overcrowding at Gir.

212

CITES Appendix I about 1200 species, are species that are threatened with extinction and are or may be affected by trade. Commercial trade in wild-caught specimens of these species is illegal (permitted only in exceptional licensed circumstances). Captive-bred animals or cultivated plants of Appendix I species are considered Appendix II specimens

IUCN ENDANGERED Asiatic lion was categorised as endangered in 2008 An endangered species is a species of wild animal or plant that is in danger of extinction throughout all or a significant portion of its range.

5. ‘Flying bulldog’: world’s largest bee spotted again

News:  The world’s largest bee,a giant insect roughly the size of a human thumb, xxhas been rediscovered in a remote part of Indonesia in its first sighting in nearly 40 years.

Analysis:  A search team of North American and Australian biologists found a single female Wallace’s giant bee (Megachile pluto) living inside a termites’ nest in a tree, more than two metres off the ground.  Indonesia is home to an abundant variety of flora and fauna but there are fears for some animal and insect communities as forests being cut down for agriculture threaten many species’ natural habitat.  Several previous expeditions to the region where the bee lives failed to spot it.  As long as an adult thumb, with jaws like a stag beetle and four times larger than a honeybee, Wallace’s giant bee is not exactly inconspicuous.  Despite its size, the bee remained elusive, with almost nothing known about the female’s secretive life cycle  The bee was not seen again by scientists until 1981, when Adam Messer, an American entomologist, rediscovered it on three Indonesian islands. He observed how the bee used its giant mandibles to gather resin and wood for its termite-proof nests.  Last year it was discovered that an entomologist had collected a single female in 1991 but his discovery was never recorded in a scientific journal. Also last year, a freshly collected dead specimen was spotted on an online auction site, but the rediscovery of a live female raises hopes that Indonesia’s forests still harbour this species. DLSC

213

Summary:  Discovered in 1858,been missing since 1981,the giant bee Megachile pluto was spotted recently in Indonesian North Moluccas island and faces severe threat of habitat degradation and from collectors. It has been given vulnerable status in IUCN Redlist.  “putting the news out about this rediscovery could seem like a big risk given the demand, but the reality is that unscrupulous collectors already know that the bee is out there.it is vital that conservationists made the Indonesian government aware of the bee and took steps to protect the species and its habitat.By making the bee a world-famous flagship for conservation,a point of pride for the locals there the species has a brighter future than if we just let it quietly be collected into oblivion”experts from global conservation opined.

PRELIMS CARDINAL: It is the largest known living bee species. It was believed to be extinct until several specimens were discovered in 1981; there were again no further confirmed sightings until two were collected and sold on eBay in 2018. A live female was found and filmed for the first time in 2019. OTHER NAMES:raja ofu/rotu ofu(king/queen of the bees in Indonesian) SCIENTIFIC NAME: Megachile pluto DISCOVERY: in 1858 when the British explorer and naturalist Alfred Russel Wallace discovered it on the tropical Indonesian island of Bacan. He described the female bee as “a large, black wasp-like insect, with immense jaws like a stag beetle”. NICK NAME:flying bulldog Distribution and habitat Wallace's giant bee has only been reported from three islands of the North Moluccas in Indonesia: Bacan, Halmahera and Tidore. Very little is known about its distribution and habitat requirements, although it is thought that it is restricted to primary lowland forests. Makes its nest in termite mounds, using its large fang-like mandibles to collect sticky resin to protect its home from the termites. THREAT The islands have become home to oil palm plantations that now occupy much of the former native habitat. The bee’s habitat is threatened by massive deforestation for agriculture, and its size and rarity make it a target for collectors. There is, at present, no legal protection concerning trading of Wallace’s giant bee. IUCN Red List status “vulnerable”, Meaning: while its numbers are relatively solid, the remoteness of its population makes it hard to study.

The International Union for Conservation of Nature (IUCN)

 IUCN is aDLSC membership Union uniquely composed of both government and civil society organisations. It provides public, private and non-governmental organisations with the knowledge and tools that enable human progress, economic development and nature conservation to take place together.

214

 Created in 1948, IUCN has evolved into the world’s largest and most diverse environmental network. It harnesses the experience, resources and reach of its 1,300 Member organisations and the input of some 13,000 experts.  IUCN is the global authority on the status of the natural world and the measures needed to safeguard it. Its experts are organised into six commissions dedicated to species survival, environmental law, protected areas, social and economic policy, ecosystem management, and education and communication.  The IUCN Red List of Threatened Species is the world's most comprehensive inventory of the global conservation status of plant and animal species.  It uses a set of quantitative criteria to evaluate the extinction risk of thousands of species. These criteria are relevant to most species and all regions of the world  With its strong scientific base, The IUCN Red List is recognized as the most authoritative guide to the status of biological diversity.

IUCN Red List of Threatened Species

The IUCN Red List Categories

 The IUCN Red List Categories define the extinction risk of species assessed. Nine categories extend from NE (Not Evaluated) to EX (Extinct).  Critically Endangered (CR), Endangered (EN) and Vulnerable (VU) species are considered to be threatened with extinction.

6. Removal of sand from Thottappally opposed

News:  There is a growing Opposition to the government’s decision to allow the removal of mineral- rich sand from the estuary (pozhi) of Thottappally coast of Kerala.  The State government last month decided to extract sand from the estuary and dredge the leading channel to ensure smooth flow of water from the Kuttanad region through the Thottappally spillway.  According to officials, 1.5 lakh to 2 lakh cubic metres of sand will be removed from the estuary.  It directed the Irrigation Department to sell the sand either to Indian Rare Earths Ltd. (IRE) or Kerala MineralsDLSC and Metals Ltd. (KMML).  However, environmentalists and local residents say the move is aimed at extending the mineral-sand mining along the Thottappally coast.

215

Analysis:  The Thottappally coast is one of the prime nesting sites for Olive Ridley  The area is also home to several species of reptiles, migratory birds, and a large number of butterflies  To remove sand, they will have to cut more than 350 casuarina trees.  This will disturb the ecology of the area.  Removal of sand might result in the intrusion of salt in Kuttanad region.  The State government, a few years ago, allowed dredging of the harbour in the name of its development.  Residents say it has already turned out to be a disaster for them and Olive ridley turtles that come to the coast for nesting.  The turtles used to nest in an area of around 800 m along the Thottappally coast. Their natural habitat was damaged in Cyclone Ockhi in 2017. Residents say the opening of a new mining site at the estuary, along with the ongoing dredging at the harbour, will force Olive ridleys to totally abandon the coast.

PRELIMS CARDINAL: Olive Ridley turtles:  The turtle derives its name from the colour of its shell which is olive green hue in colour.  The olive ridley sea turtle (Lepidochelys olivacea), also known as the Pacific ridley sea turtle, are the second smallest[3] and most abundant of all sea turtles found in the world; this species of sea turtle is found in warm and tropical waters, primarily in the Pacific and Indian Oceans. They can also be found in the warm waters of the Atlantic Ocean.  These turtles are best known for their unique mass nesting called Arribada, where thousands of females come together on the same beach to lay eggs.  They are carnivores, and feed mainly on jellyfish, shrimp, snails, crabs, molluscs and a variety of fish and their eggs. These turtles spend their entire lives in the ocean, and migrate thousands of kilometers between feeding and mating grounds in the course of a year.  The coast of Orissa in India is the largest mass nesting site for the Olive-ridley, followed by the coasts of Mexico and Costa Rica.  Olive-ridleys face serious threats across their migratory route, habitat and nesting beaches, due to human activities such as turtle unfriendly fishing practices, development and exploitation of nesting beaches for ports, and tourist centres.

Conservation: IUCN status  Their IUCN status is vulnerable.  Their vulnerable status comes from the fact that they nest in a very small number of places, andDLSC therefore any disturbance to even one nest beach could have huge repercussions on the entire population.  The females return to the very same beach from where they first hatched, to lay their eggs.

216

Appendix I of CITES  The international trade in these turtles and their products is banned under CITES.  These listings were largely responsible for halting the large-scale commercial exploitation and trade of olive ridley skins. WWF-India  along with the fishermen community, has been involved in protecting the Olive ridley rookery at the mass nesting site at Rushikulaya, in Orissa, by fencing off the nesting area and patrolling it till hatching and ensuring a safe passage for the hatchlings to the sea. In Nuevo Vallarta, Mexico  when the turtles come to the beach to lay their eggs, some of them are relocated to a hatchery, where they have a much better chance to survive. If the eggs were left on the beach, they would face many threats such as getting washed away with the tide or getting poached. Once the eggs hatch, the baby turtles are carried to the beach and released. Chennai wildlife team  Another major project, in India involved in preserving the olive ridley sea turtle population was carried out in Chennai, where the Chennai wildlife team collected close to 10,000 eggs along the Marina coast, of which 8,834 hatchlings were successfully released into the sea in a phased manner.

7. Travel on a jet plane, using a little cooking oil

News:  Your used cooking oil could help fly a jet in the near future. The Dehradun-based Indian Institute of Petroleum has successfully finished a pilot test to convert used cooking oil into bio-aviation turbine fuel (Bio-ATF), which can be blended with conventional ATF and used as aircraft fuel.

Analysis:  The Institute collected used cooking oil from caterers and hotels in Dehradun for the pilot, which has now set the platform for commercial use of the technology.  The test assumes importance as the Food Safety and Standards Authority of India (FSSAI) has launched the Repurpose Cooking Oil (RUCO) initiative to collect and convert used cooking oil into bio-fuel.  The chemical composition of the used cooking oil is identical to other plant-based oils that have been converted to Bio-ATF.

PRELIMS CARDINAL:

Repurpose Used Cooking Oil (RUCO)  The Food DLSCSafety and Standards Authority of India (FSSAI) launched RUCO (Repurpose Used Cooking Oil), an initiative that will enable collection and conversion of used cooking oil to bio-diesel.  The initiative has been launched nearly a month after the food safety regulator notified

217

standards for used cooking oil.  FSSAI may also look at introducing regulations to ensure that companies that use large quantities of cooking oil hand it over to registered collecting agencies to convert it into biofuel.  Under this initiative, 64 companies at 101 locations have been identified to enable collection of used cooking oil.  For instance: McDonald’s has already started converting used cooking oil to biodiesel from 100 outlets in Mumbai and Pune.  The food safety body says that by 2020, it should be possible to recover about 220 crore litres of used cooking oil for conversion into bio-fuel.  Reducing the re-use of cooking oil in the food industry will have positive public health outcomes and its conversion into Bio-ATF will help the aviation sector reduce its carbon footprint

CSIR-Indian Institute of Petroleum  CSIR-Indian Institute of Petroleum (CSIR-IIP) is one of the leading constituent laboratories of the Council of Scientific & Industrial Research (CSIR). Established in 1960, the Institute is devoted to multidisciplinary areas of research and development in the downstream sector of hydrocarbon and related industry. It has dedicated experienced and qualified staff and is equipped with comprehensive state-of-art R&D facilities including pilot plants.  The Institute undertakes R&D work in areas of petroleum refining, natural gas, alternative fuels, petrochemicals utilization of petroleum products in IC engines and in industrial and domestic combustion. Institute also provides technical and analytical services to petroleum refining and related industry including technology transfer for developing novel, state-of-art technologies and products.  The institute maintains its leading position in conducting training programme for technical personnel from refining industry, petrochemical plants, automotive sector, power plants and other related user industries.  CSIR-IIP is committed to provide globally competitive technologies and services for hydrocarbon and related industries. This is achieved through total quality management and by anticipating and exceeding the expectations of customers through innovation, team work and commitment.

The Food Safety and Standards Authority of India (FSSAI)  established under Food Safety and Standards , 2006 which consolidates various acts & orders that have hitherto handled food related issues in various Ministries and Departments. FSSAI has been created for laying down science based standards for articles of food and to regulate their manufacture, storage, distribution, sale and import to ensure availability of safe and wholesome food for human consumption.  HighlightsDLSC of the Food Safety and Standard Act, 2006  Various central Acts like Prevention of Food Adulteration Act,1954,Fruit Products Order , 1955, Meat Food Products Order,1973,

218

 Vegetable Oil Products (Control) Order, 1947,Edible Oils Packaging (Regulation)Order 1988, Solvent Extracted Oil, De- Oiled Meal and Edible Flour (Control) Order, 1967, Milk and Milk Products Order, 1992 etc will be repealed after commencement of FSS Act, 2006.  The Act also aims to establish a single reference point for all matters relating to food safety and standards, by moving from multi- level, multi- departmental control to a single line of command. To this effect, the Act establishes an independent statutory Authority – the Food Safety and Standards Authority of India with head office at Delhi. Food Safety and Standards Authority of India (FSSAI) and the State Food Safety Authorities shall enforce various provisions of the Act.

Jet fuel, aviation turbine fuel (ATF),  Jet fuel, aviation turbine fuel (ATF), or avtur, is a type of aviation fueldesigned for use in aircraft powered by gas-turbine engines.  It is colorless to straw-colored in appearance.  The most commonly used fuels for commercial aviation are Jet A and Jet A-1, which are produced to a standardized international specification.  The only other jet fuel commonly used in civilian turbine-engine powered aviation is Jet B, which is used for its enhanced cold-weather performance.  Jet fuel is a mixture of a large number of different hydrocarbons. Because the exact composition of jet fuel varies widely based on petroleum source, it is impossible to define jet fuel as a ratio of specific hydrocarbons.  Jet fuel is therefore defined as a performance specification rather than a chemical compound. Furthermore, the range of molecular mass between hydrocarbons (or different carbon numbers) is defined by the requirements for the product, such as the freezing point or smoke point.

Indian Oil Aviation Service  Indian Oil Aviation Service is a leading aviation fuel solution provider in India and the most-preferred supplier of jet fuel to major international and domestic airlines.  Jet fuel is a colorless, combustible, straight-run petroleum distillate liquid. Its principal uses are as jet engine fuel. The most common jet fuel worldwide is a kerosene-based fuel classified as JET A-1.The governing specifications in India are IS 1571: 2001 (7th Rev).by ONGC.  Indian Oil is India's first ISO-9002 certified oil company conforming to stringent global quality requirements of aviation fuel storage & handling. Indian Oil Aviation also caters to the fuel requirements of the Indian Defence Services, besides refueling VVIP flights at all the airports and remote heli-pads/heli-bases across the Indian subcontinent

ONGC DLSC  Oil and Natural Gas Corporation (ONGC) is an Indian multinational oil and gas company earlier headquartered in Dehradun, Uttarakhand, India.

219

 As a Corporation, it's registered office is now at Deendayal Urja Bhavan, Vasant Kunj, New Delhi 110070 India.  It is a Public Sector Undertaking(PSU) of the Government of India, under the administrative control of the Ministry of Petroleum and Natural Gas.  It is India's largest oil and gas exploration and production company.  It produces around 70% of India's crude oil (equivalent to around 30% of the country's total demand) and around 62% of its natural gas

World Biofuel Day  World Biofuel Day is observed every year on 10th August to create awareness about the importance of non-fossil fuels as an alternative to conventional fossil fuels and to highlight the various efforts made by the Government in the biofuel sector. The World Biofuel Day is being observed by the Ministry of Petroleum & Natural Gas for the last three years.  Biofuels have the benefits of reducing import dependency on crude oil, cleaner environment, additional income to farmers and employment generation in rural areas. The biofuels programme is also in synergy with the Government of India initiatives for Make in India, Swachh Bharat and enhancing farmers’ income.  Since 2014, the Government of India has taken a number of initiatives to increase blending of biofuels. The major interventions include administrative price mechanism for ethanol, simplifying the procurement procedures of OMCs, amending the provisions of Industries (Development & Regulation) Act, 1951 and enabling lignocellulosic route for ethanol procurement.  These interventions of the Government of India have shown positive results. Ethanol blending in petrol has increased from 38 crore litres in the ethanol supply year 2013-14 to an estimated 141 crore litres in the ethanol supply year 2017-18. Bio-diesel blending in the country started from 10th August, 2015 and in the year 2018-19, Oil Marketing Companies have allocated 7.6 crore litres of biodiesel. Oil PSUs are also planning to set up 12 Second Generation (2G) Bio-refineries to augment ethanol supply and address environmental issues arising out of burning of agricultural biomass.

National Policy on Biofuels-2018  The Government approved the National Policy on Biofuels-2018 in June 2018.  The policy has the objective of reaching 20% ethanol-blending and 5% biodiesel-blending by the year 2030.  Among other things, the policy expands the scope of feedstock for ethanol production and has provided for incentives for production of advanced biofuels.

JATROPHA AS JET FUEL  The seeds of jatrophas contain 27–40% oil[13] (average: 34.4%[14]) that can be processed to produce a high-quality biodiesel fuel, usable in a standard diesel engine.  Edible (non-toxic)DLSC provenances can be used for animal feed and food.  Aviation fuels may be more widely replaced by biofuels such as jatropha oil than fuels for other forms of transportation.

220

 There are fewer planes than cars or trucks and far fewer jet fueling stations to convert than gas stations.  To fulfil the yearly demand for aviation fuel, based on demand in 2008 (fuel use has since grown), an area of farmland twice the size of France would need to be planted with jatropha, based on average yields of mature plantations on reasonably good, irrigated land  On December 30, 2008, Air New Zealand flew the first successful test flight from Auckland with a Boeing 747 running one of its four Rolls-Royce engines on a 50:50 blend of jatropha oil and jet A-1 fuel.[39][41] In the same press release, Air New Zealand announced plans to use the new fuel for 10% of its needs by 2013.

Ethanol in jet fuel  On April 1, ASTM International(American Society for Testing and Materials) added ethanol as an approved feedstock in ASTM D7566 Annex A5, the Standard Specification for Aviation Turbine Fuel Containing Synthesized Hydrocarbons for alcohol-to-jet synthetic paraffinic kerosene (ATJ-SPK)Using its expertise in chemistry and catalysis, PNNL(Pacific Northwest National Laboratory) developed a unique thermocatalytic process for converting ethanol into ATJ-SPK.( alcohol-to-jet synthetic paraffinic kerosene )

8. A case for Commons sense

News:  196 countries had met at Sharm el-Sheik, Egypt, in November 2018 for the 14th meeting of the Conference of Parties to the Convention on Biological Diversity (CBD).

Analysis: What was the context of the meeting?  When these countries met, a key question on top of the agenda was how to govern biological resources (or biodiversity) at different levels for the world’s sustainable future.  The meeting had come at a significant time: it was the CBD’s 25th year of implementation  countries had approximately 350 days to meet global biodiversity targets,  there was the backdrop of a damning report that humans have mismanaged biodiversity so badly that we have lost 60% of resources (which can never be recouped).  Finally, there was growing concern on how the Convention’s objectives of conservation, sustainable use and equitable sharing of benefits were being compromised, including by the parties themselves.

The principle of Commons:  For thousands of years, humans have considered natural resources and the environment as a global public good, with communities having diligently managed these resources using the principleDLSC of ‘Commons’.  In simple terms, these are a set of resources such as air, land, water and biodiversity that do not belong to one community or individual, but to humanity.

221

 All developments we see in the establishment of civilisations across the world, as well as agricultural development feeding the world today, are a result of such ‘Commons’ being managed by communities for centuries.

Commons resource management principles are ignored in CBD  Then came the urge of those with money and power to privatise these resources for individual prosperity in the form of property management principles, intellectual property rights and others.  In one form the CBD — a multi-lateral environmental agreement that has provided legal certainty to countries through the principle of sovereign rights over biodiversity — also contributed to states now owning the resources, including their rights on use and management.  Today, states control and manage biodiversity with strict oversight of who can use what and how. The intent of the CBD and having sovereign rights was to manage resources better.  However, the results of such management have been questionable.  A key reason cited is that ‘Commons’ and common property resource management principles and approaches are ignored and compromised.

The Significance of ‘Commons’?  According to estimates, a third of the global population depends on ‘Commons’ for their survival; 65% of global land area is under ‘Commons’, in different forms.  At least 293,061 million metric tonnes of carbon (MtC) are stored in the collective forestlands of indigenous peoples and local communities.  This is 33 times the global energy emissions in 2017. The significance of ‘Commons’ in supporting pollination (the cost estimated to be worth $224 billion annually at global levels) cannot be overlooked.

Commons in India:  In India, the extent of ‘Common’ land ranges between 48.69 million and 84.2 million hectares, constituting 15-25% of its total geographical area.  ‘Common’-pool resources contribute $5 billion a year to the incomes of poor Indian households.  Around 77% of India’s livestock is kept in grazing-based or extensive systems and dependent on ‘Commons’ pool resources.  And 53% of India’s milk and 74% of its meat requirements are met from livestock kept in extensive ‘Common’ systems.  Despite their significance, ‘Commons’ in India have suffered continued decline and degradation. National Sample Survey Office data show a 1.9% quinquennial rate of decline in the area of ‘Common’ lands, though microstudies show a much more rapid decline of 31- 55% over 50 years, jeopardising the health of systemic drivers such as soil, moisture, nutrient, biomass and biodiversity, in turn aggravating food, fodder and water crises.  As of 2013,DLSC India’s annual cost of environmental degradation has been estimated to be Rs. 3.75 trillion per year, i.e. 5.7% of GDP according to the World Bank.

222

Why the concern?  ‘Commons’ becoming uncommon is a major socio-political, economic and environmental problem.  While the state can have oversight over resource management, keeping people away from using and managing ‘Commons’ is against effective governance of ‘Commons’.  Further, it is important to note that the sovereign rights provided for, legally, under the CBD should not be misunderstood by the state as a handle to do away with ‘Commons’-based approaches to managing biodiversity, land, water and other resources.  Current discussions under the United Nations should focus on how and why ‘Commons’ have been negatively impacted by progressive pronouncements to save the earth and people.

Changing socio-political impact of migration on ‘Commons’  Another key concern is the changing socio-political impact of migration. Gone are the days when we can consider ‘Commons’ as resources relevant only for rural communities.  ‘Commons’ are now a major provider of livelihood options for both urban and peri-urban populations. The relevance of ‘Commons’ impacting urban dwellers cannot be overlooked with more urbanisation happening. Approaches for the future  There needs to be a review of current governance of biodiversity and natural resources.  Some experts have opined that after 18 years of action to reduce the rate of loss of biodiversity, it is very likely that the same 196 countries will meet in 2020 to apologise to the world for having failed to meet the objectives of the convention.  Next, in addition to seeking more money, time and capacities to deal with biodiversity and natural resource management, we need to focus on three specific approaches: . To re-introduce more strongly, the management and governance principles of ‘Commons’ approaches into decision-making and implementation of conservation, use and benefit sharing action; . To use Joseph Schumpeter’s approach of creative destruction to put resource management in the hands of the people; and . To re-look at Elinor Ostrom’s Nobel Prize winning principles of dealing with ‘Commons’.  The time for corrective approaches and action is now

PRELIMS CARDINAL: Convention on Biological Diversity  The Convention on Biological Diversity (CBD), known informally as the Biodiversity Convention, is a multilateral treaty.  The Convention has three main goals including: the conservation of biological diversity (or biodiversity); the sustainable use of its components; and the fair and equitable sharing of benefits arising from genetic resources.  Its objective is to develop national strategies for the conservation and sustainable use of biological diversity.DLSC  The Convention was opened for signature at the Earth Summit in Rio de Janeiro on 5 June 1992 and entered into force on 29 December 1993.  CBD has two supplementary agreements – Cartagena Protocol and Nagoya Protocol.

223

9. DNA forensics a vital tool in cracking wildlife crimes

News: In a major breakthrough it was found that a forensic DNA analysis by the Zoological Survey of India (ZSI), Kolkata can identify species and number of individuals killed and thus crack down on wildlife crimes.

Analysis:  Illegal wildlife crime is not confined to a region or to a country but it is an organized crime where several people are involved — from local hunters to the end buyers. This calls for an urgent need to employ techniques of DNA forensics to improve conviction rate which at present remains very low.  A DNA forensic analysis helped to catch a person accused of killing an Asian Palm Civet (Paradoxurus hermaphroditus).  DNA forensics are providing a major headway, with investigating agencies facing increased challenges of collecting evidence to ensure convictions in wildlife crimes.

PRELIMS CARDINAL:

Asian Palm Civet:  Asian palm civets (Paradoxurus hermaphroditus) also known as common palm civets are native to regions within and around Asia, ranging as far east as the Philippines and as far west as Kashmir.  They are widespread but are mostly found in southern China, northern Himalayas, southern India, and islands in the Indian Ocean, South China Sea, and the Philippine Sea.  The Asian palm civet inhabits the tropical jungles and rainforests throughout much of Asia.  The main populations of the Asian palm civet however are found in southern India, Sri Lanka, South-east Asia and southern China.  The Asian palm civet is solitary animal that only comes out under the cover of night to hunt and catch food. These nocturnal animals are primarily ground-dwelling and highly terrestrial The Asian palm civet is a carnivorous animal, and like other species of civet, it survives on a meat-based diet, supplemented by the odd plant or fruit. Threats:  Increasing deforestation (and therefore habitatloss) in their native regions has drastically affected the Asian palm civets.  The main reason for such extensive deforestation in the area is either for logging or to clear the land to make way for palm oil IUCN- of little concern  According to the IUCN, Asian palm civets are of little concern because they have a wide distribution,DLSC large populations, are highly adaptable, and have a stable population trend. Schedule II under the Wildlife (Protection) Act, 1972.  Schedule I and part II of Schedule II provide absolute protection - offences under these are prescribed the highest penalties.

224

 Species listed in Schedule III and Schedule IV are also protected, but the penalties are much lower.  Schedule V includes the animals which may be hunted.  The specified endemic plants in Schedule VI are prohibited from cultivation and planting.The hunting to the Enforcement authorities have the power to compound offences under this Schedule (i.e. they impose fines on the offenders). CITES Appendix III  There is a quota in place in Indonesia, precluding trade from certain areas, setting a cap on the number of civets that can be taken from the wild, and allowing only 10% of those removed from the wild to be sold domestically.  This quota is largely ignored by hunters and traders and is not enforced by authorities.This species has become popular as a pet in Indonesia in recent years, causing a rise in the numbers found in markets in Java and Bali.  The majority of the animals sold as pets originate from the wild. The high numbers of animals seen, lack of adherence to the quota and lack of enforcement of the laws are causes for conservation concern.

One of the most expensive coffees in the world made from faeces of Asian palm civet  Kopi luwak or civet coffee, is coffee that includes partially digested coffee cherries, eaten and defecated by the Asian palm civet.Fermentation occurs as the cherries pass through a civet's intestines, and after being defecated with other fecal matter, they are collected.  Producers of the coffee beans argue that the process may improve coffee through two mechanisms, selection – civets choosing to eat only certain cherries – and digestion – biological or chemical mechanisms in the animal's digestive tract altering the composition of the coffee cherries.  The traditional method of collecting feces from wild civets has given way to intensive farming methods in which civets in battery cage systems are force-fed the cherries. This method of production has raised ethical concerns about the treatment of civets due to "horrific conditions" including isolation, poor diet, small cages and a high mortality rate.  Although kopi luwak is a form of processing rather than a variety of coffee, it has been called one of the most expensive coffees in the world, with retail prices reaching €550 / US$700 per kilogram.

The Zoological Survey of India (ZSI)  ZSI is one of four organisations authorised by the Government of India to submit species identification reports from the confiscated materials. Brief History  The Zoological Survey of India (ZSI) was established on 1st July, 1916 to promote survey, exploration and research leading to the advancement in our knowledge of various aspectsDLSC of exceptionally rich life of the erstwhile ´British Indian Empire´.  The survey has its genesis in the establishment of the Zoological Section of the Indian Museum at Calcutta in 1875.  By gradually strengthening its staff and expanding its research programme, the Survey

225

has met the challenge of the past and is on its way to meet the demands of the future. Background  India is recognized as one of the seventeen mega diversity countries of the world with four biodiversity hot spots -Western Ghats / Sri Lanka, Indo Burma, Himalayas and Sundaland.  There are about 1.7 million living species described from all over the world and another 15 million species are waiting to be discovered. In India till date, 1,00,693 species of animals have been described, but a large number of species are expected to be discovered especially from the lower invertebrate groups occurring in various ecosystems.  Also the status of the higher group of animals especially those in the Schedules need to be studied before their habitats get disappeared.  Scientists in ZSI are engaged in exploring, naming, describing, classifying and documenting animals from all over India.  But a lot more needs to be done to understand and investigate the faunal diversity of India in the light of the objectives of the Convention of Biological Diversity for scientific use and equitable sharing of the benefits of animal resources of the country.

The objectives of ZSI are classified as follows:  Primary Objectivess . Exploration, Survey, Inventorying and Monitoring of faunal diversity in various States, Ecosystems and Protected areas of India. . Taxonomic studies of all faunal components collected. . Periodic review of the Status of Threatened and Endemic species. . Preparation of Red Data Book, Fauna of India and Fauna of States. . Bioecological studies on selected important communities/species. . Preparation of databases for the recorded species of the country. . Maintenance & Development of National Zoological Collections. . Training, Capacity Building and Human Resource Development. . Faunal Identification, Advisory services and Library Services. . Publication of results including Fauna of India and Fauna of States.  Secondary Objectives . Environmental Impact Studies. . Maintenance and Development of Museum at Headquarters and Regional Stations. . Development of ENVIS and CITES Centers. . Research Fellowship, Associateship and Emeritus Scientist Programmes. . Collaborative research programmes on Biodiversity with other Organizations. . GIS and Remote Sensing studies for animal diversity as well as for selected threatenedspecies. . Chromosomal Mapping and DNA finger printing.  Scientists at the ZSI, pointed out that in most cases the samples they receive from investigatingDLSC agencies in cases of wildlife crime are disfigured and have lost characters of morphological identity, which poses a major challenge. Wider database  ZSI are not just confining their efforts up to species identification but scientists are also

226

involved in creating a reference database to assign the seizures to the source of origin, identifying sexes from seizures to understand poaching/ hunting pressure on the species which might impact the species demography in coming years.  they have a dedicated facility for DNA analysis at the ZSI, where we can identify samples at the molecular level using DNA forensics. This new tool is helping in solving a number of wildlife crimes.The ZSI has also formulated a standard operating procedure in the investigation of wildlife crime.  The ZSI also organised a workshop for law enforcement agencies titled ‘Wildlife Forensics and Crime Control', where the participants were informed on using new technological tools to combat wildlife crime.

Enforcement agencies for wild life crimes  Penalties are predescribed in section 51 of wild life protection act 1972.  Enforcement can be performed by agencies such as the Forest Department, the Police, the Wildlife Crime Control Bureau (WCCB), the Customs and the Central Bureau of Investigation(CBI).  Chargesheets can be filed directly by the Forest Department.  Other enforcement agencies, often due to the lack of technical expertise, hand over cases to the Forest Department.

10. Wasted effort: half of India’s waste-to-energy plants defunct

News:  Nearly half of India’s waste-to-energy (WTE) plants, meant to convert non-biodegradable waste, are defunct. Further, the country’s inability to segregate waste has resulted in even the existing plants working below capacity, says an analysis by the Centre for Science and Environment.

Analysis:  Since 1987, 15 WTE plants have been set up across the country. However, seven of these plants have shut down.  Apart from Delhi, these include plants at Kanpur, Bengaluru, Hyderabad, Lucknow, Vijayawada and Karimnagar.  The key reasons for closure . the plants’ inability to handle mixed solid waste. . the high cost of electricity generated by them that renders it unattractive to power companies.They produce power at nearly ₹7 per unit, which is more than the ₹3-5 offered by thermal as well as solar sources. . The fundamental reason is the quality and composition of waste. MSW (municipal solid waste) in IndiaDLSC has low calorific value and high moisture content. As most wastes sent to the WTE plants are unsegregated, they also have high inert content. These wastes are just not suitable for burning in these plants. To burn them, additional fuel is required which makes these plants expensive to run.

227

 Government of india policies: . However, this has not stopped the government from betting big on WTE. . The NITI Aayog, as part of the Swachh Bharat Mission, envisages 800 megawatt from WTE plants by 2018-19, which is 10 times the capacity of all the existing WTE plants put together. . It also proposes setting up a Waste-to-Energy Corporation of India, which would construct incineration plants through PPP models. Currently, there are 40-odd WTE plants at various stages of construction.  Statistics . About 1.43 lakh tonnes per day (TPD) of municipal solid waste (MSW) is generated across the country. Of this, 1.11 lakh TPD (77.6%) is collected and 35,602 TPD (24.8%) processed. . In addition, India generates close to 25,940 TPD of plastic waste of which 15,342 remains uncollected, according to the Central Pollution Control Board. . As per the Union Ministry of Environment and Forests, MSW generation will reach 4.5 lakh TPD by 2031 and 11.9 lakh TPD by 2050.  The WTEs have also triggered widespread opprobrium among citizens. For instance, there has been a continuous protest against the Okhla WTE plant for polluting the environment. In 2016, the National Green Tribunal (NGT) slapped environmental compensation fine of ₹25 lakh on the plant.

PRELIMS CARDINAL: Solid waste components:  Construction and demolition waste – wastes generated in construction of new buildings, renovation and demolition work.  Plastic waste– includes polythene bags, plastic bottles etc  Biomedical waste – wastes involved in diagnosis, treatment and immunization such as human and animal anatomical waste, treatment apparatus such as needles and syringes and cytotoxic drugs.  Hazardous waste– wastes that cause immediate danger to exposed individuals or environment.  E-waste – includes discarded computer monitors, motherboards, cathode ray tubes (CRTs), printed circuit board (PCB), mobile phones and chargers, compact discs, headphones etc.

Solid Waste Management  It is a term that is used to refer to the process of collecting and treating solid wastes. It also includes solutions for recycling items that do not belong to garbage or trash.

Issues and Challenges in India’s SWM  With rapidDLSC urbanisation, there is substantial increase in solid waste generation which has strained the Solid Waste Management System  Most Urban local bodies in India struggle to provide efficient waste management

228

services due to financial problems, lack of infrastructure and technology  Though solid waste management rules mandate source segregation of wastes, it has largely not been followed. Due to improper segregation of waste, much of recyclability of waste is lost.  Most of the municipal authorities deposit solid waste at open dump sites without any leachates treatment. These sites emanate foul smell and is breeding grounds for pests and insects causing disease. Liquid seeping out of waste pollutes groundwater and poses a serious threat to health and environment. Further, these landfill sites are also responsible for air pollution.  Most of the funds for solid waste management is allotted to collection and transportation, with very less left for processing or resource recovery and disposal. Also many waste-to-energy plants are non-operational.  The waste management sector in India is constituted primarily of the informal workers who come from the urban poor. The rag pickers, who are instrumental in waste recycling, are highly vulnerable to health damages owing to poor work conditions.  Apathy on the part of management and also poor community participation is a major constraint in solid waste management in India.

Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB)  The Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB), statutory organisation, was constituted in September, 1974 under the Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974. Further, CPCB was entrusted with the powers and functions under the Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981.  It serves as a field formation and also provides technical services to the Ministry of Environment and Forests of the provisions of the Environment (Protection) Act, 1986.  Principal Functions of the CPCB, as spelt out in the Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974, and the Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981, (i) to promote cleanliness of streams and wells in different areas of the States by prevention, control and abatement of water pollution, and (ii) (ii) to improve the quality of air and to prevent, control or abate air pollution in the country.

The National Green Tribunal  The National Green Tribunal has been established on 18.10.2010 under the National Green Tribunal Act 2010 for effective and expeditious disposal of cases relating to environmental protection and conservation of forests and other natural resources including enforcement of any legal right relating to environment and giving relief and compensation for damages to persons and property and for matters connected therewith or incidental thereto.  It is a specialized body equipped with the necessary expertise to handle environmental disputes involvingDLSC multi-disciplinary issues.  The Tribunal shall not be bound by the procedure laid down under the Code of Civil Procedure, 1908, but shall be guided by principles of natural justice.

229

 The Tribunal's dedicated jurisdiction in environmental matters shall provide speedy environmental justice and help reduce the burden of litigation in the higher courts.  The Tribunal is mandated to make and endeavour for disposal of applications or appeals finally within 6 months of filing of the same.  Initially, the NGT is proposed to be set up at five places of sittings and will follow circuit procedure for making itself more accessible.  New Delhi is the Principal Place of Sitting of the Tribunal and Bhopal, Pune, Kolkata and Chennai shall be the other four place of sitting of the Tribunal.  It draws inspiration from the India's constitutional provision of Article 21, which assures the citizens of India the right to a healthy environment.

SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT RULES, 2016  The Government has revamped the Municipal Solid Wastes (Management and Handling) Rules 2000 and notified the new Solid Waste Management Rules, 2016 on April 8, 2016.  The salient features of the SWM Rules, 2016 are as under;

1. Areas Cover: These rules are applicable to; (i) Every urban local body (Mega city to Panchayat level), (ii) outgrowths in urban agglomerations, (iii) census towns as declared by the Registrar General and Census Commissioner of India, (iv) notified areas, (v) notified industrial townships, (vi) areas under the control of Indian Railways, (vii) airports/ airbases, (viii) Ports and harbours, (ix) defence establishments, (x) special economic zones, (xi) State and Central government organisations, (xii) places of pilgrims, (xiii) religious and historical importance as may be notified by respective State government from time to time and (xiv) every domestic, institutional, commercial and any other non residential solid waste generator situated in the areas. 2. The Waste Generators • Every household • Event organizers • Street Vendors • RWAs & Market Associations • Gated Community having more than area 5000 sq.m. • Hotels & restaurants, etc. 3. Duties of Waste generators and Authorities: (i) Every Waste Generators shall segregate waste and store separately and hand over to Municipal workers or authorized waste pickers. (ii) MinistryDLSC of Environment, Forest & Climate Change shall constitute ‘Central Monitoring Committee’ to monitor and review every year. (iii) MoUD shall frame National Policy on SWM and coordinate with States/UTs, provide technical guidelines, financial support, training to local bodies, etc. (iv) Departments of Fertilizers & Chemicals shall assist in market development for

230

city compost and make available to companies (3/4 bags compost: 6/7 bags Fertilizers). (v) Ministry of Agriculture shall make flexible Fertilizer Control Order, promote utilization of compost, testing facility for compost and issue guidelines. (vi) Ministry of Power shall fix tariff of power generation from W-T-E project and ensure distribution through companies. (vii) MNRE shall facilitate infrastructure for waste-to-Energy plants and provide subsidy. (viii) Secy- Incharge, UD (sate/UT) shall prepare State Policy/Strategy, adopt 3- Rs, coordinate for state planning, identification of common/regional landfills, notify guidelines of buffer zones. (ix) District Collector/Magistrate shall facilitate identification of landfill site, quarterly review the performance of local bodies. (x) Secretary, Panchayats: same as Secy. UD at Panchayat level. (xi) CPCB shall coordinate with SPCBs/PCCs for monitoring and Annual Reports, formulation of standards, review new technologies, prepare guidelines for buffer zones restricting from residential, commercial and construction activities areas; and inter-state movement of waste. (xii) Local Authority/Panchayats shall prepare SWM plan with time line and its implementation, segregate, adopt 3-Rs, material recovery, processing/ disposal of Waste, user fee and levy spot fine. (xiii) SPCBs/PCCs shall monitor, issue authorization and regulate. (xiv) Manufacturers/Brand owners shall facilitate collect back wastes of their products and provide pouch for packaging sanitary wastes, etc. (xv) Industry (cement, power plant, etc.) shall use RDF within 100 km. (xvi) Operator of facilities shall follow guidelines/standards 4. Criteria for Hilly Region: Avoid landfill, make waste transfer stations, strict action for littering and construct landfill at plain areas. 5. Waste to Energy plant for waste with 1500 Kcal/kg and above for coincineration in cement and power plants. 6. Time Frame for Implementation of SWM Rules: (a) Landfill Identification : 1 year (b) Procurement of waste processing facilities : 2 years (c) Ensure segregation of waste : 2 years (d) Cities up to 1 million population : 2 Years (e) Million plus cities : 3 years (f) Setting up sanitary landfills : 3 years (g) Bioremediation/capping of old landfills : 5 years 7. Review of implementation of rules at Various levels; (a) MoEF&CC, Central Monitoring Committee : Every year (b) DistrictDLSC Collector review performance of Local authorities : Quarterly (c) SPCBs/PCCs review implementation of Rules with DMA : half yearly (d) Secretary Incharge, UD- State level Advisory Committee : half yearly